

Class 'P^ 

Rnnlc .-B<5~f 

t 

Copight }l“ 

COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT 






3 ESH'' ;'.'^' '' " 



r • 

1 

, V 

• . 

’'«■ > 

. 



.'r • 

> * 

,» M 


• 4 

'.^ ’ 

• . 1 

* ' ■ t 

<- "rli 

h 


•- 1 

•* 1 . 

• 

•■i’ 

i 


, i. 


I I 




I » 


. . ( 


1 / 


.f 



■ 'V ' 


•■’ )’• ■' V 

«f '■». 1 > 


. r 





v; 

• *' ' • ' ^ 
! • . irr>*s 

.. . . r ff 


. ' ;-T ■ 

I ' % j 

r* ' * ' ' * ’’■ ' tf 

^ .^-J-'l ' ' ft . i ■ 

, ^ • W' 

V 

•‘ . ■ '■■ '-^vvrf 

■ ( ■ - ' "■ 

'iM'm, - '■' 

<Ur» 'fv 

4 't .f ■ ? v‘' 


XV'"' ■ •■* .'• ‘ * 

..V- '... 

-V:.' 



. 1 


« t 


> 




/■f. 


■'*• V 



% . Ii . • 



1 » 



V V.. m 



f - • 


( 4 


. , ‘w . 


^7 ' ' •i'Wf 

..' ^'.T 


^ V: 


I »’ 



\ ' '»r 





» •" 


-'•i- 











i 




i, 1 • ♦ M «s ( * ' ' • .' I* '• ■ "S' 

■.■• '• ;: -I- ■ ../Arm ■ 



i 


■ * • fy f 

I , *, >'•' • . * V. n‘ 
V- ‘ *r ’ /- 


7;vvife.,' 


w ' ‘ 




T* »' ‘ > 

'I t . .1. 


. « 



'v' 





#, 



I- 



r yjk^u 




^ ii ^ • i \: ■^' 4 7 \ '. 

.. y*^ .- , '■■ 

‘ fJJ 

tf/im •;! 

■ *<I 







%!' ■' ■ '-^4 " . 












4/ 


Xt 


I *. 


* % I 



I ¥ 


I ' ' ' .tv-’ 

'., ir^, V, ■ V-- -■-• ■ - 


• . ;, ' ■*•; ■■ ‘ 
^ ; .' ■• V' r ' >v 

iiP ''^4 


; ■'■ , •,■“! ?.»- ■ :• !■ 

■ N X. -V; -■ . 


I j’: • 


,T. 


■.J 


I • 


.iii 


.-5 . . 
-•f. •. 


• ‘‘ li - 1 

^v^ V- ■ 

Lli*_ " • 


\ .'/■ ■ ■ ■/ ; “^-p ‘ 



I'ft 


«i ‘ • 

T-j 1 ^ 1 .’ * ' — ,— , — I * 

■' (WM 7 . ■iu ■ 

' * V, 1 . y > '• •> . ^ 

^'“'v ' v ’ craB 

“*'•»' ' , i- '• • ' . 


• ‘ 


sxx* 




t.'. -t 

V ^♦■■r. 

* ' < , I '• 

• ’DV/*J ‘ 




f'.rs 


H"' ' 




<jii . 


K^'W ' ■V'v ■; ■-• 

■■!-■; ' • f: 




• a ' ’ ' 

*: -• ' 

• » ^j 



► ' « 


1 

. ; ^ 



V 


I- 


ik'J' “•]- % - -s 




... .. ’t\> 

-gpEpg / 

‘ ' '.A^ ,i 

• ii A-!^ii : 'HA 

ifr V ' ihi*,<p'i - h5ni'^ W f 



■- >, -V- 

as . ; ■'; ',i 


»j 


I v’:-’^ '- . : ■ ' Jw 

ty.’ ' ^ •* ' > *; 

Cj V * *■■*, ^ "'o', ’. ^ 

- ^.4 •.■A '. ‘ s. «‘ 


• A' ■■' ^ ■ ' 

It; 


I » ♦ 


; ^'^^ 

i-, 

’t* ^ ^ ’“1 

A fcl'. 


• 

» - I 


'iM 


1 • 







11 ^, "•;■■■;/ ■' ' ;„ '■ _ . 1 : V;/ ' .■'•■ ■'■ . ■• ‘vX ^W-m- 11 

'.‘i -> ■ ; ■■:-i.v '‘:V‘ .^i... 's . ■ , 1 -. ■ '■ 

^ „vlv -';' ■■■»'■ f-i' iiiY' VH ■ ''^' •^sra^ffifflSSSsGi 




ifti* 

f^r. M 



">'“/ . fv- 

» i t ‘ »• . V ' • 




Vn 


•i 




SJi. 


•L'v.. 




;j7' 


























THEFOURCORNERS 


SCHOOL 

By 

AMYE.BLANCHARD 


Geor^eW Jacobs ^Company 
Philadelphia. 




1 - 


LI8HARY ot congress’! 
) wo OoDie& Attai'Hif. 

JuL 2J laob 

/7w*rfyM4iM tt.iijf 

cr AAC. Nj. 
OOPt b. 


Copyright, 1908, by 
George W. Jacobs and Company 
Published Julyy igo8 



All rights reserved 
Printed in U. S. A. 


CONTENTS 


1 . 

The First Evening 



7 

II. 

One of Jack's Scrapes . 



25 

III. 

A New Boarder . 



45 

IV. 

Daniella’s Coming 



65 

V. 

Jean’s Adventure . 



85 

VI. 

When Christmas Came . 



105 

VII. 

Little Christine . 



127 

VIII. 

A Well-Laid Scheme . 



149 

IX. 

Back to School 



169 

X. 

Unc’ Landy . 



191 

XI. 

What Went on at School 



211 

XII. 

Limericks 



233 

XIII. 

A Romance . 



255 

XIV. 

Blue China and the Kitten 



275 

XV. 

The Velvet Frock 



293 

XVI. 

Sour Grapes . 



313 

XVII. 

The Easter Holidays . 



331 

XVIII. 

Poor Polly . 



351 

XIX. 

A Culprit 



371 

XX. 

The Prizes . 



389 




















ILLUSTRATIONS 

Jo sprang to her feet, bowing right and 

left ...... Frontispiece 

Jack was in high glee over the play Facing page 52 

Jean wondered at the dinginess and con- 
fusion *< << 98 

Come on, Danny, or you will miss the 
dance ” « 

Next came the awarding of the second 

prize 394 

























CHAPTER I 


THE FIRST EVENING 

One evening in late September, four very 
serious-looking girls stood watching a carriage 
drive away from a large gray house, which 
stood a little way back from the street, in one 
of Boston’s suburbs. The eldest girl’s lips 
were tightly compressed, but there were tears 
in her eyes when presently she tried to comfort 
the little sister who clung to her in an abandon 
of grief. 

“ It won’t be so awfully long. Jack,” she said, 
“ and you know Christmas will soon be here, 
when we are all going to see Mr. St. Nick and 
Miss Dolores. Now do stop crying.” 

‘‘ Mary Lee is crying, too, and she is bigger 
than I am,” returned Jac4c between catches of 
her breath. 

‘‘I am not crying,” declared Mary Lee 
stoutly. 

‘‘Your eyes are red and so is your nose,” 
Jack insisted. 

‘‘ That is because it is cold.” 


lo The Four Corners at School 

“ I don’t think it is a bit cold, not in here,” 
said Jack. 

“ It is a real pleasant sunny room,” said Nan, 
** much better than I expected. Both rooms are 
pleasant, and there are two beds in each. 
Three of the windows face the south, and there 
are nice big closets.” 

I am glad the windows face south,” said 
Mary Lee ; “ we can look toward home if we 
can’t see it. Oh, dear, why couldn’t we be at 
home with Aunt Sarah and the boys, instead of 
coming away off here ? ” 

“ Because,” returned Nan, ‘‘ we shall have 
superior advantages, Aunt Helen says, and as 
long as Aunt Helen and Mother will be in 
Europe and we can’t have them, I don’t see 
that it makes much difference where we are.” 

“ I think it makes a great difference whether 
one is free or has a jailor.” 

“ Now, Mary Lee,” said Nan with an elder 
sister’s air of reproof, “ why will you put 
notions into the children’s heads ? I am sure 
Miss Barnes seemed very nice.” 

“ Yes, in a way, but she isn’t home folks. 
Oh, dear, every minute is taking mother 
further; it is four o’clock and the train has 
gone.” 

At this Jack had a fresh outburst of grief, and 
her twin sister Jean wailed more unhappily. 


11 


The First Evening 

while the tears started afresh to even Nan^s 
eyes. She recovered herself first, however, and 
said decidedly, “We must not talk about it. 
Come, let’s unpack. Mother would want us to 
do that, and if we are going to keep this up 
every one of us will have red eyes and noses by 
six o’clock, when we have to go to supper. We 
shall have to face the other boarders and I hate 
to think of being pitied.” 

This remark had a wholesome effect, for, as 
each of the others contemplated the picture of 
four pale-faced, red-eyed girls filing into the 
dining-room, they, one and all, resolved to re- 
frain from tears, and the trunks were turned to 
as a desperate means of reestablishing their 
equanimity. 

Nan hurried through her unpacking that she 
might give Jack a hand, for Jack’s bump of or- 
der was not largely developed. Jean and Mary 
Lee took exact account of where their belong- 
ings were placed, and by the time Nan had ar- 
ranged her clothing and her little sister’s, the 
other two had their bureau drawers neatly filled. 

“ Do you suppose we must change our 
frocks ? ” said Mary Lee. 

“Oh, I suppose so,” returned Nan. “We’d 
better be on the safe side, for our traveling 
clothes look a little mussy. I shall put on my 
red challis and you might wear your blue one. 


12 


The Four Corners at School 


Mary Lee. The kiddies can dike themselves 
in white frocks ; they have more of those than 
anything.” 

Their toilets made, they sat gravely around 
waiting for a summons to supper. A Chinese 
gong sounded precisely at six, and the four 
solemnly filed out and went timidly down-stairs. 
At the foot of the steps a gray-haired lady was 
waiting for them. ** These are our new pupils, I 
am sure,” she said in a very polite but rather 
stiff manner. “ I must introduce myself to you. 
I am Mrs. Channing, Miss Barnes’ sister, and it 
is my province to see to the affairs of the house 
while she rules the schoolroom. Will you tell 
me your names, that I may make you known to 
your housemates ? ” 

“ This,” said Nan, her hand on her sister’s 
shoulder, “ is Mary Lee.” 

“ Ah, yes.” Mrs. Channing put up her lor- 
gnette. “ Do you not call her simply Mary ? ’' 

“ Oh, never. No, indeed, never,” Mary Lee 
spoke decidedly. “ I shouldn’t know who was 
meant if you left off the Lee.” 

“ Ah, then we will call you as you are ac- 
customed. And the others ? ” 

“ The taller one is Jack, the little one Jean.” 
Nan gave the information. 

“Jack, did I understand you to say? A 
singular name.” 


The First Evening 13 

“ Her name is Jacqueline,’^ returned Nan a 
little sharply. “ I am Nan.” 

“ Anna, I suppose.” 

“No, Nancy.” Nan was not disposed to be 
courteous. 

“ I am Mrs. Channing, you may remember,” 
said that lady, and Nan recognized the re- 
proof. 

As it was Saturday, one or two of the board- 
ing pupils were not at the table, they having 
gone home for over Sunday. Among these was 
Charlotte Loring, whom the Corners had met in 
California ; the other girls were presented to 
the four Corners as they entered the dining- 
room. “Young ladies,” said Mrs. Channing, 
“ these are the Misses Corner ; Miss Nancy, the 
eldest. Miss Mary, who tells me she is always 
called Mary Lee, Miss Jacqueline and Miss Jean. 
I hope you will extend to them the right hand of 
fellowship and make their stay with us as agree- 
able as possible. 

“Young ladies,” she turned to the four sisters, 
“these are Miss Abby Russell, Miss Elizabeth 
Trask, Miss Frances Powers, and Miss Josephine 
Keys.” She named the girls in the order in 
which they sat at table, then she indicated the 
places the Corners were to take and they seated 
themselves in silence. 

As it was Saturday night, the usual New 


14 The Four Corners at School 

England dish for that occasion was on the 
table. There were also baked apples, bread 
and butter and some small cakes which Mrs. 
Channing called cookies. As not one of the 
Corners had ever eaten baked beans, they merely 
tasted the spoonful to which each was helped 
and made their supper upon bread and butter, 
baked apples and cookies, not a very hearty 
supper at that, for they were ill at ease, home- 
sick and miserable. 

After supper, Mrs. Channing led the way to 
the sitting-room, explaining that Miss Barnes 
had gone to the city to a concert and would 
not return till late. The sitting-room was a 
very pleasant place. Flowering plants were 
in the windows, a piano stood open, a phono- 
graph had place in one corner, books and 
magazines lay on the large table in the centre 
of the room, on the table, too, stood a big lamp 
which cast an agreeable light over the room. 
The four Corners huddled themselves together 
on the sofa, the twins in the middle and their 
elder sisters at each end ; the other girls sat on 
the opposite side of the room. 

“We might have some music,” said Mrs. 
Channing, “ but as our best musician. Miss 
Coring, is absent, we shall have to resort to the 
phonograph.” 

Jack nudged Nan and whispered : “ She 


The First Evening 15 

doesn^t know that you can play." Nan shook 
her head to silence her, and they sat listening 
to the records which Mrs. Channing put on 
one after the other. Jack liked a phonograph 
and was greatly interested in some of the 
records. Nan whisperingly told the names of 
these, and of some others with which she was 
familiar. Mary Lee and Jean looked bored, 
however, and after a while Mrs. Channing pro- 
posed that they should read aloud in turn. She 
selected Josephine Keys to begin a short story, 
and this young person promptly took her place 
by the table. She was a plump, dark-eyed, 
dark-haired girl, with merry dimples, and a 
saucy turned-up nose. Nan decided that she 
would like her better than any of the others. 
All these girls were older than the twins, a fact 
which Jack deplored. 

Josephine read well, and the listeners on the 
sofa became quite absorbed in the story. At 
the end of fifteen minutes, the book was handed 
to Frances Powers who read in a sharp, stilted 
way, and the girls found their interest flagging. 
Frances was the direct opposite of Josephine in 
appearance, being tall, thin, light haired, with 
pale blue eyes and a long nose. She was very 
precise in both dress and manner, and the 
Corner girls decided that she did not attract 
them. 


i6 The Four Corners at School 

At nine o’clock Mrs. Channing suggested 
that the four newcomers might like to go to 
their rooms, as they were probably tired, and 
they solemnly bade good-night to the company 
and made their exit, glad to escape. 

‘‘ Do you suppose it will be like that every 
night?” said Mary Lee, breathing a sigh of 
relief, as soon as they had closed the door of 
their room after them. 

I surely hope not,” said Nan in reply. 
“ Did you ever know anything so stiff ? And 
not one of those girls came over to make 
friends with us. It wouldn’t be like that down 
our way.” 

“I saw the one they call Josephine looking 
at us and smiling with her eyes,” put in Jack. 
“ I think she’d be real nice if we knew her.” 

I think so, too,” agreed Nan. 

“I rather liked the one in the blue frock,” 
said Mary Lee. 

*‘You mean Abby Russell,” answered Nan. 
“ Yes, she has a nice pleasant face, but isn’t 
Mrs. Channing the stiffest old thing imaginable ? 
You’d think she’d been swallowing ramrods.” 

Here a gentle tap at the door caused a dis- 
creet silence. Nan want forward to see who was 
there. She found Josephine Keys in her dress- 
ing-gown. “ May I come in ? ” she asked. 

Nan held open the door. “ Oh, do,” she said. 


17 


The First Evening 

“ I’ve slipped off,” said Josephine. “ Char- 
lotte Loring rooms with me when she is here, 
but as she has gone home I could manage to 
escape. She’s told me all about you girls. 
Your mother is in Europe, isn’t she ? ” 

“ She will be all winter,” returned Nan. 
“She and Aunt Helen sail next Tuesday. We 
wanted to stay in New York to see them off, 
but Aunt Helen thought it would be too hard 
for mother, and not so easy for us, either, so 
they came on to Boston with us and left us 
here. They went right back to New York.” 
The four sisters looked very sober during this 
recital. 

Josephine took up the conversation again. 
“ I was bound to have a few words with you to- 
night, for I shall never forget how lonely I was 
when I first came. Old China is so set and 
particular that we can never be quite as we like 
when she is around for fear she will think we 
are getting too gay.” 

“ Old China?” said Nan inquiringly. 

“Yes, that is what we call Mrs. Channing. 
She looks as if she had been put together with 
cement. Miss Barnes is very different. She 
isn’t larkey either, but she can bend without 
breaking, and we all respect her, and are really 
very fond of her. If she had been here to-night 
we should have mixed up more. I thought you 


i8 The Four Corners at School 

must think us all as rigid as Bunker Hill monu- 
ment, and so I just had to run over to welcome 
you in my own way. I’m supposed to have 
retired with a headache, but I took my chance 
of getting here without being seen. If old 
China goes to my door all will be quiet and 
she will be satisfied that I am not dancing a 
skirt-dance or carousing. She is such an old 
spy.” 

“ Aren’t we allowed to talk after we go to our 
rooms ? ” asked Mary Lee in dismay. 

“ Oh, yes, but I am supposed to be alone to- 
night, and we are not allowed to visit each oth- 
er’s rooms at night after nine. It isn’t much 
after, and Miss Barnes winks at it, if we stretch 
the time a little on Saturday night, but old 
China counts every minute.” 

“What happens if you don’t keep the rule?” 

“Oh, nothing much. If I get found out it 
will count against me in my report, but I don't 
mind that ; I’d rather have the fun than a per- 
fect report any day.” 

“ Oh, then come over where you can sit down 
and be comfortable.” Nan’s hospitality over- 
came her scruples. “ Have some candy ? ” 
She offered a box which had been provided by 
a good friend in New York. 

“Good,” cried Josephine, helping herself. 
“I’m glad I came. Isn’t this fine? Now don’t 


The First Evening 19 

you girls think we are a set of dummies, for we 
are not. We have good times among our- 
selves, and Miss Barnes does lots of things for 
us. She is a little too sure that Boston is the 
whole of New England and that New England 
is the whole of the United States, but maybe 
she will find out her mistake now that you've 
come. It is only when she is out and old Blue 
China has it all her own way that things go so 
horridly." 

“Why blue China?" asked Nan. 

“ Oh, don’t you know ? To be sure, you have 
never seen her cards ; Mrs. H. Belle w Chan- 
ning. Her first name is Hannah, and she can't 
bear it. She never likes Miss Barnes to call her 
that, and insists upon Belle, but we think Blue 
China is lovely." 

“ So it is," cried the others laughing. 

“ I think I have you all down fine,” con- 
tinued Josephine, nibbling a chocolate. “ Nan 
is the tall one, Mary Lee the next. Jack the 
biggest twin and Jean the little one. Am I 
right?" 

“ All right," she was assured. 

“ Then I’ll call you by your first names and 
you must call me Jo. You will like Abby 
Russell ; she is the nicest Yankee of them all. 
Frank Powers is a prig and if you want to keep 
on the good side of her you must call her 


20 


The Four Corners at School 


‘ Fraunces.’ Lizzie Trask isn’t bad, but she is a 
little Puritan. As for me, you know I am not a 
Yankee ; I am from the wild and woolly west.” 

“ 1 just knew you weren’t from this part of 
the country,” said Mary Lee with conviction. 

“No, indeed. I am from Salt Lake City, 
and I’ve come east to get on an extra coat of 
polish. You can’t see any signs of it yet, but 
maybe you will. My, but those are good can- 
dies I Huyler’s, of course.” 

“ Do have some more ? ” Nan urged them 
on her, “It’s so nice to know all about the 
girls before we meet them again. We know 
Charlotte Loring, you know, but she is not here 
to-day.” 

“No, she goes home every Friday. Charley 
is an awful good sort, but she isn’t as free and 
easy as she might be. It is like digging pota- 
toes to get at some of these girls’ real selves. 
I came here last spring and I don’t know some 
of them well yet. Abby is a Yankee from way 
back, but she is jolly and folksy.” 

“ Who is the other girl who is away ? ” asked 
Maiy’^ Lee. 

“ Oh, Hermione Dearborn ; she is a little 
girl. Nice child, but very quiet, and behaves 
herself so properly that you want to pinch her 
sometimes. I was so glad when I heard you 
were coming, for to be surrounded by a colony 


21 


The First Evening 

of Mayflower descendants was getting too much 
for my system. Now we are five and five and 
I feel like holding up my head again. We shall 
be good friends, I am sure. Do you know any 
western people ? 

‘‘ Oh, my, yes,” Nan hastened to assure her. 
“We spent last winter in California, and took 
in Yellowstone Park on the way back, so we 
have been very near your home. We like 
California immensely, and met some perfectly 
jolly western people.” 

“ I am so glad. That makes me more satis- 
fied with you than ever. I hope you are not 
priggish and that you like a good romp, don’t 
mind your hair flying and aren’t horrified at 
slang. ‘ Fraunces ’ says I am so distressingly 
slangy, that it jars upon her nerves every time I 
speak.” Josephine folded her hands and cast 
her eyes up at the ceiling in a manner which 
told the girls that Miss Frances’s feelings were 
not often spared by any effort of Josephine’s. 

“Tell us some more.” The girls were eager 
to learn all they could about their schoolmates. 
“ Tell us about Miss Barnes and the day schol- 
ars and the teachers.” 

“ Miss Wyllys is a darling if she does spell 
her name with a Y. You will love her to death. 
She has history and physics. Miss Love joy is 
very strict, but you will not mind that. Miss 


22 The Four Corners at School 

Wheeler is a pill ; I can’t bear her. Some of 
the girls like her; she has Latin and mathe- 
matics. Miss Lovejoy has some of the English 
classes and Miss Barnes has the others with 
History of Art. Miss Ames has the primary 
department. Mademoiselle is a joke, and Herr 
Muller is a firecracker. It takes the smallest 
amount of tinder to set him off. He is the 
music teacher.” 

“ Then we must be careful about carrying 
tinder,” remarked Mary Lee. 

** Shall you take German ? Fraulein Schlos- 
ser has that.” 

“Nan and I will study it, for Nan is going to 
Germany some day to study music,” Mary Lee 
told her. 

“Oh, is she? Then will she have Herr 
Miiller for music?” 

“ No, she is going to Boston twice a week for 
lessons from Mr. Harmer, an old friend of our 
Aunt’s.” 

“Can you play well?” Jo turned to Nan. 

Nan shook her head. “ Not yet.” 

“ She can, too,” Jack spoke up. “ You ought 
to hear her. Mr. Pinckney says he would rather 
listen to her than to many expressed players.” 

“You mean professed,” corrected Mary Lee. 

“ Professed then, and he said she had lots of 
temperature.” 


23 


The First Evening 

“ Oh, Jack, you are so ridiculous ; ” Mary Lee 
added further correction. “ He said tempera- 
ment.” 

“ Whewee I ” whistled Jo, “ Vm glad we’ve a 
prodigy on our side. They always trot out 
Charlotte whenever they want to show off, and 
I am glad we’ve a rival that isn’t Boston bred.” 

“ Do you mean Boston brown bread ? ” 
queried Jack. ‘‘ I like that.” 

This set the girls into such peals of laughter 
that Jo had to warn them that Mrs. Channing 
might hear them and would be at the door to 
enforce quiet. “ I must toddle back to my 
downy couch,” she said. ‘H’m awfully glad 
we’ve had this talk. I feel as if I knew you 
quite well. Remember, I’m Jo Keys, and 
you’re not to throw snowballs at me by calling 
me Josephine. See you to-morrow. Breakfast 
at eight on Sundays ; seven-thirty week days. 
Shall you go to church ? What brand do you 
indulge in ? ” 

“ What brand ? ” the girls looked puzzled. 

Jo laughed. ‘‘ I told the girls that my father 
was a Mormon and they half believe it yet.” 

‘‘ Oh,” Nan understood ; ‘‘ we are Episcopa- 
lians.” 

“Shake. That’s my own,” cried Jo. “ If you 
want to go to-morrow. I’ll trot you around to 
my church. The others all go to the Congre- 


24 The Four Corners at School 

gational, except Frances, and she is Unitarian. 
Good-night. Thanks for the candies ; I’ll do 
the same by you some day.” She peeped out 
the door to see if the coast was clear, then 
scudded across the hall to a room on the 
opposite side. 

“ Isn’t she jolly ? ” said Nan. 

“Yes, she is,” agreed Mary Lee, “but don’t 
you think she is a little boisterous?” 

“Just a little, maybe. She’ll tame down, I 
reckon. She is real good-hearted, I think, and 
will be a lively companion. But come, you 
little kiddies, it is high time you were abed. 
Into the next room with you as quickly as pos- 
sible, or we will have Blue China here asking 
why you are still up.” 

This possibility sent the twins in haste to the 
next room, and when they were safely stowed 
in bed. Nan came to them, tucked them in and 
kissed them good-night. There was a little 
sob from Jean, and from Jack the plaint, “ Oh, 
dear, oh, dear, it will be so long before mother 
kisses us again.” 

“Never mind,” whispered Nan. “You’ve 
your old Nan, you know, and she’ll try to be 
sister and mother both.’ But as she went 
back to her own room, her own lips were 
trembling as she hid from Mary Lee the tears 
that would start to her eyes. 




r 




‘■■sW^'’ 


v-^i 

■f." 

.s 


^ 


I ' 


i ' t 


\ 


\> 

t 



iW 

\» ■ 


•t 



I 


I 




% 


t 

y 


« 



V 

' , .’< 
i 



I 14 

. ^ ' 





i 


• 


*'} 


' I' 



CHAPTER II 


ONE OF JACK'S SCRAPES 

By Monday morning, the four Corners were 
eager to begin their studies, to meet the day 
pupils and those teachers who did not live in 
the house with them. Miss Barnes and Miss 
Wheeler were the resident teachers ; the others 
boarded in the neighborhood, or, as in the case 
of Herr Muller and Mademoiselle, came from 
the city to take their classes. The girls agreed 
that they would like Miss Barnes in spite of 
her being dignified and at times sarcastic, for 
she was gentle and considerate though quite 
ready with reproof when necessary. 

The school was rather a large one in point of 
day pupils, and the four Corners were some- 
what appalled at confronting over fifty girls 
when they entered the large schoolroom, but 
when they had been assigned their places, and 
had really entered their several classes, their 
interest did away with their self-consciousness 
and they were soon absorbed in their work, 
devoting the moments between lessons to look- 


28 


The Four Corners at School 


ing over the day pupils and speculating upon 
this and that one. 

Charlotte Loring had put in a plea for Nan, 
as desk-mate, to Nan’s satisfaction, while Mary 
Lee found herself by the side of the lively 
Josephine ; the twins were placed together, so 
the arrangement suited them all. Nan found 
herself hazy in mathematics, Mary Lee had no 
definite notion of Latin declensions, the twins 
were at fault in spelling, at least Jean was, Jack 
did better, but floundered about when it came 
to geography. However, they took heart when 
they were told that they could probably keep 
up with their classes, if they were industrious 
and put in extra time on those studies in which 
they were deficient. Nan had made up her 
mind to apply herself vigorously to German 
and music ; in consequence she was the busiest 
of the four, especially as it took a watchful eye 
between whiles to keep Jack out of scrapes. 
Mrs. Channing was ready to spy out any mis- 
demeanor out of school, while in school. Miss 
Ames, though very kind, was vigilant. 

Before a week was out, however. Jack was in 
trouble. It was one afternoon when the girls 
were out playing basket-ball that the thing hap- 
pened. Jean was playing dolls with Hermione. 
The twins had had a spat that day, and were 
not on speaking terms. Jack had told Jean that 


29 


One of Jack’s Scrapes 

she was a split-tongued crow because she would 
pronounce quill, crill, and Jean had replied that 
if she were a crow Jack was one, too, because 
they were twins, at which Jack retorted she 
wished they were not ; she wished she had no 
sister at all but Nan. This hurt Jean’s feeling 
so that she wept. Jack called her a cry-baby 
and stalked from the room. She felt a little un- 
easy, for though she told herself that Jean had 
begun it by announcing that she was going to 
play with Hermione that afternoon, in her heart of 
hearts Jack knew she, herself, was out of sorts be- 
cause Mary Lee had scolded her for being stupid 
when she was trying to help her with her geog- 
raphy. But if she had agreed to join Jean and 
Hermione, all might have gone well. Instead 
she insisted upon Jean’s playing hide-and-seek, 
and because she didn’t want to, Jack had called 
her names. Yet she would not let herself feel 
anything but injured, and concluded that she 
would entertain herself. 

She considered awhile before she decided 
that the most entertaining thing she could do 
would be to listen to her favorite tunes upon the 
phonograph. Only the elder girls were allowed 
to put on the records, but as they were all play- 
ing basket-ball. Jack thought that for once she 
might trust herself to do it. She tiptoed into 
the sitting-room and listened for a moment. 


The Four Corners at School 

T^ere was no sound but the voices of the girls 
outside. She carefully looked over the boxes of 
records until she found the one she wanted. 
She drew it out gingerly and listened again. 
She poised the record on her fingers as she had 
seen the others do, and was about to slip it on 
the mandrel when she heard a door shut and 
footsteps on the stairs. Suppose it should be 
Mrs. Channing. The record was hastily with- 
drawn, but as Jack was about to thrust it back 
in its box it fell to the floor and broke. The 
footsteps died away. Mrs. Channing, if it 
were she, was going to the back of the house. 

Jack tremblingly picked up the broken pieces, 
stuffed them into the box, shoved it behind the 
others at the very back of the shelf, and hastily 
left the room. In a few minutes she was out in 
the grounds with the other girls, a guilty feel- 
ing dragging at her heart, but with an indiffer- 
ent exterior. 

Twenty-four hours passed before the accident 
was discovered and then Jack had not Nan’s 
comforting presence to uphold her in confes- 
sion. As she was to go to Boston on Satur- 
days for her music lesson, Charlotte Coring had 
invited her to spend the week’s end with her, so 
Nan had gone off in high feather not to return 
till Charlotte came back on Monday morning. 
It was Friday evening when the girls were sit- 


ri f 


One of Jack’s Scrapes 

ting sedately around the sitting-room that Mi;^^ 
Barnes proposed that each should hear her 
favorite record. 

“You may put them on, Frances,” she said. 

“ Shall I begin with your favorite. Miss 
Barnes ? ” asked Frances, laying down her fancy 
work. 

“ Why, if you choose, since I am the eldest. 
We might go down the line and finish up with 
the youngest.” 

Jack’s heart stood still, but she breathed a 
sigh of relief as she thought perhaps she could 
escape before her turn came, or if they still in- 
sisted, she could choose something else ; that 
would be easy. So she settled back with eyes 
downcast while the phonograph sounded forth 
the prize song from the Meistersinger. 

“ Now, your own choice, Frances,” said Miss 
Barnes, and Gounod’s Ave Maria came next. 

One after another made a selection until it 
was the twin’s turn. Jack nudged Jean. “ You 
choose first,” she whispered. J ean, quite pleased 
by this generosity, chose a negro melody. Jack 
got up and left the room. 

When the last note had sounded. Miss Barnes 
smiled at Jean. “ You know that queer Chinese 
jumble that your little sister likes,” she said. 
“ Don’t you think she would rather hear that 
than anything? She says it reminds her of 


32 


The Four Corners at School 


California. Frances, suppose you have it ready 
by the time Jacqueline gets back.” 

Frances searched among the boxes. “ It 
isn’t here,” she began. “ Oh, yes,” she added, 
“ I have found it behind these discarded rec- 
ords.” She opened the box. “Why, Miss 
Barnes,” she exclaimed, “ it is all in pieces.” 

Miss Barnes put down her knitting. “ That 
is strange,” she said. “ When was the phono- 
graph used last?” 

The girls looked at each other. “ It was used 
night before last,” spoke up Josephine, “and it 
was all right then, for I remember that you 
were the one. Miss Barnes, who put on the 
records.” 

“ I am quite sure it was whole when I put it 
in the box. Are you sure, Josephine, it has not 
been used since ? ” 

“ I haven’t heard it.” 

“ Have any of you?” Miss Barnes turned to 
the others who all answered in the negative. 

“ I will ask the maids.” Miss Barnes arose 
and left the room. She returned presently, say- 
ing, “Not one of the servants has been in here 
during the past twenty-four hours. Mrs. Chan- 
ning dusted the room herself, yesterday and to- 
day, for you know Annie has been away for a 
couple of days. It is certainly very mysterious. 
I do not care for the value of the record, but I 


33 


One of Jack’s Scrapes 

am sorry that I was not told of the accident, for 
I very much mind discovering a lack of moral 
courage in any one of my girls. I think I must 
question you each separately and I beg you will 
answer me honestly.” One after another was 
questioned, the replies being, “ No, Miss 
Barnes, I have not touched the records.” 

Jack outside, in the hall, hidden behind the 
portieres, wondered what she should do. 

When the last reply had been given. Miss 
Barnes said : “ Then it lies between Jacqueline, 
Charlotte, Nancy and Hermione.” 

It couldn’t be Jack,” spoke up Jean, ** for I 
know just what she has been doing.” 

Miss Barnes smiled at the little champion. 
“We were together all day yesterday except a 
little while in the afternoon and then Jack was 
out with the girls who were playing basket- 
ball. Hermione and I were playing dolls and 
Jack didn’t like that play, so she left us.” The 
twins had long before this adjusted their 
quarrel, and were most amiably disposed 
toward each other. 

“ Yes, she was out with us in the grounds 
Mary Lee endorsed Jean’s statement. 

“ Not all the time,” spoke up Frances. “ We 
were there quite a while before Jacqueline 
came.” 

“ She was up-stairs before that,” said Jean 


The Four Corners at School 


34 

positively. “ She came down-stairs and a few 
minutes after I looked out the window and she 
was in the grounds.’’ 

“ We must ask her, however,” said Miss 
Barnes, “ for it is only fair to the rest of you.” 

But Jack did not return that evening, and 
when her sisters went up to bed she was not 
there, though she came in later, but to all 
questions of Mary Lee’s and Jean’s she shook 
her head. At last she wrote on a piece of 
paper: “I have made a vow not to speak a 
word till to-morrow morning.” As this was a 
favorite trick of one or the other of the twins, 
little account was made of it. Every now and 
then one of them made a vow not to speak in 
a given time ; it was intended to show great 
powers of endurance and was regarded with 
respect by the one who had not promised her- 
self to be silent. 

Jack, however, had not been idle during the 
time the others were in the sitting-room. She 
was quite desperate when she heard Miss 
Barnes’ questioning, and knew that sooner or 
later her hour must come. It was not strange 
that she should have dreaded it so much, for 
most imaginative children are consumed with 
fears under like circumstances. She felt that 
she would be suspected if she did not return 
to the room, yet how could she do it, and what 


35 


One of Jack’s Scrapes 

must she say ? Suddenly a brilliant idea struck 
her and she rushed up-stairs, opened her 
drawer, and drew forth her pocket-book. Yes, 
there it was, a special delivery stamp which 
her old friend Mr. Pinckney had once laugh- 
ingly given her, telling her that she might 
want it in case of emergency. She hurriedly 
scrabbled together pen, ink and paper and 
wrote : 

“Dear Nan: 

“I’m awfully scared. I have broken the 
record of that Chinese thing I like. Won’t you 
please get another and bring it with you when 
you come. Don’t tell anybody if you love me. 
I am so miserable and I wish you were here to 
help me. Jack.” 

She hastily thrust her note into an envelope, 
and then suddenly remembered that she had 
not Charlotte’s address. But she did know 
Mr. Harmer’s, and Nan would be there for her 
lesson the next morning. She would address 
the note in Mr. Harmer’s care and Nan would 
be sure to get it in time. Indeed it would be 
the best thing to do, for then Charlotte need 
not know anything about it. Cheered by this 
thought she addressed, sealed and stamped the 
envelope, wondering whether it must have the 
usual postage as well as the special delivery 


36 The Four Corners at School 

stamp, and concluding to take no risks, then 
down-stairs she sped. 

She decided that she must not open the front 
door for fear of discovery, so she slipped into 
the hall which separated the schoolrooms 
from the rest of the house, softly unbolted the 
side door, and without hat or coat ran down 
the street to the letter box on the next corner. 
As she set out to come back a sudden fear 
seized her lest Mrs. Channing, making her 
nightly rounds, should find the side door un- 
bolted and should make it fast, thus shutting 
out all chance of entrance. Or again, suppose 
she should meet Mrs. Channing face to, face. 
This awful thought made her shudder, but she 
managed to get in without being seen by any 
one, yet fear again took possession of her, as 
she heard voices in the hall, and saw a light 
approaching. Under the stairs was a closet 
where the boarding pupils kept their overshoes, 
umbrellas and hats. Jack slipped into this, 
first taking care to withdraw the key. She 
heard some one come along the hallway and 
pass by the door behind which she was con- 
cealed, but no one looked in, and after a while 
all was still. Then Jack came out, groped 
her way to her room and was safe. The only 
fear now tormenting her was that Nan might 
not get the note, or, getting it, would not be 


37 


One of Jack’s Scrapes 

able to find another record. Nevertheless, she 
was sure that Nan would get her out of the 
scrape. Her faith in this eldest sister was 
supreme, and she went to sleep at last. 

As good fortune would have it, Miss Barnes 
went to the city early the next morning to be 
gone all day, and so Jack escaped the question- 
ing she feared. In her presence Mary Lee and 
Jo discussed the matter of the record, but Jack 
appeared to take no interest in it. Jo declared 
that old Blue China did it herself. It would 
be just like her,” she affirmed decidedly. 

By Sunday morning Miss Barnes had for- 
gotten the incident for the time being, other 
matters crowding it from her mind, and al- 
though all day Jack dreaded a sudden summons, 
she kept out of the way as much as possible, 
and so it went on till Monday came. 

Meanwhile Nan was having her share of the 
trouble. She had started off gaily with Char- 
lotte, glad of a change of scene and eager to 
see her friend’s pretty home in Brookline. 
The two girls were to do all sorts of pleasant 
things. Some of Charlotte’s friends were com- 
ing in on Friday evening ; on Saturday the 
two were going to a matinee, and in the even- 
ing they were invited to dine at the house of 
one of Charlotte’s girl cousins. After her lesson 
Nan was to meet Charlotte at a quiet little 


38 The Four Corners at School 

lunch-room where they would have luncheon 
together and then go to the matinee. A de- 
lightful programme, thought Nan, who had 
lived little in cities and had enjoyed the society 
of few city girls. 

“You are sure you can find your way,” said 
Charlotte as she left Nan at Mr. Harmer’s 
door. 

“ Easily,” replied Nan. “I have a good 
bump of locality : I’ll be there.” 

“ Promptly at half-past twelve,” said Char- 
lotte, “for we don’t want to hurry over our 
lunch, nor do we want to miss any of the 
play.” 

Nan repeated her assurance, and went into 
her lessons with pleasant anticipations. The 
lesson seemed particularly long that day, and 
as Nan always liked to linger for a musical talk 
with this old friend of her aunt’s it was some 
time after twelve when she arose to go. 

Just as she was leaving the room Mr. Harmer 
called her back. “ I must apologize,” he said. 
“ I came very near forgetting to give you this 
which came early this morning. When I am 
talking music I am liable to forget everything 
else. I hope there is nothing wrong with your 
sisters. No one is ill?” 

Nan had glanced hurriedly at the envelope, 
had seen the special delivery stamp and had 


39 


One of Jack’s Scrapes 

recognized Jack’s scrawl. “ Excuse me if I 
read it,” she said. There was a little frown 
puckering her brows as she thrust the note into 
her coat pocket. “No one ill,” she said. “ My 
little sister wants me to get something for her ; 
that’s all. Good-bye, Mr. Harmer; I’ll try to 
have that etude down fine by next week.” She 
flew down the steps and hurried on. “ Oh, 
Jack, Jack,” she murmured, “ you poor little 
irresponsible creature. Of course Nan will see 
you through. Now which way is Washington 
Street? Oh, dear, it’s late already, but I’ve got 
to do this if I am behind time.” She walked 
on rapidly, entered the first store in which 
phonographs were displayed and was shown to 
an upper floor where records were sold. She 
did not know the number of the one she wanted, 
but, as the Chinese numbers were few, she had 
not to listen to many before recognizing the 
right one. She hastily paid for it, put it in the 
music roll she carried and hastened away as fast 
as she could. As she left the shop a clock near 
by struck one. “ Half an hour late,” she said 
to herself. “ What will Charlotte think ? and 
she charged me to be on time. Oh, Jacksie, 
if you only knew how much trouble to other 
people you do make. It is like throwing a 
pebble in the water; the ripple widens and 
widens. It isn’t only me you hurt, but Char- 


40 The Four Corners at School 

lotte, and, goodness knows, how many others 
beside your own unfortunate little self/’ She 
was breathless when she reached the lunch- 
room where Charlotte was anxiously waiting. 
“Did you think I was never coming?” said 
Nan. “ Mr. Harmer kept me longer than I 
realized. I am so sorry, but this time it really 
couldn’t be helped.” 

“ I was afraid you had missed your way,” 
said Charlotte. “ I am glad you got here 
safely, but I am afraid we shall have to hurry 
through our lunch and I did want us to have a 
nice one.” 

“ Oh, never mind, so far as I am concerned,” 
said Nan. “ I appreciate your intentions, my 
dear, but I will be satisfied with simple bread 
and butter, if it will help matters. All I am 
regretting is the annoyance to you.” 

The luncheon was something more than 
bread and butter, but had to be taken in haste, 
then the two started for the matinee. Nan glad 
enough that she had not to make a more 
elaborate excuse for her lack of punctuality. 
She found her thoughts wandering to Jack 
every now and then during the progress of the 
play. Perhaps she should not have stayed 
away from her sisters. She was the eldest and 
must stand in the place of mother to the 
younger ones. But then what was a boarding- 


41 


One of Jack’s Scrapes 

school for, and why should not Jack suffer the 
consequences of her carelessness ? She was so 
absorbed in these questions that once between 
acts Charlotte gave her a little tap. 

“ Are you following the fortunes of the hero, 
or the heroine?” she asked. “I have spoken 
to you three times. Nan, and you have not an- 
swered.” 

“ I haven’t been thinking of either of them,” 
Nan answered. “ I was thinking of school.” 

“ Oh, do let school go while you are here,” 
returned Charlotte. “You have enough of it 
the rest of the week.” And Nan turned her at- 
tention from deeper questions to the frivolous 
ones of the present. The record could be re- 
placed and why think of it any more ? So far 
the remainder of her visit Jack’s troubles did 
not weigh on her spirits. 

Jack met her at the door on Monday morn- 
ing. “ Let me take your bag,” she said. “ I 
am so glad you are back again. Nan. I missed 
you so.” Then she drew down her sister’s head. 
“ Did you get it ? ” she whispered. 

“ Yes,” returned Nan. “ Let me hurry up- 
stairs, Jack, or I shall be late. You’d better go 
right in, for there’s the bell now.” 

With Nan’s assurance that she had the record, 
all Jack’s burdens rolled off, and she went gaily 
into school satisfied that Nan would make 


42 The Four Corners at School 

everything all right. And this Nan did, though 
not without some cost to herself. She was not 
one to put off an evil day, and as soon as an 
opportunity could be had she went to Miss 
Barnes, record in hand. “ I have a new record. 
Miss Barnes, to replace the one that was broken,” 
she said. 

Miss Barnes looked up, a light breaking over 
the gravity of her face. “ I am glad of that, 
Nancy,” she said. ‘‘ When was the record 
broken ? ” 

“ I think some time on Friday.” 

“ You think ? Don’t you know ? ” 

“ It was on Friday,” Nan corrected. 

“ Before you went to the city ? I see. And 
you thought you could replace it so soon that 
there was no need to mention it. Wouldn’t it 
have been just a little better to have told me at 
once ? A little more straightforward in a girl of 
your age, Nancy?” 

“ It ought to have been confessed at once,” 
said Nan looking at her teacher steadily with 
clear eyes, “ but ” 

“ I understand. There was not an oppor- 
tunity, perhaps, and you were in a hurry to get 
off. There are a number of excuses, I admit. 
Still, I always think it is a little braver in any of 
the girls if they come to me directly in such a 
case. You will next time, won’t you ?” 


43 


One of Jack’s Scrapes 

** Whenever I break anything, Miss Barnes, I 
will come directly and tell you,” returned Nan. 
“ Shall I put the record with the others ? ” 

‘‘ If you please.” 

Nan turned away with a little heart-burning 
at the thought that Miss Barnes had shown some 
disapproval, and that she thought a girl of Nan’s 
age ought to be less cowardly than appeared. 
However, Jack was safe, and Jack would have 
been censured more severely, for in her case it 
would mean not only cowardice but disobedi- 
ence, since she had been forbidden to touch the 
records. Well, it wasn’t pleasant, but it must be 
borne for Jack’s sake. 


1 





/ 


I 






» 



CHAPTER III 
A NEW BOARDER 


r 


CHAPTER III 


A NEW BOARDER 

While conscious that Miss Barnes did not 
give her credit for the straightforwardness and 
candor which were really her characteristics, 
Nan was willing to continue to stand between 
Jack and disaster in the same sisterly way that 
she had always done. Jack was hard to 
manage unless one knew her peculiarities. 
She loved fiercely, disliked with the same 
ardor, was singularly bright in some directions, 
almost dull in others. Those who were fond of 
her found her the most entertaining little body 
possible ; those who had not discovered her 
special charm considered her a perfect little 
pickle. She liked to work when the work was 
of her own selecting, but she was sure to shirk 
it when it was not to her taste. In consequence 
her teachers found it difficult to make her obey 
hard and fast rules, to keep her up to systematic 
study, and to reason with her when she slipped 
out of things. 

“ You must study more faithfully,’^ said Miss 
Ames to her one day when Jack had failed ut- 


48 The Four Corners at School 

terly in geography. “ What were you doing 
all study hour yesterday ? ’’ 

“Studying,” returned Jack serenely. “At 
least I studied the other things real hard.” 

“ But you should have conquered the geog- 
raphy lesson first when you knew it was your 
weak point.” 

“ But then, you see,” said Jack argumenta- 
tively, “ I might have had no time to study the 
others, and Fd rather know four lessons real 
well and miss one, than know that one and miss 
all the others.” 

“ Couldn’t you have taken extra time for 
that?” 

“ And not play when the study hour was 
over ? ” 

“ Don’t you think it would be worth giving 
up an hour’s play for the sake of knowing all 
your lessons ?” 

Jack shook her head. “ No, Miss Ames, Fd 
rather play all day and never do any lessons. 
Don’t you like us ever to play ? ” 

“ Oh, dear, yes. I believe that ‘ All work and 
no play makes Jack a dull boy,’ but I also be- 
lieve that ‘ All play and no work makes Jack a 
mere toy.’ ” 

“ Fd much rather be a mere toy any day than 
a dull boy,” returned Jack, with satisfaction. 
“ There isn’t anything quite so nice as toys, and 


A New Boarder 


49 

there isn’t anything more pokey and horrid than 
dull boys. So I’ll play,” she concluded. 

Miss Ames had to smile. If she had known 
Jack better, she would have avoided such a line 
of argument, and indeed she now ceased to 
argue, and tried the incentive of emulation. 
“Jean is improving very much in her spelling,” 
she remarked. “ I wish you would study as 
faithfully as she does.” 

“ Oh, Jean always did plod along like an old 
plough horse,” returned Jack, airily. “She 
crocheted yards and yards of lace to earn fifty 
cents once, and I earned it in half the time in 
another way.” Clearly Miss Ames was not yet 
on the right tack. 

“ But I should think. Jack,” she said seriously, 
“that you would want to improve for your 
mother’s sake. Think how she will feel when 
the reports reach her. Yours will be the only 
one which will show line after line of ciphers. 
I know she will sigh and be very sad, for she 
will think her little girl might try harder if she 
really loves her mother. No sacrifice ought 
to be too great to earn her mother’s happi- 
ness.” 

The right chord was touched at last. The 
tears started to Jack’s eyes, and, that she might 
hide them, she rushed tumultuously away to 
find Nan. 


50 The Four Corners at School 

She found her sister busy over her morrow’s 
lessons. She had her hands full these days, 
what with practicing and studying and crowd- 
ing in hours between times for basket-ball, or 
for some confidential talk with Charlotte. Un- 
like as these two were, they had become close 
friends, and the same was true of Mary Lee and 
Josephine, who were opposites in disposition 
and character, but who had similar tastes. Nan 
and Charlotte had the common bond of music, 
and having met in California the year before, 
were ready to take up their friendship and carry 
it on to a greater intimacy. Both Mary Lee 
and Josephine were fond of animals, of out-of- 
door sports and nature study, and herein lay 
their cause for friendship. These two latter 
were off for a walk while Nan was puzzling out 
her algebra. 

Jack had wiped her tearful eyes by the time 
she reached Nan, curled up in the window seat 
of her room, but the child had a troubled face. 
“ Oh, Nan,” she began plaintively. 

Nan, with lips moving to the difficulties of 
her problem in algebra, looked up. “ What is 
it. Jack ? ” she said. “ Don’t tell me it’s another 
scrape.” 

“ No, but please don’t be cross. When you’re 
through that will you help me with my jography ? 
It’s Mexico and it’s so hard. I can’t remem- 


A New Boarder 


51 

ber, and I — I — don’t want mother to see a row 
of noughts in my report.” 

Thus appealed to, Nan put down her book 
with a sigh. “No time like the present,” she 
said. “ Let’s see what we can do. I reckon I 
have thrashed this out. I’ll ask Charlotte if it 
is all right. You ought to know Mexico, Jack, 
when you have been there, and have seen the 
people and have heard Mr. St. Nick tell about 
it.” 

“ But r didn’t go all around it, and when Mr. 
St. Nick talked I didn’t have to remember what 
wasn’t interesting,” said Jack, conclusively. “ I 
have to bound it first.” 

“ That’s easy,” said Nan. 

“ No, it isn’t a bit.” 

“ Well, we’ll see if we can make it easy.” 

Jack brightened visibly. When Nan’s in- 
ventive faculties were set to work, the results 
were always pleasant. 

“ Give me the book,” said Nan, “ and show 
me the lesson.” 

Jack spread out the book before her. “ It’s 
all that and that,” she said, bringing her palm 
down the two columns of a page. 

Nan glanced at the lesson. “ Go get me that 
little Mexican figure that stands on the mantel,” 
she said, “the one Mr. St. Nick brought me 
when he came back from Mexico.” 


52 The Four Corners at School 

Jack obeyed with alacrity. 

“ Put him down there on the floor,” said Nan. 
“ He is Mexico. Now let me see, what shall we 
have for the United States? That scrap-basket 
will do ; the United States is a sort of scrap- 
basket for other countries, anyhow. Your Mex- 
ico man must face north, so turn him toward 
the mantel so his back will be to the window. 
Put the scrap-basket in front of him. There 1 
What did I say the scrap-basket was ? ” 

“The United States.” 

“ Then how is he bounded on the north ? ” 

“ By the United States.” 

“ Quite correct, my child. Now, on the east 
there are two gulfs. A wash-basin will do for 
one ; that can be the Gulf of Mexico, and there’s 
another little gulf called Campeche.” 

“ I can never remember that,” complained 
Jack. 

“Oh, yes, you can. ,You know that picture 
of a camp that Aunt Helen took last year? It’s 
in the box with the other photographs ; go find 
it.” 

Jack obeyed and presently brought it. 

“ Lay it to the south of the Gulf of Mexico. 
No, no, think which is south.” 

Jack puzzled this out presently. “ But that is 
only Camp,” she said. 

“ I know.” Nan was thinking hard. “ Bring 



Jack Was in High Glee Over the Play 




A New Boarder 


53 

Jean’s scrap-book to me, the one she is making 
for the hospital at home.” 

Jack brought this and Nan turned over the 
pages till she came to a highly colored cut taken 
from a can of peaches. She slipped it out of its 
place and gave it to Jack, so was the Gulf of 
Campeche complete. Central America was 
then represented by the word America in big 
letters with a hat pin stuck through the middle 
letter ; the Pacific Ocean was contained in a foot 
tub. Jack was in high glee over the play and 
even conquered Tehuantepec and Ixtaccihuatl 
when Nan made conundrums of them, so that 
in time the whole lesson was learned and it is 
safe to say that it was never forgotten. Indeed, 
Nan’s methods met with such favor that ever 
after Jack made a play of her geography lesson. 
Nan helping her out with suggestions when she 
did not take charge of it, and to Miss Ames’s 
great surprise Jack never failed again. 

Jean had almost as great a struggle with her 
spelling, for her ear was so little attuned to 
sound that she had to learn each word labori- 
ously. Words were indeed her nightmare. 
She could not overcome the difficulty of pro- 
nouncing tw, and qu, and at first had many a 
cry over the giggles of the other girls when she 
spelled twist and pronounced it trist, or queen, 
creen, but Mary Lee comforted her and she 


54 


The Four Corners at School 


gradually minded her t’s and q’s, though the 
sentences she was obliged to hand in were 
sometimes very funny, for the definitions of 
words puzzled her quite as much as the spell- 
ing, so even Miss Ames had to smile when she 
read : “ The twins have a strong effigy to 

each other,” effigy being Jean’s definition of 
likeness. 

As for Mary Lee, she disliked Miss Wheeler 
so heartily that her Latin was a daily source of 
trouble to her, and it was only Josephine who 
could drag her out of that quagmire. The 
same teacher had mathematics and here Nan 
found her hardest fight, but with Charlotte’s as- 
sistance she managed to keep up a fair record 
though she never made a brilliant one in this 
study. 

So the days went on till the red and yellow 
leaves had turned to brown, the rose-bushes 
had been muffled in straw and Mrs. Channing’s 
pet parrot had been removed from his place on 
the porch to a warmer spot in the sitting-room, 
where he screamed an accompaniment to the 
phonograph, or laughed mockingly at a begin- 
ner’s exercises. News had long since come 
from Mrs. and Miss Corner, who were in South- 
ern Italy, while from the Virginia home came 
accounts of what was going on there. Both 
foreign mail and home letters generally pro- 


A New Boarder 


55 


duced an attack of homesickness, but the attacks 
were of shorter and shorter duration in propor- 
tion as the girls became accustomed to their 
new life. 

One day Miss Barnes sent for Nan. “ I want 
to talk with you a few minutes, Nancy,” she 
said. “ I have here a letter which rather puz- 
zles me. Do you know any one by the name 
of Scott ? ” 

Nan shook her head. “ Somehow it sounds 
familiar. Miss Barnes, but I can’t think of hav- 
ing met any one by that name.” 

“ Perhaps you can tell if I read a part of the 
letter,” Miss Barnes continued. She skimmed 
over the first lines, then read aloud : “I wish 
to place my daughter in your school. I am 
told you have pupils by the name of Corner 
from Virginia. They are old friends of my 
daughter’s and she has expressed a wish to go 
wherever they do. If you have room for 
Daniella I should like to have her enter as soon 
as possible. She has had a governess for the 
past year but has never been to school. She is 
backward in her studies, but I want her to have 
the best education money can secure. Her 
mother is dead and she is all I have, but I am 
ready to part with her for her own good.” 

Nan was listening attentively. “We used to 
know a Daniella Boggs,” she told Miss Barnes, 


56 The Four Corners at School 

“ but not a Daniella Scott, though I remember 
now that her uncle’s name was Scott. She and 
her mother went to live with him.” * 

“ Then perhaps as she is motherless the uncle 
has adopted her, and has given her his name ; 
that might be a solution of the mystery, mightn’t 
it?” 

“It might be,” agreed Nan. “We haven’t 
heard from her for a long time, and have 
wondered about her.” 

“We are limited to twelve boarders,” said 
Miss Barnes, “ but as she would be but the 
eleventh there would be no difficulty about 
making room for her, if everything else is 
satisfactory. We like to be particular about 
whom we receive. What do you know of her, 
Nancy ? ” 

Then Nan told of how the Corners had come 
upon the little mountain girl in a rude cabin 
near their Virginia home, of how they had be- 
friended her, and had brought her to their own 
home when an accident befell her mother, of 
the interest they felt in the child and of her final 
departure for Texas. 

Miss Barnes was much interested. “ She 
would be a very unusual charge,” she said 
thoughtfully, “ and I should have to depend 
upon you and your sisters, Nancy, to help me 
make her content. If she has had so little re- 


A New Boarder 


57 

straint she will be difficult to train to more 
systematic ways.” 

Nan realized this and that it would be no 
small tax upon Mary Lee and herself to attempt 
to tame Daniella. She drew a long sigh and 
Miss Barnes smiled an understanding of the 
situation. “We shall have to regard it as 
something like missionary work,” she said. 
“ If she is not really vulgar, nor evilly disposed, 
I shall not be afraid of introducing her here, 
though you Virginia girls will have to fight her 
battles, I fear, and will have to overcome some 
prejudice. Are you willing to do it, Nancy ? ” 

“ I am,” returned Nan stoutly, all her chival- 
rous Virginia spirit aroused. “ But I’ll have to 
talk it over with Mary Lee. I don’t think Dani- 
ella is vulgar nor evilly disposed. She has 
never had any companions but her mother and 
grandfather, and her mother seemed as if she 
might almost have been a lady at some time, 
though Aunt Sarah said she had probably be- 
come careless in her speech from living away 
from civilized people.” 

“ Suppose then we leave the matter till to- 
morrow,” said Miss Barnes. “ I am much in- 
terested in the case, and since Mr. Scott seems 
willing -to spare no expense, it ought to be our 
part to help make her worthy of his hopes. He 
seems not to be an entirely uneducated man. 


58 The Four Corners at School 

rather brusque and unpolished, maybe. He 
says he will bring Daniella himself, if we con- 
sent to receive her.” 

“ It seems to me that I have heard that Mrs. 
Boggs came of rather good family,” said Nan, 
“ and that she simply threw herself away on a 
good-looking young mountaineer that she met. 
There is some sort of romantic story about it 
that I have almost forgotten. Oh, yes, I think 
she was out riding, and her horse took fright or 
something. The Boggs young man rescued 
her and they fell in love with each other and 
had clandestine meetings and things, then she 
ran away with him and her parents wouldn’t 
forgive her. She was too proud to appeal to 
them when her husband died and old grand- 
father Boggs became helpless. She used to do 
all sorts of mountaineering things like trapping 
rabbits and shooting game. She would bring 
it to town to sell and made enough that way to 
keep things going. It was when she was on 
one of the trips to town that she met with the 
accident. Somebody who knew her history 
found out about her at the hospital and 
wrote to her brother, so he sent for her and 
Daniella.” 

“Surely a very romantic story,” said Miss 
Barnes. “ I am more interested than ever in 
Daniella. Well, Nancy, I shall not decide 


A New Boarder 


59 


hastily. I shall have to consult my sister and 
you must talk it over with yours, for in this 
you will have to be my lieutenant.” 

Nan hurried off with all speed to find Mary 
Lee, who was out in the grounds with Jo- 
sephine. “ Fve something to tell you,” sang 
out Nan. 

Mary Lee dropped her tennis racket and ran 
forward. Nan linked her arm in her sister’s 
and led her away. “ Come up-stairs,” she said 
mysteriously ; “I want to talk to you about 
something.” 

“ Oh, dear,” returned Mary Lee, “ I hope it 
isn’t anything very serious. Nothing has hap- 
pened to Mother or Aunt Helen, do say there 
hasn’t. Nan.” 

“ No, it has nothing to do with them ; it is 
about Daniella.” 

Daniella ? Why, Nan, I’d almost forgotten 
her. When did she turn up ? ” 

She hasn’t turned up yet, but she probably 
will,” and Nan poured forth her story. 

“Oh, my,” exclaimed Mary Lee when she 
had finished ; “it is a puzzle, isn’t it? It will be 
dreadful to have that poor little half-baked pul- 
let tagging us around.” 

Nan laughed, then feeling that she must take 
the matter more seriously, she threw reproach 
into her voice. “ You do say such things, Mary 


6o The Four Corners at School 

Lee. Of course we shall have to sacrifice our- 
selves for her.” 

“Just as we did before.” 

“Just as we did before. Are you sorry we 
did it then? ” 

“ No, but once is enough.” 

“ I don’t believe it is enough. Probably we 
shall not be sorry this time, for think what it 
will mean to her. Evidently her uncle or her 
adopted father, or whatever he is, has plenty of 
money, so we shall not have to make over our 
clothes for her or save up pocket money to buy 
her shoes, or go without butter that she may 
have bread.” 

Mary Lee sighed. “ I’d rather do those 
things, and be at home to do them as w^e were 
then. I think it is sacrifice enough to give up 
being there, but isn’t it strange. Nan, now that 
we don’t have to pinch and screw w^e haven’t 
the joy of being at home? ” 

“I suppose one can’t have everything,” re- 
turned Nan philosophically. “We shall be at 
home again some day.” 

“ I wonder if it will seem the same to us. 
Sometimes I think it will not.” 

“ Oh, I think it will.” Nan was always op- 
timistic. “ At least we shall have the things we 
like to eat, and won’t have to see baked beans 
every Saturday night. Oh, for a good piping 


A New Boarder 


6i 


hot biscuit, and some of Aunt Sarah’s batter 
bread. But we must go back to Daniella. 
What are you willing to do about her ? ” 

“ We’ll have to give up lots of things we 
want to do in order to stay with her,” said Mary 
Lee discontentedly. “ I know Joe won’t want 
her tagging us, and I am sure Charlotte will 
get huffy if you neglect her.” 

“ She’ll not get huffy,” said Nan, ‘‘ but she’ll 
be very cool and reserved and act in that in- 
different way she has when anything displeases 
her. We shall have some hard times, I don’t 
doubt, but can we in decency say that we’ll 
have nothing to do with Daniella, when it’s be- 
cause we are at this school that her uncle wants 
to send her ? ” 

I don’t see how he found out, and I do wish 
he hadn’t been so ready to butt in,” returned 
Mary Lee discontentedly. 

“You’re picking up Josephine’s slang,” said 
Nan reprovingly. “ I don’t suppose Daniella’s 
uncle will expect her to add such things to her 
vocabulary.” 

“ Now you are talking like Charlotte,” re- 
torted Mary Lee. “ I don’t think anything I say 
will damage Daniella.” 

Nan chose to disregard this speech. “ I 
suppose her uncle wrote to Aunt Sarah or some 
one at home, and as long as the butting in, as 


62 


The Four Corners at School 


you call it, has been done, there is no help for 
it now. Miss Barnes will think we are selfish 
pigs, and will think we are not doing our 
‘ dooty * if we say we don’t want her.” 

“ I don’t see why they talk so much about 
duty up here,” said Mary Lee in a dissatisfied 
tone. “ Why don’t they go along and do what 
is right without always making so much talk 
about it. I’m tired of it, and I’d cut and go 
home for a cent.” Mary Lee was plainly in a 
bad humor. 

“ Nonsense I You are talking just like Jack 
now,” said Nan. “Whenever things don’t 
go right with her she always talks about cut- 
ting and running as if it were nothing at all.” 

“ Some day she’ll do it. I’m afraid.” 

“ Oh, no, she’ll not. I’m not afraid that she 
will. It’s settled then that we’ll back up Miss 
Barnes so far as Daniella is concerned.” 

“ Oh, I suppose there’s no way out of it. 
It’s a matter of have to and nothing else.” 

Therefore Nan reported to Miss Barnes that 
evening, and it was decided that Mr. Scott 
should be notified that he could bring Daniella 
as soon as he wished. By the next day the 
entire school was expectant, for Nan saved the 
situation by telling Daniella’s history to the 
boarding pupils and they in turn spread the 
tale among the day scholars. Nan’s account 


A New Boarder 


63 

was so graphic, and she made of Daniella such 
a picturesque figure that the little mountain 
girl became a veritable heroine, especially as 
Nan added to her story the romance of the 
child’s mother. 

It’s just like a novel,” declared Jo. ‘‘ We 
must be nice to her, girls, for who knows what 
she will turn out to be ? This is only volume 
first of the novel ; volume second has yet to be 
written.” 

“ Let’s finish it according to our own ideas,” 
proposed Nan. 

” Good I ” cried the others. ” We’ll do it. 
When shall we?” 

There’s no time like the present,” remarked 
Jo. ” It is a rainy afternoon, and we can’t find 
a better chance.” Then there was a scurrying 
for pencils and paper, and soon every head was 
bent over a blank book. 

Before long Miss Barnes came in and found 
them thus occupied. “Not doing lessons, 
girls, are you ? ” she asked. “ This is your play 
hour, isn’t it ? ” 

“ Oh, but we are playing,” Jo told her. “We 
are having great fun, although it is a little like 
lessons,” and then she told what they were doing. 

“Suppose you take your stories for your 
weekly themes,” proposed Miss Barnes. “ I’d 
like to have some fresh imaginative work, and 


64 The Four Corners at School 

I will not be hard on you in the matter of 
structure, for I don’t want to harness Pegasus 
to a plough.” 

As the stories were by this time nearly 
finished, the girls agreed to hand them in just 
as they were, most of them glad to be relieved 
from the duty of writing a theme for the follow- 
ing week. And so Daniella’s fortunes were 
made a matter of special interest to all these 
girls, each of whom was ready to help in the 
development of so unique an individual. The 
various experiences assigned to her in the dif- 
ferent themes were enough for a dozen heroines, 
and it would be quite inconceivable to expect 
one young person to go through them all, but 
it was rather pleasant to conjecture whether 
she would ever fill any one of the parts given 
her, whether she would turn out to be an 
actress, an opera singer, a great artist, a writer, 
if she would become a celebrated beauty, 
finally betrothed to a prince, or if she would 
be simply a mere commonplace individual who 
would sink into the insignificance of every-day 
life by marrying a plain western farmer. At 
all events her coming was looked for with 
eagerness, and it seemed probable that her 
early friends, the Corners, would be relieved of 
much responsibility in undertaking to champion 
her. 


CHAPTER IV 
DANIELLA’S COMING 




CHAPTER IV 


DANIELLA’S COMING 

In consequence of all this preparation 
Danielians arrival was in the way of a trium- 
phal entry. The ten girls were on the lookout 
for her, and from the front windows peered 
twenty eager eyes when a carriage stopped at 
the door one afternoon in late November. Nan 
and Mary Lee, followed by the twins, rushed 
down-stairs, calling to the six who were leaning 
over the baluster, “ She’s come, girls I She’s 
come I ” A tall, gaunt man was just entering 
the door as the Corners reached the foot of the 
stairway. Behind him came a well-dressed 
little girl, with a scared look in her big eyes. 
Nan and Mary Lee hurried forward. “ Daniella,” 
they cried, “ don’t you know us ? ” 

Daniella dropped the bag she carried and 
moved quickly toward them. “ I said you 
wouldn’t forget ; I said so,” she cried. 

Nan gave her a good hug and Mary Lee fol- 
lowed suit. “ Of course we haven’t forgotten,” 
they said. Do you want to see Miss Barnes 
before you go up-stairs ? I suppose you’ll have 


68 The Four Corners at School 

to/’ remarked Nan. “ You are to have a nice 
little hall room right next to ours. We asked 
if you might have that so we could be near by 
if you got lonely. Come into the reception 
room where your uncle has gone.” 

“ I call him father now,” said Daniella bash- 
fully. 

** Oh, so you do. We couldn’t tell at first 
how it was, until we remembered that Scott was 
your uncle’s name.” They urged Daniella into 
the room where Mr. Scott was standing. 

“ Here they are. Nan and Mary Lee, just like 
I told you,” said Daniella, “ and here are the 
twins, too. ” 

The man put out a strong, sinewy hand and 
gave each of the girls such a grip as made them 
wince. “ Mighty glad to meet you,” he said. 
“ It’s been nothing but Nan and Mary Lee ever 
since we left home. I don’t think I’d be willing 
to leave my little girl in any other company, 
but I am glad I can in yours.” He leaned for- 
ward confidentially. “ How do you like it ? 
Teachers good to you ? Give you enough to 
eat ? Nice girls here? ” 

“We like it pretty well,” said Nan a little 
doubtfully. “ Miss Barnes is lovely though she 
makes you a little afraid of her sometimes, she 
is so dignified. Blue China, I mean Mrs. Chan- 
ning, who looks after the house, is stiff and sort 


Daniella’s Coming 69 

of over-particular, but once when Jean had a 
cold she was very kind. The girls are real nice, 
especially Charlotte Loring and Josephine 
Keys : they are all crazy to see Daniella.” 

“They are, are they? What for? ” said Mr. 
Scott sharply. 

Nan looked a little abashed. “ Oh, because 
she is a friend of ours and has lived on a ranch. 
They are all Yankees up here except ourselves 
and Josephine. Jo is from the west, from Utah, 
and knows about mines and things. She says 
we are a majority now ; five Yankees against 
six Westerners and Southerners. We’ll have 
some mighty hot arguments, I reckon.” 

A smile came over Mr. Scott’s grave face, 
and just then Miss Barnes came in, so the Cor- 
ners made their escape to lie in wait for Dani- 
ella when she should be free to come with them. 
The girls had vied with one another in trying 
to make the heroine’s room attractive. One 
had brought flowers, another had hung up a 
pretty picture, a third had put a little plate of 
bonbons on the table, a fourth had contributed 
an entertaining book. The Corners had set a 
row of photographs along the front of the mir- 
ror, photographs of the Virginia mountains, of 
their own old home, of the main street of their 
town, and such familiar scenes. Moreover they 
had hung up a large photograph of Unc’ Landy 


70 


The Four Corners at School 


feeding the pig, a group of chickens in the fore- 
ground, and they had piled a plate with apples 
and chestnuts, sent for Thanksgiving from their 
home. 

When at last Daniella was delivered into 
their hands, they led her in triumph up-stairs. 
Six girls hovered on the outskirts, but did not 
venture forward yet. Nan had urged them not 
to scare Daniella with too early a descent upon 
her. The four sisters would act as sufficient 
body-guard. 

The twins ran ahead and threw open the door 
of Daniella’s room ; Nan and Mary Lee ushered 
in the new boarder. “All the girls helped,^’ 
said Jack eagerly. “ They wanted you to feel 
at home, and have everything pretty.” 

“ The apples and chestnuts are from our own 
home down in Virginia,” put in Jean. “ Maybe 
you know the tree that the apples grew on ; it 
is down back of the garden. The boys got the 
chestnuts up on the mountain.” 

Daniella looked around at the pretty room 
made homelike by loving touches, and her lips 
trembled. She went to the mirror to take off 
her hat ; as the line of photographs met her 
eye the tears began to flow, and covering her 
face with her hands she fled to the further recess 
of the room and wept silently. It was so like the 
old Daniella to say nothing but to feel deeply. 


Daniella’s Coming 7 1 

Nan went to her and put her arms around 
her. “ Oh, Daniella,” she said ; “ we thought 
you’d like it. Please don’t cry.” 

Daniella dried her eyes at once. ” I do like 
it,” she answered, “ but it brings it all back ; 
the cabin, and — and — ma.” The tears flowed 
afresh. 

“ Oh, dear,” sighed Jack in a half whisper, 
‘‘ we didn’t want her to cry.” 

Daniella choked back her sobs. “ I’m all 
right now,” she said. “ It was kind of sudden, 
you know, all of it, and I — I’m sort of excited, 
I reckon. I ain’t goin’ to cry no mo’. I mean 
I’m not going to cry any mo’. You-all are 
goin’ to be ashamed of me,” she added quickly. 
‘‘ I haven’t learned to talk right yet, though I’m 
tryin’ to. My governess. Miss Brandley, learned 
me — taught me a heap. Papa says I’ll get the 
hang of it after a while. He knows better than 
I do, for you know ma’s folks were a good 
family, and papa says it was just never bearin’ 
nothin’ — anything but that mountain talk got 
her to forgettin’ how she used to speak, and I 
reckon that’s so, fo’ it isn’t so hard fo’ me now. 
I want you-all to tell me when I use bad gram- 
mar.” 

” Oh, you mustn’t say bad grammar,” said 
Nan a little hesitatingly, just say whenever I 
speak incorrectly.” 


72 The Four Corners at School 

Daniella nodded. “All right, whenever I 
speak incorrectly. You’ll do it, won’t you? 
Papa said he knew you would if I asked you to, 
and I wouldn’t mind a bit your telling me, but 
I’d hate strangers to.” 

Daniella had taken off her hat now. Her 
pretty curling hair had grown several shades 
darker, and was arranged neatly, although shin- 
ing strands would escape and curl up in little 
tendrils around her forehead. She was prettier 
than ever, her friends decided, for when they 
had first seen her she was as brown as a berry, 
and her hair, burnt by the sun, had lost the 
golden lights it now had. Her big soft eyes, 
like a fawn’s, turned pleadingly on the girls as 
she spoke, made them feel more ready than 
ever to fight her battles, if conflicts there must 
be. 

“Of course,” said Nan reassuringly, “we’re 
going to do all we can to make you happy, 
and to help you in every way we can. We al- 
ways did love you, Daniella, and we haven’t 
stopped, remember that.” 

Daniella gave a sigh of content. “That’s 
what papa said. He loves me, po’ papa. He 
ain’t got nobody left but me. I mustn’t say 
ain’t got, must I ? He hasn’t anybody left but 
me, and he’s going to be proud of me if I work 
real hard, and I’m going to, but I shall miss 


Daniella’s Coming 73 

him and he’ll miss me, po’ papa.” Tears again 
filled the lovely eyes. 

“ Well, but you know,” said Mary Lee con- 
solingly, “ we are away off from our home and 
friends, too, so we’re in the same boat. Jo 
Keys is another one that has come from a long 
distance, and nearly all the girls get homesick 
sometimes. But, Daniella, we shall have good 
times together, and we are glad to have you 
here.” 

“Are you?” Daniella asked eagerly. 
“Sure?” 

“Yes, indeed, we truly are,” come a chorus 
of four voices. 

“ Well, I never forgot you, no not once, but 
I thought maybe you’d forget me, but all this,” 
she made a movement of her hand, “ shows me 
you’re just the same. Ma used to say you’d 
be, and I’m glad I’ve come, for I do want to 
please papa and be a credit to him ; and I love 
you all, I love you mightily.” 

“ Don’t you want to meet the other girls ? ” 
asked Mary Lee ; “ they are crazy to see you.” 

Daniella shrank back. “ Must I meet 
them ? ” 

“Why, some time, and why not now? You 
wdll see them at the supper table anyway.” 

“That’s so. I might as well get it over. 
They won’t bite me, I reckon.” 


74 


The Four Comers at School 


“ Suppose we go into our room ; it is larger 
than this,” said Nan. “ I’ll take Daniella in 
there, Mary Lee, and you call the girls.” 

The girls needed no second invitation, and 
trooped eagerly into the Corners’ room. If 
Daniella had not been a beauty her shyness 
and her awkward speech might have been 
something of a shock to the six girls who came 
forward to greet her. But when she turned her 
melting eyes upon them, and they saw the 
masses of golden-brown hair gleaming in the 
sun, they gazed in admiration. “She’s the 
prettiest girl in the whole school,” whispered 
Jo to Mary Lee. “Why didn’t you tell us how 
pretty she was ? ” 

“ I thought we did say she was pretty.” 

“You didn’t rave over her. She is too 
sweet for words. She is more of a heroine 
than ever. I must get over there and talk to 
her,’ and indeed, it was Jo, more than the others, 
who was able to draw Daniella out. Jo knew 
ranch life and mining towns ; she was quick, 
responsive and full of fun. She did not speak 
in stilted tones, and her language was not 
too exact, so Daniella felt that here, at least, 
was one who would not criticise her very se- 
verely. 

Charlotte tried to be agreeable and offered a 
welcome in a little set speech. The other girls 


Daniella’s Coming 75 

were also polite, but none of them could get 
more than a “ thank you,” from Daniella. 

Mr. Scott stayed to supper, and entertained 
them by stories of adventure and hairbreadth 
escapes. He talked simply and modesdy with 
a strong Southern accent, and was only made 
to tell his experiences by seeing the eagerness 
of the girls to listen to them. An hour after 
supper he took his departure. He and Daniella 
said their farewells in the reception-room, with- 
out witnesses, and when he had made his 
adieux to the rest, Mary Lee looked around for 
Daniella, but she was not there, nor was she in 
her room. They searched for her in vain. 
Like some creature of the woods she had 
hidden herself in this hour of distress. Her 
hat and coat lay on her bed, and her other be- 
longings were where she had placed them, so 
they knew she had not left the house. In what 
dark corner she had hidden herself no one 
knew, and Miss Barnes decided that they would 
not try to find out. 

“ She will probably come back after a while,” 
she said, “ and if she is not in her room by bed- 
time we will look for her.” She turned to Nan 
as she spoke. “ I think we shall be glad we 
decided to receive her,” she said in a low tone. 
“ She is a very interesting study.” 

When the twins were tucked in bed, and Nan 


76 The Four Corners at School 

had left them, after performing her nightly duty 
of seeing them safely stowed, she noticed that 
Daniella’s door was closed. She tapped gently. 
No one answered. “ It’s only Nan, Daniella,” 
she said, after a pause. In a moment a voice 
said : “ Come in,” and Nan went into the room. 
It was dark and at the window sat Daniella, 
her forehead pressed against the pane. 

“ He’s gone,” she said helplessly, “ and I 
can’t call him back.” 

“ I know just how you feel,” said Nan, kneel- 
ing down by her. “ It seemed to me that the 
whole world stood still, and that nothing mat- 
tered so much as my seeing my mother after 
she left us here. For a little while I thought I 
just couldn’t stand it, and that I’d follow her 
though the skies fell. I had to keep saying to 
myself : It hurts her as much as it does me, 
and if it wasn’t right for us to be left here she 
wouldn’t have left us.” 

Daniella pressed the hand that held hers. 
Nan understood, and that comforted her. 

“ Should you like to come in our room and 
sleep?” asked Nan. “ Mary Lee or I will sleep 
in here to-night, if you would rather.” 

“No, I don’t mind being alone,” returned 
Daniella. “ I’ll go to bed now, and I’ll think of 
that : it hurts him, too, and he wouldn’t have 
left me, if it hadn’t been right.” 


Daniella’s Coming 77 

“ The twinnies sent you a good-night kiss/’ 
Nan told her. “I’ll light the gas for you, and 
I’ll tell Miss Barnes you are tired and have gone 
to bed. Good-night and pleasant dreams, 
Daniella. Just remember that you are in a 
whole nest of friends and go to sleep.” With 
that she left her, and being very weary in mind 
and body Daniella did soon fall asleep. 

Perhaps her hardest trial was the next day, 
when she was obliged to face the whole school, 
and when she found herself, b}^ reason of her 
backwardness, placed in a lower class than the 
twins. But if she felt any mortification she did 
not show it except by a more tense expression 
around her mouth and a more dauntless look in 
her eyes. 

“ She will not stay there long,” Miss Ames 
told Miss Barnes. “ She is as quick as a flash, 
in a very original way, and I’ll venture to say 
that in a month she will be ready for promo- 
tion.” 

Mary Lee happened to overhear this and 
straightway told Daniella. “I’m mighty glad 
to hear it,” said she. “ I reckon if I work hard 
I’ll catch up some day.” And work hard she 
did, so that Miss Barnes told the girls they must 
try to coax this unflagging student to spend 
more time out-of-doors. 

Basket-ball did not appeal to her as much as 


78 The Four Corners at School 

tennis. She could run like a deer, had an un- 
erring eye and well-trained muscles. Even 
when Miss Barnes made it a rule that she must 
give so much time to outdoor exercise, she did 
this as faithfully as she studied. 

“ If she keeps on, she will out-distance us all 
in outdoor sports,” said Charlotte one day. 
“ Indeed, I’m inclined to think we’ve found a 
white blackbird, and that our heroine is a 
heroine indeed. I wonder how soon she will 
descend to earth and become an ordinary human 
being who will do some unpleasantly earthly 
thing to arouse our jealousy or our anger.” 

“ I don’t see why she need to do either,” re- 
turned Nan to whom Charlotte was speaking. 

“She’s bound to have faults since she is 
human.” 

“ Of course she is, but she needn’t be dis- 
agreeable to have them.” 

“ No one is ever uniformly agreeable,” re- 
turned Charlotte. 

“ No, not even yourself or myself,” replied 
Nan laughing. “ We have frequent tilts, 
Charley, and we don’t even admire the same 
patterns of dress goods, but we respect each 
other, and I think we’ll always be friends, and 
call each other Charley and Nan to the end of 
the chapter. We’ll be calling Daniella, Dan 
next. I’m not sure but Jo has begun it already. 


Daniella’s Coming 79 

Isn^t it funny how many of the girls have 
masculine nicknames, and how differently they 
accept them ? Call Frances, Frank, and she 
looks the picture of injured dignity. Call 
Josephine anything but Jo and she looks as if 
you had insulted her. Let any one but your 
own intimates call you Charley and your reserve 
freezes an inch thick. We can't nickname Mary 
Lee and we wouldn’t if we could. Jack wouldn’t 
answer to any other name, and Jean would look 
disgusted if you would called her Jeanie. 
Listen, there’s something going on over there. 
I do believe Daniella’s wings are drooping, and 
she has become a human being with a venge- 
ance.” 

The two moved over to where a group of 
girls were in altercation. Daniella was stand- 
ing with fiercely clenched hands and flushed 
cheeks. “ If you say that again I’ll kill you,” 
she exclaimed facing Frances Powers. 

“ What is the matter ? ” cried Nan. 

Daniella turned. “ She’s calling me a liar.” 

“ Why did she ? ” 

“ Because I saw her cheat and said I 
wouldn’t play with a sneaking cheat. She said 
I lied.” 

Frances, scarcely less angry, though more 
self-controlled, stood head up, mouth com- 
pressed. Nan looked her up and down ; for a 


8o The Four Corners at School 

second Frances’s eyes dropped, but she regained 
her poise at once. “ Tell me how it was, some- 
body.” Nan turned to the group, but Frances 
spoke up. “ Miss Scott labors under the im- 
pression that I was trying for a winning game 
by making miscounts. I told her she was mis- 
taken ; she persisted in her charge. I asked 
her to prove it ; she could not.” 

“You did count wrong, you know,” spoke up 
Josephine. 

“ Oh, did I ? Then it was entirely inadver- 
tently,” said Frances moving away. 

“You low down white trash,” muttered 
Daniella. “You know you meant to do it, for 
you kept on after we told you.” 

“ Daniella, Daniella,” whispered Nan, “ you 
mustn’t call names ; it isn’t ladylike. Come 
over here and tell me all about it.” 

“ She’s always been trying to make out that 
I don’t beat, when I do,” complained Daniella, 
when they were out of hearing. “ She turns 
up her nose at my playing and tries to make 
out she wins when I know I ought to, and to- 
day I made up my mind I wouldn’t stand it 
any longer, so I just fired up. She was very 
polite at first but after a while she flung at me 
and said she didn’t think my word could be 
taken against hers, as every one knew what to 
expect of one of my origin. Then I got hop- 


Daniella's Coming 8l 

ping, for that meant I was a liar and no ’count, 
too.” 

“ Every one has always given Frances the 
championship,” said Nan, “ for she was the best 
player till you came and learned to distance 
her. That’s why she is so mad. She was 
perfectly horrid to speak so, but Daniella, you 
can prove yourself superior by treating her 
w’ith silent contempt and refusing to play with 
her again. When you call names you make 
it seem that you aren’t a real lady, and give 
her the advantage. Just treat her with cold 
disdain.” 

“Just like she wasn’t good enough for me to 
wipe my shoes on. I’ll do that. All the other 
girls took up for me, and I reckon I can stand 
her talk.” And indeed, after this Daniella’s 
splendid disdain was the admiration of the 
other girls. She was not so much of a heroine 
perhaps, since familiar association had brought 
her down to a common level with her school- 
mates, but her beauty did not diminish and as 
she improved in speech and bearing she became 
more companionable, though Mary Lee and 
Nan were her chosen comrades. Her aloofness 
was rather in her favor, and among the day 
scholars it had become something of a contest 
to see which should be able to entice her away 
from the Corner girls. 


82 


The Four Corners at School 


She tried very hard to conform to the rules 
of the school, but once her wild spirit broke 
from its bounds and she ran off to the nearest 
woods where she stayed all day, coming back 
at night half ashamed, half defiant. Yet she 
honestly confessed her misdoing to Miss Barnes, 
making no excuse beyond saying : I couldn’t 
help it, I couldn’t. I’d gone crazy if I had 
stayed indoors another day. I have never been 
used to it, and it is so hard. I don’t see how I 
am going to stand it when I feel that way.” 

“ It must be hard for a free bird to be caged,” 
said Miss Barnes kindly. “We shall have to 
see what can be done about it, Daniella. The 
next time you feel so come to me, and we’ll 
try to arrange some way out of it. If you will 
make up the lessons you have lost to-day, I will 
excuse your absence this time.” 

Only twice after this did Daniella report that 
she was “ feeling wild again.” Both times she 
was given leave to stay out-of-doors all day, 
but on each occasion she remained a shorter 
time. The very feeling that she was not re- 
strained had the effect Miss Barnes hoped for, 
and after the third dash for freedom, Daniella 
was able to conquer her restlessness. 

So while she was expanding and improving 
under all these new influences the Corners were 
establishing their own reputations and were be- 


Daniella’s Coming 83 

coming used to boarding-school life, to the 
exactions of Blue China, the pranks of Jose- 
phine and the fine helpful guidance of Miss 
Barnes. 



4 


i 



CHAPTER V 
JEAN’S ADVENTURE 



N 


( 





$ 


t 


i 


t 

f 




t 



CHAPTER V 


JEAN'S ADVENTURE 

In a few weeks Daniella had outgrown much 
of her shyness though she still shrank from any- 
thing which brought her into prominence, any- 
thing, at least in which the Corners could not 
bear her company. Therefore she refused all 
invitations to visit the girls during the Christ- 
mas holidays, though many invitations were 
given her. Josephine was going home with 
Charlotte and the others who lived nearer 
would go to their own homes, so only Daniella 
was unprovided for. 

“ She will be mighty lonely here by herself," 
said Jack. 

“You don’t think one of us ought to stay 
here with her while the others go to New York, 
do you. Nan ? ’’ asked Mary Lee in a distressed 
voice. 

They all looked at each other. Such an act 
of heroism was quite beyond the power of any 
one to consider. “ Oh, dear, no," said Nan 
faintly, but she added later, “ I suppose if any 
one does, it ought to be I." 


88 


The Four Corners at School 


“ Oh, Nan, why ? ” said Jack in unhappy 
tones. 

“Because I am the oldest. Mr. St. Nick 
counts on you especially, and to ask Mary Lee 
to give up seeing her beloved Miss Dolores 
would be too much, and I couldn’t sacrifice 
poor little Jean.” 

“ It would be crite hard,” sighed Jean. “ I 
don’t see why Daniella should expect it. Nan. 
She isn’t any kin of ours and if she had gone to 
another school she’d have to stay alone or else 
go to her father.” 

No one answered at once. Presently Mary 
Lee said, “ I believe I am getting a real 
Puritan conscience, for I really feel bothered 
over it, though I don’t see why I should. If 
she won’t accept invitations and go where she 
might have a good time we can’t help it. Ellen 
Willson wanted her for the holidays and so did 
Alice Harrison, so it’s nobody’s fault but her 
own if she is lonely. Don’t let us trouble our- 
selves about it any more.” 

For all this waiving the question, Mary Lee 
did feel at heart very sorry to leave Daniella. 
She thought of it so much that in the letter to 
Miss Dolores that week she hinted at giving up 
her visit to New York in order that Daniella 
should not be left alone. A few days after came 
a letter from Mr. Pinckney. “What’s this I 


Jean’s Adventure 89 

hear/' he wrote, “about one of you backing 
out of that promised holiday visit ? Don’t you 
dare suggest such a thing. Dolores and I have 
been talking for months about your coming. 
Who’s this Daniella and why shouldn’t she 
come, too ? Bring her along. The more the 
merrier.” 

Mary Lee hurried to Nan. “ What do you 
think? ” she cried. “ I’ve had a letter from Mr. 
St. Nick and he wants us to bring Daniella 
with us.” 

“ Really ? ” Nan looked up from the etude 
she was practicing. “Wouldn’t that be great? 
Let’s go tell her.” 

They hurried off to hunt up Daniella to whom 
they unfolded the news. To their great sur- 
prise she shook her head. “ No,” she said, “ I 
will not go. Your friends don’t know me. 
They don’t know how uncivilized I am.” 

“ But you are not uncivilized,” Mary Lee 
protested. “ You are quite like other girls, 
Daniella.” 

“ Not yet. They are only asking me on your 
account. I will go home with Ellen Willson, 
for at her house they know just what I am. 
Her mother has been here and has insisted that 
I should go. I like Ellen, and her mother was 
very kind, and said it would make Ellen happy 
to have me because she has no sister. Besides, 


90 


The Four Corners at School 


if I find I can’t stand them and think they can’t 
stand me I can get away easily, for it is only 
two squares off.” 

Nan laughed. “It is because she can get 
away easily that she is willing to go, I verily 
believe.” 

Daniella took this quite seriously. “Yes, 
that is it. I promised I would stay over Christ- 
mas, but I didn’t promise for any longer, though 
they said they wouldn’t hear of my leaving un- 
til after the holidays.” 

“ Very well,” said Mary Lee, “ then if that is 
decided we shall have to write and say that the 
popular Miss Scott had a previous engagement, 
and could not accept ours.” 

Daniella looked a little troubled ; she would 
not have offended one of these friends for any- 
thing. 

“ Don’t look distressed, Daniella,” said Nan. 
“It is all right, and as they say up here, you 
will have a ‘ beautiful ’ time. You must tell us 
all about it when we get back.” 

“ Did you ever ! ” said Mary Lee when they 
had left Daniella’s room. “ Wasn’t she funny 
about it ? ” 

“Yes, but I think she had an idea we were 
feeling the responsibility of her holidays, and 
she was determined we should not be both- 
ered with her. I find she is very quick to 


Jean’s Adventure 


91 

understand a situation, and has keen sensi- 
bilities.” 

“That sounds like Aunt Helen,” laughed 
Mary Lee. 

Nan told Miss Barnes about it later on. “ I’m 
very much pleased that it has turned out so,” 
Miss Barnes commented, “for it is precisely 
what she needs. Daniella depends too much 
upon you and it will do her good to make this 
visit alone. Mrs. Willson is a charming woman 
and knows Daniella’ s history ; I am sure she 
will do all she can to make the child feel at 
ease. Then, too, as Daniella very wisely says, 
if things go wrong it will be very easy for her 
to return to us.” 

With Daniella’s happiness secured the Cor- 
ners prepared for their own pleasures, and a 
couple of days before Christmas set off bag and 
baggage for New York, all alert for the good 
times ahead. Their old friend, Mr. Pinckney, 
jovial and eager, was waiting for them when 
they stepped from the train. “Where’s the 
extra one ? ” he asked. “ One, two, three, four. 
I thought there was to be another.” 

“ No, Daniella has gone to the Willsons,” 
Jack gave the information, “ so there are only 
the four Corners.” 

“ Only the Corners,” repeated Nan ; “ I think 
they are quite enough.” 


92 


The Four Corners at School 


‘‘ Where is Miss Dolores ? ” queried Mary 
Lee. 

“ She is at home waiting to welcome you. 
She has a slight cold and I did not want her to 
venture out this raw day. She is used to milder 
winters, you see,” Mr. Pinckney told them. 
“ Where are your checks. Miss Nan ? I sup- 
pose you are the one who has them in charge.” 

“ No, Mary Lee was afraid Pd lose them. 
She always carries the checks because she 
thinks she is more reliable, and I dare say she 
is right.” 

Mary Lee delivered up the checks and before 
long Mr. Pinckney returned to pilot them to the 
carriage which stood waiting. “Jump in, all 
of you,” he said. “ I think there is room if 
you don’t all try to sit on the seat with me.” 
His jolly laugh rang out as Jack looked him up 
and down and declared he looked more like 
Santa Claus than ever. 

“ It’s that granddaughter of mine,” he said. 
“ She takes such good care of me that I am in 
danger of becoming broader than I am long, 
and before long will have to walk on my 
sides.” The vision of Mr. St. Nick rolling 
down Broadway on his sides amused the twins, 
both of whom clamored to share the seat with 
him, but this honor was finally Jack’s alone, for 
she was his favorite of them all. 


Jean's Adventure 


93 


The house before which they finally drew up 
was, like so many New York houses, a plain 
brown stone front, not very attractive in ex- 
terior, but inside it was comfortable and even 
luxurious. There were good pictures on the 
walls, handsome rugs on the floors, odd bits of 
furniture in the rooms, with many pretty and 
unusual things gathered from all parts of the 
world. The girls thought it quite the hand- 
somest house they had ever been in. 

Miss Dolores came from the library to meet 
them at the door, and herself showed them to 
their rooms. “ Grandfather thought you would 
rather have these communicating rooms,” she 
told them, “ and I am pleased if you will like 
them,” for the girls had exclaimed, “ How 
lovely I ” when they were shown their quarters. 
One was a large alcove room hung with blue 
and white ; the other opening from it was in 
pink and white. Open grate fires burned in 
each, vases of flowers stood on the tables, curi- 
ous pieces of bric-^-brac were scattered about 
and the pictures were such as to attract young 
people. The senorita, as the girls called this 
half Spanish daughter of the house, was much 
more spontaneous and demonstrative than when 
they first met her in California, and although 
she had not yet overcome her foreign accent, 
and once in a while used some odd expression. 


94 The Four Corners at School 

this but added to her charm. Mary Lee ad- 
mired her extravagantly, and gazed at her 
with adoring eyes as she turned from one to the 
other. 

“It is so perfectly delightful to have you 
again, dearest Miss Dolores,” she said. “ I 
wish we had been sent to a New York school 
instead of to a Boston one, so we could see you 
oftener.” 

The sehorita smiled indulgently. “You 
would the sooner tire,” she answered. “ It is 
not best to know me too well. I am not the 
angel you think.” 

“ Oh, but we know you are,” returned Mary 
Lee. “ When you were teaching us in Califor- 
nia we had a chance to find out, and if you 
were so near perfection then you must be the 
same now, and I am sure you look like an 
angel in that dress.” 

The senorita laughed. “ ‘ The fine feather 
makes the fine bird,’ as you say.” 

But Mary Lee denied this, and dinner being 
ready they all went down-stairs to where Mr. 
Pinckney was impatiently waiting for them. 
Jack danced up to him. “ I want to sit by 
you,” she said. 

“ So you shall,” he told her. “ Nan on my 
right and you on my left. Mary Lee on Miss 
Dolores’ right, Jean on her left ; that is the way 


Jean’s Adventure 


95 


we have arranged it.” This suited everybody 
and the dinner was a merry one. Jack’s com- 
parisons between boarding-school fare and that 
before them, Jean’s innocent comments, Nan’s 
bright stories, Mary Lee’s happy appreciation 
of everything entertained Mr. Pinckney as he 
was rarely entertained. 

“Should you all like to go to a matinee ? ” he 
asked as they arose from the table. “ There is 
a pretty little fairy play at one of the theatres, 
and I have taken a box for us all.” 

Jean clasped her hands. “Oh,” she ex- 
claimed, “I have never seen a play, neither has 
Jack, and a fairy play would be lovely. I’m 
all in a criver. Will there be a creen, do you 
think?” 

“ I don’t know about the ‘ creen,’ ” laughed 
Mr. Pinckney, “ but it is a pretty play, I am 
told.” 

Both Jean and Jack were truly all of a quiver 
from that time on, and could talk of nothing 
but the delightful matinee until the time came. 
“ Shall we dress as if we were going to a 
party ?” Jack asked. 

“You may wear white frocks,” Nan told 
them, “ and you needn’t keep on your hats as 
we shall be in a box.” 

“What is a box. Nan ?” asked Jack. “ Is it 
anything like a trunk ? I am afraid I shan't 


96 The Four Corners at School 

like it. Has it a lid that you have to lift up 
when you want to see out? ” 

Nan laughed. “ It isn’t a bit like that, and 
you will like it very much. It’s like a little 
room with chairs in it, only it has no front to it 
except something like a balcony railing.” 

Jack was very much puzzled by this descrip- 
tion and had no adequate idea of what it was 
like till she reached her seat. Then she turned 
with a beaming smile to Mr. Pinckney. “It 
isn’t at all the kind of box I thought it was,” 
she said ; “it is much nicer. I thought it was 
something like a trunk.” 

“ I didn’t,” said Jean as she settled herself with 
a satisfied sigh. “ I thought it was like a bird 
cage. Where will the fairies be, Mr. St. Nick ? ” 
“ Watch that big curtain and when it rolls up 
you will see,” he told her. 

For the next two or three hours it was an 
absorbed group of children who gazed on the 
scenes before them. It was so real to them, 
so absorbingly real that when the curtain fell 
upon the last act they came back to earth 
rather dazed, and for a few moments were 
speechless. Then their chatter began and Mr. 
Pinckney was plied with so many questions as 
to make him declare he should have to send 
for the author of the play to tell him the sequel 
before he would be able to answer. 


Jean's Adventure 


97 


“ Where is the fairy queen now ? ” asked Jean 
as they were making their way slowly along. 

“She is probably in the greenroom,” Mr. 
Pinckney told her. 

“ Where’s that ? ” 

“ Oh, behind the stage somewhere.” 

“ I wish I could see her.” 

“ You can’t, Jean. How silly you are,” said 
Nan. 

“If I went there and told her I loved her, 
wouldn’t she speak to me?” persisted Jean. 

“ Oh, I suppose she might, but yoij can’t 
go.” 

“ Why not ? ” 

“ Because there is no one to go with you, 
and if you went by yourself you might get lost. 
Besides I don’t suppose they would allow you 
there.” 

“ It wouldn’t take but a minute, and I could 
run around to the front by the time you got 
through all this crowd.” 

“ Don’t be foolish, child ; of course you 
couldn’t do it.” 

“ Why?” 

“ I just told you why.” 

But Jean was not satisfied. She knew she 
could turn back and get through that funny 
little door where the musicians went out. If 
they could get through she could. It seemed 


gS The Four Corners at School 

the most appropriate sort of entrance to a 
fairy’s dwelling, and she knew it must lead 
to that mysterious greenroom. The very name 
had a magical sound. It was probably em- 
bowered in trees and plants, and there were 
mossy seats all around, on one of these would 
sit the fairy queen. The vision was too much 
for Jean. She watched her chance, slipped 
through the crowd which was moving forward, 
and ran back the way she had come. She 
crept along the side of the big empty theatre 
until she reached the railing which fenced in the 
orchestra. It was not hard to climb over, to 
find her way through the music racks, push 
open the little door under the stage and go in. 

What a queer place it was ! Damp; musty 
odors greeted her, dingy looking, bare spaces 
were beyond, but, nothing daunted, Jean 
followed up her intention. It was probably 
through such queer places that Alice reached 
Wonderland, and all who would encounter 
fairies must come by strange ways. Presently 
a strange looking man caught sight of her. 
“ What you doing here ? ” he asked gruffly. 

“ I want to find the greenroom,” said Jean 
half scared. 

“ Oh, you do. Keep right on to the second 
door to your left.” 

This sounded promising. It was much such 



Jean Wondered at the Dinginess and Confusion 





Jean’s Adventure 


99 


an answer as Alice would have had. She kept 
on to the second door wondering more and 
more at the dinginess and confusion. Ahead 
it was lighter and there was a great chattering 
going on in the room she was nearing. At the 
door to which she had been directed she paused. 
One or two men passing along glanced at her, 
and a stout woman breathing heavily bore 
down upon her from an opposite direction, so 
she knocked hastily. 

The door was opened almost immediately 
by rather a dowdy looking young woman. 
** Well ? ” she said. 

“Can I see the fairy creen?” asked Jean 
timidly. 

“ Have you a note or a message ? ” 

“No, I just wanted to see her myself.” 

The young woman looked at her with a 
broad smile, then she called over her shoulder, 
“ Here’s a kid wants to see the fairy queen. 
What do you think of that ? ” 

A shout of laughter went up from the room. 
“It’s quite as they would do in Wonderland 
or the Looking-Glass Country,” said Jean to 
herself. Then she mustered up courage to ask 
again, “ Can I see the fairy creen ? Do you 
think she will see me ? ” 

“ She’s right here before you,” said the young 
woman. “ I’m her.” 


lOO The Four Corners at School 

Of course this couldn’t be so, Jean told her- 
self, and it was just like them to pretend that 
way. So she smiled indulgently. “ Oh, I 
understand,” she said. “ I know how queer it 
is. Do I have to have a charm or a — a — sign 
or something ? ” 

The woman burst out laughing. “You’re 
way off. I guess you’d better go home. The 
fairy queen won’t be on again till eight o’clock 
to-night.” 

“ Oh, has she gone ? Didn’t I get here in 
time?” The possibility of this had not oc- 
curred to Jean. 

“ She’s just about making her exit,” she was 
told. “ There’s Jim, girls.” The young woman 
spoke to those within the room. “ I’m off,” 
and leaving Jean standing there she went on. 

It was not at all satisfactory but Jean 
gathered up courage to make another effort 
and knocked again. A younger girl came. 
“ What you want, kiddy? ” she asked kindly. 

“I’d like to see the fairy creen.” 

“ Miss Norman ? Oh, she’s just gone. She 
went out a few minutes ago. Didn’t you see 
her ? ” 

Jean shook her head. After all she was too 
late ; that was it. 

“ I’m awful sorry,” said the girl kindly. “ Come 
along and I will show you the way out. How 


Jean’s Adventure loi 

did you get in? I wonder that old Jessup let 
you.” 

“ Was he the queer looking man down 
there ? ” Jean nodded toward the dim passage- 
way through which she had come. 

“You don’t mean to say you came in that 
way ? How did you manage to do it ? ” 

“ I climbed over the railing and came in by 
the little door where the men with the fiddles 
go.” 

The girl laughed. “ Well, I never,” she said 
speaking to those inside. “ Hear that, girls ? 
She came in by the door where the men with 
the fiddles go. Ain’t it a wonder somebody 
didn’t stop her? Come on, kiddy, and I’ll show 
you a better way to get out.” 

Jean followed and was led through a still 
longer passageway to a side door which 
opened on the street. “You didn’t come 
alone ? ” said the girl. 

“No, I came with my sisters and Mr. St. 
Nick ; his name is really Mr. Pinckney but we 
call him that.” 

“ Oh, then, I guess they will be waiting for 
you around in front. You go right around the 
corner and probably you’ll see them. Good- 
bye.” 

“Thank you for showing me,” said Jean, 
turning from her companion. She went 


102 The Four Corners at School 


around the corner as she had been directed 
There was no crowd at all now, and the line of 
carriages had disappeared. Perhaps they were 
waiting inside. She walked up the steps and 
into the lobby. There was no one to be seen 
except a young man who was just coming 
away from the box office. As he was passing 
out he looked down at Jean’s troubled little 
face. 

Anything wrong, little one ? ” he asked 
pleasantly. 

“ I can’t find my friends,” said Jean in a dis- 
tressed voice. 

“ Why, now, that’s too bad.” The young 
man looked around. Were you to meet them 
here ? ” 

‘‘ I didn’t think they’d be gone by the time 
I got back. There was such a crowd, you 
know.” 

“ There was a crowd, I suspect, for I saw the 
tag end of it. What are you going to do 
now? Shall I put you on the car for your 
home ? ” 

“ Oh, I don’t live here. I’m visiting, and I 
am afraid I don’t exactly remember the num- 
ber of the house.” 

“ Whom are you visiting ? No doubt I can 
find the address in the directory. Suppose you 
come along with me to that drug store over 


Jean’s Adventure 103 

there and we’ll hunt up the address. If they 
expected you I don’t see why they didn’t wait 
for you ? ” 

“ Oh, but you see they didn’t know where I 
had gone.” Jean in her eagerness to screen 
her friends forgot that she was compromising 
herself. 

The young man looked at her with new in- 
terest. “ Why,” he exclaimed, that is a queer 
situation. How was it ? ” 

Jean looked rather abashed. “I wanted to 
see the fairy creen,” she told him shyly, “ and 
I thought I could get back before the crowd 
was out, so I went and tried to find her.” 

“Well, did you see her?” The young 
man’s eyes were full of laughter. 

“ No,” Jean confessed ; then encouraged to 
go on she told him the whole story to his great 
amusement. It was evident that the child did 
not know just where to draw the line between 
reality and pretense. She did not actually be- 
lieve that she would find a veritable fairy-land 
behind the stage, but she thought it would look 
like it and that the person who represented the 
fairy queen always looked just as she did upon 
the stage. She ended her tale with : “ And 

now they have gone to a lovely place to dinner, 
and I shall have to stay in the house all by 
myself.” She felt in her heart of hearts that 


104 The Four Corners at School 

she deserved this, but it was none the less 
bitter. 

The young man had no words of censure, 
however, but continued to smile after she had 
told her story. He carefully escorted her 
across the street to the drug store and looked 
up the name of Nicholas Pinckney in the tele- 
phone directory. “We’ll soon have you ac- 
counted for,” he said cheerfully, “ but you 
mustn’t miss your dinner. Just wait a mo- 
ment and we’ll talk that over after I get them 
on the ’phone.” In a few minutes he had the 
connection. “Who’s Jennings?” he asked 
Jean. 

“ Oh, he’s the butler.” 

“He says that no one has returned yet, that 
they are not to be at home for dinner. I have 
told him if they called him up to say you are 
safe. Do you want to reassure him yourself?” 

Jean nodded and went to the telephone. 
“ I’m all safe,” she said. “ I got lost, Jennings. 
I’m coming home pretty soon.” 

The young man took the receiver from her. 
“ Oh, Jennings, this is Mr. Harold Kirk. I 
have Miss Jean in charge and will bring her 
home later. If Mr. Pinckney inquires tell him 
to call me up at Gazzo’s. Good-bye.” 


CHAPTER VI 
WHEN CHRISTMAS CAME 


k 



■ . I • 

r , 

i 

^ ' il 






\ 


« 




I 


9 


% 

I 








. V » 


I 


♦ 


« 


CHAPTER VI 


WHEN CHRISTMAS CAME 

“ Now then/* said Mr. Kirk as he hung up 
the receiver, ** we’ll go to dinner.” 

Jean looked up in surprise. “ Oh, but ” 

she began. 

He smiled down at her. “ You wouldn’t be 
so hard as to condemn a lone bachelor to a 
solitary dinner on Christmas Eve, would you ? 
It is this way, you see. I expected a friend to 
meet me in town and dine with me, but he 
hasn’t been able to come, so unless you grace 
with your presence my feast, I shall be all by 
myself. If I knew where your friends were 
dining, I would take you there, but Jennings did 
not seem to know, and so as Gazzo’s is close 
by I thought we would go there and get home 
by the time your friends do, or a little later. 
They will probably telephone to the house to 
inquire if you have been heard from, and will 
know you are quite safe. Does the arrange- 
ment meet with your approval?” He spoke 
seriously but still with merry eyes. 

Jean was sure she liked him very much, and 


lo8 The Four Corners at School 

that he was very kind indeed. It would 
surely be most ungracious not to accept his in- 
vitation, so she confidingly went with him to 
the restaurant he had named, and feeling that 
she must do her best to entertain him she 
prattled on about her sisters and her home till 
he knew her short history and in turn told her 
that he had but lately come to New York him- 
self, that he lived in lodgings, and as yet had 
made but few friends. 

“ I am from old Maryland,” he said, “ so I feel 
quite as if we were neighbors, for you are a 
Virginian. I have a little sister at home, not 
much older than you, and I am sure she will be 
glad her big brother has such good company on 
Christmas Eve. I should like to have gone 
home for this festive occasion, but I cannot 
leave my business except for one day and that 
would hardly be long enough to warrant my 
going.” 

“ And shall you have no Christmas dinner ? ” 
asked Jean pityingly. 

“ Oh, yes, I shall go to a restaurant and eat 
turkey and plum-pudding.” 

“All alone?” 

“ Very likely. I can count this as my Christ- 
mas dinner and am not half as badly off as I 
feared I should be, for now I have a young lady 
to dine with, the first I have met in New York.” 


When Christmas Came. 109 

They had taken their seats at the table by this 
time and Mr. Kirk looked over the bill of fare. 
“ Shall we have oysters to begin with ? ” he 
asked. 

Jean agreed and they ordered their first 
course. From time to time Mr. Kirk deferred 
to her, and learned her preferences. Hers was 
rather a queerly assorted meal, but her friend 
gravely gave the order for chicken pie, batter 
cakes, no vegetables at all, bread and marma- 
lade, mince pie, ice cream and cake, and though 
Mr. Kirk urged her to try some of his spa- 
ghetti and helped her to a part of his beefsteak 
she was perfectly content with her own choice. 

They were eating their dessert when the 
waiter came with the message that some one 
had called up Mr. Kirk on the ’phone. “ Mr. 
Pinckney, very likely,” said the young man. 
“ Excuse me. Miss Jean, while I go see.” 

Jean sat contentedly munching her nuts, her 
little feet dangling from the chair, and was not 
at all abashed at being left alone. This was an 
adventure sure enough ; to be sitting here so 
comfortably eating a meal of her own selection, 
in so gay and glittering a place. What would 
Jack say when she told her? Never before had 
she been allowed such an opportunity. They 
never would let her have batter cakes instead of 
stupid vegetables, always denied her ice cream 


110 The Four Corners at School 

when she had mince pie, and scorned her fond- 
ness for red lemonade ; it was much better than 
milk or cocoa. She wished all her sisters could 
see her sitting there so grandly. It was worth 
getting left behind to have all this. She doubted 
if the others were having half so good a time. 
She looked around at the brilliant lights, the 
shining mirrors and chandeliers, and the gaily 
dressed ladies and thought she would almost as 
lief be here as in that greenroom of which she 
had begun to have suspicions. Evidently it was 
not all she had pictured, and it was well she had 
not stayed to be further disenchanted. Nan 
would be able to tell her, and what Nan could 
not Mr. Pinckney could. 

Her thoughts had traveled thus far when Mr. 
Kirk returned. “ It is all right,” he told her. 
“ I’ve had a talk with Mr. Pinckney over the 
’phone ; he was mighty glad to know you were 
safe, and wanted to come around for you, but I 
persuaded him that it was not worth while as we 
had not finished our dinner, so I am to take you 
home when we are good and ready. They will 
be there before us, as they were just about to 
start.” 

“ Were they awfully worried ? ” asked Jean in 
a subdued voice. 

“ Well, rather, at first. They waited till all 
the crowd was out before they discovered that 


When Christmas Came in 

you were not merely separated from them, then 
there was consternation. Your sister re- 
membered that you had wanted to see the fairy 
queen, and Mr. Pinckney posted around to the 
stage door to inquire if a young person in a 
white frock, gray coat and hat had passed that 
way, but the man at the door said you had not 
gone in to his certain knowledge, and at last it 
was concluded that you had tried to find your 
way home, or had become confused by the 
various exits and were ranging the streets. 
Mr. Pinckney telephoned here, there and every- 
where, put the police on your track and then 
having done all that he could, like a sensible 
man, went to dinner. When he thought you 
had had sufficient time to get home he called 
up Jennings who reported that you were safe, 
and that is the end of the story. Now how do 
you feel about it?” 

Jean hung her head. ‘‘ I feel sort of ashamed, 
I think. I am sorry I gave them so much 
trouble, but I am glad they knew before they 
had finished dinner.” 

Mr. Kirk smiled. “No doubt they ate the last 
of it with better appetites. Would you like 
some more ice cream ? ” 

Jean thoughtfully considered this. “ Fd like 
it,” she said, “ but Fm afraid I couldn’t eat it.” 

Mr. Kirk laughed. “ Then if that is the case. 


1 1 2 The Four Corners at School 

suppose we go. Should you like to walk up 
Broadway a little way and see the Christmas 
shoppers and the shop windows ? It is quite 
a sight. New York is the most brilliantly 
lighted city in the world, they say.” 

Jean would like nothing better than this, 
and there was so much that was interesting 
and entertaining to see that it was quite nine 
o’clock by the time they reached the high stoop 
of Mr. Pinckney’s house. 

As soon as the bell rang there was a scurry 
of feet in the hall. When the door opened 
three pairs of hands clutched Jean and a chorus 
of voices asked : “ Where have you been ? 

What made you slip off that way ? Oh, Jean, 
you naughty girl, you have made us so 
anxious.” 

“ I have had a lovely time,” said Jean. ‘‘ I 
didn’t mean to be gone so long but you didn’t 
wait. I am sorry you were all so worried.” 

Then Mr. Pinckney appeared. “ Ah, you 
truant,” he cried, “so you are back again, are 
you ? I shall have to appoint a keeper for you. 
This is Mr. Kirk, I am sure ? Come right in, 
sir, come right in. We are all under an ever- 
lasting debt of gratitude to you for rescuing 
this little girl from the fairies.” He gave Mr. 
Kirk a sly wink and laughed. “ My dear sir,” 
he went on, ' as Mr. Kirk protested that his 


When Christmas Came 113 

errand done he would better go, “ you mustn^t 
think of it. Come in and satisfy our curiosity. 
We are wondering how, why, and where you 
picked up our runaway. Surely you were not 
looking for the fairy queen, too.” 

Thus urged, Mr. Kirk entered and just then 
a vision of loveliness met his eyes. Miss Dolores 
in a gown of softest blue came forward, an 
anxious look in her beautiful eyes. “ Is she 
quite safe ? ” she asked. 

The young man flushed, stammered, seemed 
utterly confused when Mr. Pinckney presented 
him as ‘‘ our good knight, Mr. Kirk,” but he 
presently recovered himself, and said that he 
considered it a fortunate adventure for him as 
it had given him a delightful evening as well as 
the opportunity of meeting all these charming 
young ladies. 

While the girls were chattering excitedly by 
themselves Mr. Pinckney was finding out what 
manner of person this was who had come to 
Jean^s aid, while Miss Dolores sat quietly by 
taking in the goodly appearance of this young 
man, who, though not strictly handsome, was, 
nevertheless, a fine, manly looking young fellow 
with honest blue eyes, a firm mouth and a well 
set up figure. 

“ What did you do it for, Jean?” said Mary 
Lee. ‘‘ Pd never think it of you : if it were 


114 "The Four Corners at School 

Jack, we might have expected her to do some 
such thing.” 

“ Oh, yes, of course. Jack is always the one 
to be blamed. Til have you to know I am not 
worse than anybody else ; ” thus Jack voiced her 
grievance. 

“ Well, we surely cannot say so any more,” 
agreed Nan. “ If Jean keeps on this way she 
will become the scapegrace of the family. The 
idea of her getting away from us and going 
into strange places all by herself. I don’t see 
what possessed her. I shouldn’t have dared 
to do it. It is a wonder something dreadful 
didn’t happen to you, Jean.” 

Jean felt herself a culprit indeed. She was 
not used to being one, either, and the disap- 
proval was the more bitter. “ I won’t do it 
again,” she said meekly. 

“You’ll not get the chance,” said Nan de- 
cidedly. “ We’ll have to keep you on a leash 
like a dog after this.” 

“ Oh, Nan,” Jean protested in distress ; “ that 
would look so creer.” 

Nan laughed. “Well, it is mighty lucky 
that nice, kind young man picked you up. 
What would you have done if he hadn’t ? ” 

“ I don’t know. I’d just have waited there, 
I suppose. Wouldn’t you have come back?” 

“ Oh, yes, we did come back, and Mr. St. 


When Christmas Came 1 1 5 

Nick had a policeman on the lookout. It is a 
wonder he didn’t see you.” 

“If he had,” said Mary Lee, “ he never 
would have suspected it to be the child we 
wanted. Seeing a little girl walk out with a 
respectable young man, he never would have 
thought it was Jean.” 

“ Wasn’t any one at the stage door when you 
left, Jean ? ” Nan asked. 

“ I don’t think so. The young lady — I don’t 
know whether she was a lady or not — but any- 
how the one who showed me the way, came out 
alone and told me to go around the corner to 
the front of the theatre. I didn’t see any police- 
man at all, and there wasn’t anybody inside 
but Mr. Kirk and the man at the little window 
where they sell tickets.” 

“Well, it is Christmas Eve,” said Nan, “and 
there are the stockings to hang up and ever 
so many things to do. With all this excite- 
ment and staying up so late, nobody will want 
to get up early. You twinnies had better go 
right to bed. Go and say good-night to Mr. 
Kirk, Jean.” 

Mr. Kirk had risen to go. “ What can we do 
to show our gratitude to this gentleman ? ” said 
Mr. Pinckney as Jean came up. 

“ I’d like to put something in his stocking,” 
returned Jean. “ But I don’t know how I can do 


ii6 The Four Comers at School 


that. Oh, I know.” She pulled Mr. Pinckney’s 
head down to her own level and whispered, 
“Won’t you ask him to have dinner with us to- 
morrow ? He will have to eat his all alone if 
you don’t.” 

Mr. Pinckney nodded yes. “ Jean echoes our 
wish, Mr. Kirk,” he said. “ It would give her as 
much pleasure as the rest of us if you would 
come to dinner. Won’t you reconsider your 
decision ? ” 

“ Please come,” begged Jean, going over and 
possessing herself of the young man’s hand. 

He looked down kindly at her. “ Do you 
really want a stranger to come into this happy 
family party ? ” he said. 

“ I do,” said Jean. 

“ We all do,” echoed the others who had come 
forward. 

“ Please, Mr. Kirk, and we’ll hang up a 
stocking for you,” added Jack, “ and you can get 
it when you come.” 

So under this urging Mr. Kirk did what he 
had all along desired to do, accepted the invita- 
tion so earnestly given and went away thinking 
less of his promised stocking than of Miss 
Dolores’ lovely brown eyes and golden hair. 

The stockings, be it said, were beyond the 
children’s wildest expectations, for “ Mr. Pinck- 
ney had a hand in them instead of a foot,” Nan 


When Christmas Came 


117 


said, and had been for weeks prowling around 
the shops in search of oddities for the occasion. 
He and Nan had many conferences so that all 
the old homelike goodies appeared, besides sur- 
prises in the shape of queer little ornaments, 
curious trinkets, and funny tricks of various 
kinds. Mr. Pinckney himself so looked the 
part of Santa Claus that when he appeared in 
the hall in a fur-lined overcoat, a cap set on his 
head and a pipe in his mouth, the twins sang 
out : 

** He was dressed all in fur from his head to his foot. 
And his clothes were all tarnished with ashes and 
soot. 

He was jolly and fat, a most frolicksome elf, 

And I laughed when I saw him in spite of myself.** 

Did you ever know such impertinence. 
Nan?” said Mr. Pinckney pretending to be 
offended. 

“As if we didn^t know that you dressed up 
that way on purpose, you Mr. St. Nick,” said 
Jack. “ You know I told you that day so long 
ago when I first saw you, that you looked like 
St. Nick, and you needn’t pretend you’ve for- 
gotten.” 

He made a dive for her, and she ran laugh- 
ing into her room clutching her stocking, her 


li8 The Four Corners at School 


pink flannel kimono flapping against her pink 
worsted slippers and her curly hair tousled 
about her head. 

The next excitement after the stockings was 
the mail from home which brought each of the 
girls a remembrance from their cousins and 
their Aunt Sarah Dent. Not very handsome or 
costly gifts were these, but the girls fingered 
them gently and looked at them with eyes 
moist with tender recollections. They repre- 
sented so much. They brought back so many 
memories ; mother, friends and the old home at 
the foot of the Virginia mountains. The merry 
breakfast table chat was hushed after the mail 
brought these gifts and all four of the girls were 
very subdued for awhile. 

Later in the day came a box from California ; 
a pretty China cr^pe scarf for each of the girls 
from Mr. Pinckney’s daughter, Mrs. Roberts, 
and from Carter Barnwell, whom they had come 
to consider as a brother, were photographs and 
some odd Chinese ornaments, which they de- 
cided could be used for hat pins. Jack’s was a 
little handsomer than the others, for Jack was 
Carter’s especial crony. 

All day long gifts poured in, from one direc- 
tion and another, the last being from Southern 
Italy, where Mrs. Corner and Miss Helen were 
then staying. To each of her daughters Mrs. 


When Christmas Came 119 

Corner sent an exquisite little miniature of her- 
self ; the miniatures were set in lockets and 
were hung on slender chains, the lockets and 
chains being their Aunt Helen’s gift. Of course 
the girls had a good cry over these lifelike 
portraits, and agreed that nothing in the world 
would ever be such a treasure as these presents 
from the mother they loved so well, and missed 
so sadly. 

As Mr. Kirk would not appear till just before 
the two o’clock dinner, there was much time 
given to the preparation of a special stocking 
for him. Each girl contributed something from 
the contents of her own, while Mr. Pinckney 
added a handsome scarf pin and the stocking 
was hung by the mantel in the dining-room. 
Her friend’s coming was heralded by Jean who 
was on the watch for him and who rushed to the 
door before the dignified Jennings could open 
it. ** Merry Christmas I Merry Christmas ! ” 
Jean sang out. “ Come get your stocking, Mr. 
Kirk.” 

‘‘ Merry Christmas ! ” he returned. ” Have 
you really a stocking for me, little girl ? and has 
it been a merry time for you ? ” ^ 

** It has been perfectly lovely,” Jean told him. 
” We have had a crauntity of presents, and our 
stockings were the nicest we ever had, but, oh, 
I must show you the very best of all,” and she 


120 The Four Corners at School 


slipped the chain from her neck and laid the 
locket in his hand. “ It is my dearest mother, 
and it looks so much like her we all had to cry. 
She sent one to each of us and we haven’t 
thought of anything else since. I don’t see 
how they happened to get here just on the very 
day.” 

Mr. Kirk lifted his eyes to where Miss 
Dolores stood smiling at them, and he under- 
stood that the miniatures must have come 
earlier, but had been in Miss Dolores’ keeping 
and that she had kept them back so the last 
might be the best. 

It was a jovial dinner party, and Mr. Kirk 
proved himself worthy of it. He told a story 
well and had a good store of funny ones. But 
when they finally gathered around the open 
fire in the library, the others took up the tales 
which turned from gay to grave as the shadows 
fell, and after a while Jack stole from the room 
to follow out an idea which had come to her. 
No one missed her and it was Jennings who 
discovered her standing on the lowest step of 
the stoop, her well-filled stocking in her hand. 

“Why, Miss Jack,” he said, “what are you 
doing here ? ” 

“ I’m looking for a little beggar child to give 
my stocking to,” answered Jack. “ They were 
telling such sad stories and it made me almost 


When Christmas Came 121 

cry to think there were little girls smaller than 
Jean who hadn’t any Christmas at all, so I took 
all my goodies and put them back into my 
stocking to give away. Do you know any 
very poor little girl, Jennings?” 

Jennings thoughtfully rubbed his smooth- 
shaven chin. “ I think I could find one,” he 
replied presently. 

“ Will you go with me and look for her ? ” 

“If Mr. Pinckney doesn’t object, but it is 
pretty late now. Wouldn’t it be better to wait 
till to-morrow ? ” 

“ Oh, but to-morrow Christmas will be over, 
and the stocking wouldn’t be worth while then. 
Please go ask Mr. Pinckney if you may go with 
me.” 

“ Very well, miss, but you’d better wrap up 
warm if you are going.” 

“ I’ll go put on my new furs that Miss Dolores 
gave me. I will get ready while you speak to 
Mr. Pinckney.” And she ran up-stairs. 

After a few minutes’ whispered conference 
with Mr. Pinckney, Jennings joined Jack in the 
hall and they left the house together. They 
soon turned from the avenue and took a car 
which carried them east, and after some turn- 
ings and twistings it led them to a corner where 
Jennings helped Jack out, and told her they 
would have a short distance to walk. Jack 


122 The Four Corners as School 


found this to be a very poor neighborhood. 
Forlorn looking women passed up and down ; 
men in threadbare clothes jostled one another, 
miserable little children hurried along as if 
trying to keep warm by moving. Jennings 
passed by all these until he came to an open 
square. He looked around as if in search of 
some one. “ There,” he said after a few 
minutes, “ we’d better wait here. Miss Jack. 
He’ll be along presently.” 

Jack stood wondering who the “ he ” was and 
very soon saw a shabbily dressed old man 
shuffling up the walk toward them. He carried 
a small box under his arm. 

“ Good-evening, Mr. Klein,” said Jennings. 

A Merry Christmas to you I How is the 
little girl ? ” 

“ She iss ridt gudt,” was the reply. “ Und 
how iss yourselluf, Meester Chennings ? ” 

“ I am very well.” 

“ Dot vas a gudt tinner we hat to-day, 
Meester Chennings,” said the old man. “ Pork 
und sauer kraut und blenty of it.” 

“No turkey ? ” exclaimed Jack. 

The old man smiled down at her. “ Ve are 
nod reech beeples, liebchen,” he said. 

“ Has it been a good day with you ? ” asked 
Jennings. 

“ Veil, no. It ees nod a gudt day vor sales. 


When Christmas Came 123 

but I don gomplain, Meester Chennings, I don 
gomplain.” 

“ This young lady has something for your 
little Christine,” said Jennings, “and Kriss 
Kringle sent you this.” He slipped something 
into the old man’s hand. 

“ Is your little girl named Christine ? ” asked 
Jack. 

“ My leetle Granddaughter it ees,” said the 
old man. 

“ Did she have a stocking and a tree ? ” 

The old man looked grave as jack could see 
by the bright electric light. “ Ve dond afiort 
sooch tings, my shildt,” he said gently, “ but ve 
manache not to starve and dere vas a gudt 
tinner to-day, dank Gott.” 

“ Oh ! ” Jack felt that she would gladly know 
more. “Tell me about Christine. Is she a 
little girl like me ? ” 

“ Choost apout your aitch, I should tink, but 
did nod Meester Chennings dell you ? She iss 
lame, my leedle Christine.” 

“ Lame ? ” Jack held out the stocking. 
“Please take this to her with my love, and 
could I go to see her some day? Jennings 
will take me. Won’t you, Jennings ?” 

“ If Mr. Pinckney consents, miss.” 

“ Oh, I know he will.” Jack placed the 
stocking in the old man’s hand. 


124 The Four Corners at School 

** Dank you, liebchen, dank you a dousandt 
dimes,” he said. “ Did you zay mit your 
lofe?” 

“ Why, of course with my love and a 
merry Christmas. It is my Christmas gift to 
her.” 

Du Lieber Gott ! ” murmured the old man, 
as he strove to adjust the stocking to his better 
grasp and for the first time saw the coin Jen- 
nings had slipped into his hand. “ Oh, Meester 
Chennings, my freund, you haf madt a mis- 
dake. Take dis back, eet iss goldt.” 

“ That is what it is, Mr. Klein,” replied Jen- 
nings. “It isn’t from my pocket, though I 
wish I could afford such. It was sent to you 
good and honest. Tell him Kriss Kringle sent 
it, was the message.” 

“ Fife tollars I ” exclaimed the old man won- 
deringly. 

“ That’s right,” returned Jennings. “ Well, 
good-night, Mr. Klein. We mustn’t keep you 
standing in the cold and I must see that this 
young lady gets back. Still at the same place ? 
Oh, yes, of course. I remember my wife said 
she had been there yesterday.” 

“Yes, sir ; yes, sir ; the bork and sauer kraut, 
you know-.” 

“ Oh, never mind. Good-night, Mr. Klein.” 

“ Goot nidt, and du lieber Gott bless you 


When Christmas Came 125 

bote.” And as Jennings and Jack moved away 
they saw him standing grasping the stocking, 
his box under his arm, but his eyes fixed on the 
gold shining in his hand. 















CHAPTER VII 


LITTLE CHRISTINE 

*‘Was Mr. St. Nick the Kriss Kringle?*^ 
asked Jack as they moved away. 

Jennings smiled. “ I wasn’t to tell, miss.” 

“ I know it was ; it’s just like him. Tell me 
about little Christine and how you happened to 
know just where to come to find her grand- 
father.” 

“ I knew he passed through the square every 
evening precisely at six, and that rain or shine 
he’d be coming along as he does every day but 
Sunday.” 

What is in the box he carries ? ” 
Shoe-strings and collar buttons and such 
things. He used to be a neighbor of mine a 
couple of years ago when he had quite a good 
job in a down-town store, but he got too old, 
they said, and they turned him off though he’d 
been there for years, and since then he has done 
his best to get along as he could. He tried 
hard to get another job, but though he had the 
best of references as to character every one 
thought he was too old, so he must peddle his 


130 The Four Corners at School 

little wares and only makes barely enough for 
himself and Christine to keep body and soul to- 
gether, but he never complains. He’s had to 
move from one neighborhood to another as he 
found rent too much for him, and each time it 
has been a poorer place, till now he is away 
over here.” 

“ Oh, dear, oh, dear,” sighed Jack, “ how 
dreadful it is for him to be old and poor, too. 
Why didn’t you tell Mr. St. Nick about him 
long ago ? ” 

“Why, miss, it wasn’t my place to intrude 
such things upon his attention. He gives a 
great deal to charity as it is, and besides most 
of this happened when he was in California. 
My wife and I have done what we could, but we 
have a family to look after, and old Klein isn’t 
the only poor body in the world.” 

“ I suppose he isn’t,” said Jack, “ but it is very 
hard. I am so glad, Jennings, that you remem- 
bered him to-day, and that I thought of the 
stocking. Do you think Christine will be 
pleased ? ” 

“She will that. There is our car, miss. 
We’ll get home before supper as I hoped we 
should.” 

“ I don’t think any one will want much sup- 
per to-night,” remarked Jack, remembering her 
bountiful dinner. 


Little Christine 


131 

“ Mr. Pinckney will want the meal served 
just as usual,” said Jennings. 

Supper was on the table when they entered. 
Mr. Kirk had departed and the others were just 
about to enter the dining-room. ** Where have 
you been, Jack?” asked Mary Lee. I de- 
clare you and Jean make me fairly dizzy with 
your mysterious runnings off.” 

“ I didn’t run off,” said Jack. “ I went with 
Jennings, and Mr. St. Nick knew all about it. I 
wore my furs before you did yours, Jean.” 

“ I think that was real mean,” pouted Jean. 
“You just went out on purpose to get ahead of 
me.” 

“No, I didn’t at all. I didn’t even think of 
that. I put the furs on because Jennings told 
me to wrap up warm. I’ve had the most ex- 
citing time. I took my stocking to a poor little 
girl who hadn’t any.” 

Jean looked ready to cry. “I want to give 
mine to a poor little girl, too.” That Jack 
should receive all the glory was more than 
could be borne placidly. 

“ But you ate so much out of yours that 
you hadn’t half as much as I did, and it 
would have been funny to give a half-filled 
stocking.” 

“ Did you give everything ? All the funny, 
pretty things and the goodies, too ? ” 


132 The Four Corners at School 

“ No, not all. I left in the little doll, be- 
cause I thought she would like that, and I left 
the handkerchief and hair ribbon and oh, 
pretty near everything but the thimble and the 
soap and the gold piece in the toe. I thought 
she might be insulted by the soap.” 

“ And besides you need that more than any- 
thing else,” laughed Mary Lee, for Jack had 
frequently to be reminded of the condition of 
her hands. 

“ You didn’t take her all the rest ? ” said Jean. 

Jack nodded. She never did things by 
halves. 

“ Not the little cunning clock? ” 

Another nod. “ You have one just like it. 
Nan and Mary Lee have one apiece so who 
wants more than three clocks in two rooms ? ” 

“ Oh, but Jack, Mr. St. Nick gave us those.’* 

“ He doesn’t care. I’ll ask him if he does. 
Do you, Mr. St. Nick?” 

“ Do I what ?'” said that gentleman who had 
just come into the room. 

“ Care that I gave most of the things in my 
stocking to Christine ? ” 

He put his hand on her head. “ My dear, 
you are at liberty to do what you please with 
your very own. I think I like your generosity 
better than I do your exact appreciation of my 
individual gifts.” 


Little Christine 


133 

Jack didn’t quite take this in, but she was 
satisfied that Mr. St. Nick had no hurt feelings 
in the matter. Then since she had been out 
in the keen air, and felt also the complacency 
which follows a good deed well performed, 
she gave her attention to her supper and was 
able to do it fuller justice than any of the 
others. She told the story of Christine quite 
simply after supper, but it aroused sympathy in 
all her hearers. 

“Strange,” said Mr. Pinckney, “that such 
things can be so very near us and we be igno- 
rant of them, i have known Jennings as a 
faithful, competent servant. I knew he had a 
family, but I hardly thought of where they 
lived, or of what tragedies might be going on 
in their world. ^ I have sometimes given Jen- 
nings an extra tip or have handed over a bill 
at Christmas time telling him to bestow it where 
he thought it most needed, but I have never 
discussed individual cases with him. I wish 
now that I had done so.” 

“He seems always such a grave, wooden 
sort of man,” said Miss Dolores. “ One does 
not associate him with charitable deeds, or 
think of him as having a soft heart. Yet now 
I think of it, I have several times seen him do 
kind things.” 

“We must look after that old man,” said 


134 The Four Corners at School 

Mr. Pinckney. “ I will have a talk with Jen- 
nings to-morrow about him.” 

“ And may we go to see Christine ? ” asked 
Jack eagerly. 

Mr. Pinckney nodded consent. “ I think,” 
he added after a moment’s reflection, “ that I 
wouldn’t all go at once. As you are practically 
the discoverer, you and Jean may go the first 
time with me, and if it seems well for a second 
visit to be made your sisters and Miss Dolores 
can go with Jennings as protector. How will 
that do ? ” 

This suited exactly and this plan was carried 
out, for after the conference with Jennings Mr. 
Pinckney was quite satisfied that old Peter 
Klein was a most worthy man and that he 
deserved better than to be followed by mis- 
fortune. Indeed, after hearing all the details 
of his case Mr. Pinckney’s indignation as well 
as his sympathy was aroused, and he came 
fussing and fuming into the room where his 
granddaughter and the girls were sitting read- 
ing their Christmas books. “ It is outrageous,” 
he exclaimed. “ The idea of a man’s doing 
faithful work for one firm for all those years 
and then to be thrown out like an old shoe.” 

“Who are you speaking of, grandfather?” 
asked Miss Dolores looking up from her copy 
of Don Quixote. 


Little Christine 


135 


** Of Peter Klein,” he answered. “ From 
what Jennings says the old man has nothing 
against him but his age. Suppose fortune had 
not been kind to me, I might be in the same 
condition.” 

** Oh, dear I ” The vision of their dear Mr. 
St. Nick selling shoe-strings and collar buttons 
on the street was too much for the little girls 
and they ran to him looking so solicitous that 
he had to smile. 

“ It is not going to happen to me and it is 
not going to happen to him much longer. 
We’ll try to find him a good, fat position where 
the pay is worth while and where the work is 
not beyond his strength. I have told Jennings 
to pack a hamper and after lunch the Kid and 
Trin can go with me to see the little girl. Poor 
little thing, all day alone in a tenement. Jen- 
nings says she is a nice child, no evil ways, 
much too nice to associate with the children in 
her present neighborhood. Well, we’ll remedy 
that, too.” And he bustled out full of his scheme 
for bettering the condition of the Kleins. 

If Christmas night brought little Christine so 
great a surprise as a well-filled stocking, hold- 
ing such wonders as she had never dreamed 
of, the next day brought a still greater surprise. 
About two o’clock a carriage stopped before 
the tenement where she lived, and the urchins 


136 The Four Corners at School 

in the neighborhood saw theN spectacle of a 
portly old gentleman with two handsomely 
dressed little girls entering the doorway. They 
were followed by a man bearing a heavy basket. 
“ Old Sandy Klaws a day late/’ said one of 
the boys to another, and then they forgot the inci- 
dent in the dashing up the street of a fire en- 
gine. Up the rickety stairway Mr. Pinckney 
puffed his way to the very top of the house. 
He was so out of breath as to be speechless 
when he had mounted the last flight, and Jen- 
nings set down the heavy basket with a sigh of 
relief after the hard climb. 

The first door to the right, they had been 
told. Jennings’ knock was answered by a 
small voice which said : “ Come in.” Little 

Christine, watching a bevy of sparrows, looked 
around as her visitors entered, an expression 
of great surprise coming over her face. But she 
recognized Jennings almost at once and hobbled 
forward to meet him. “ Oh, Mr. Jennings,” she 
piped out, “ I am so glad to see you. Grand- 
fader says it was you who brought the Kriss 
Kringle stocking. What can I say for a dank 
you ? ” 

“ Nothing to me,” answered Jennings : “ it 
wasn’t my doings. It was this young lady’s,” 
and he brought Jack forward. 

“ Did you like it ? ” asked Jack. “ I do hope 


Little Christine 


>37 

you did. I thought the little doll was mighty 
sweet.” 

“ She is an angel,” said Christine. “ She is 
asleep and so I vatch the beerts till she vake oop. 
You are so goot I can’t say what I vish. I 
like kiss your hand.” 

Jack felt embarrassed and turned the subject. 
“ There is Mr. Pinckney, and that is my sister 
Jean,” she said ; “ we are twins.” 

** So ? ” Christine looked from one to the other. 
Then she*limped forward to get one of the two 
chairs which stood against the wall. “Will 
you sit down ? ” she said politely. “ I haf not 
chairs enough, for we haf company not so often 
as once.” 

Mr. Pinckney accepted the proffered chair, 
Jean and Jack occupied the other, Christine sat 
on a box by the window while Jennings re- 
mained standing. The room was neat and clean 
though sparsely furnished. It was but scantily 
heated by the winter sunshine which came in at 
the one window, and the visitors were glad to 
keep on their wraps. Mr. Pinckney was so af- 
fected by the bareness and poverty that he 
winked very hard and looked quite stem. 

“ Grandfader don’t come yet,” said Christine 
to Jennings, the one person she knew. 

“Yes,” Jennings nodded. “These friends 
came to see you. Tiny.” 


138 The Four Comers at School 

** Me ? ” the little girl look smilingly at her 
young callers. She was thin of face, fair-haired, 
scarcely pretty except for the childish innocence 
of her blue eyes and for her sweet smile. There 
was a pathetic droop to her young mouth when 
she was not smiling, an expression which told 
of suffering. She wore a faded much-patched 
frock, and over her shoulders was a small shawl. 

The little girls hardly knew how to carry on 
the conversation and Mr. Pinckney, to relieve 
the situation, bade Jennings bring in the hamper. 

“ Old St. Nick, Kriss Kringle, I should say, 
seems to have been overworked yesterday, for I 
see he didn’t get around here till to-day. There 
is a hamper outside that he must have for- 
gotten.” 

“Oh, but no,” returned Christine eagerly, 
“ he did not forget. My grandfader showed 
me a piece of gold, and he filled the stocking.” 
She nodded to Jack for confirmation of this. 
“ I hang up mine,” Christine went on, “ but it 
he does not fill, for some good reason, grand- 
fader said. Perhaps I am not so good. I cry 
when the pain comes ; I am not patient, maybe. 
So he wants to fool me at last. Perhaps he 
says, Tiny, you were a naughty child last veek, 
so you must be disappointed, but because you 
say your prayers every night and morning and 
because you beliefe in me I send you a stocking 


Little Christine 


139 


after all. He does not forget ; he only fools me 
a little.^’ She was so content with the explana- 
tion that it did not seem worth while to unde- 
ceive her. 

“ Does the pain come very often ? ” asked 
Mr. Pinckney blinking his eyes very hard. 

“ Some days ven the sun doesnH shine and I 
am all alone. It is here.” She put her hand 
upon her hip. 

Mr. Pinckney nodded to Jennings and he pro- 
ceeded to open the hamper. It was packed to 
the brim with groceries, vegetables, cold meats, 
canned goods, cake, pies, jellies, fruit. The 
table fairly groaned under the supplies as Jen- 
nings piled them up. 

Christine’s blue eyes opened wider and wider. 
“ You are sure you do not a mistake make,” she 
said. “ That is not all for us.” 

“ Every bit,” Mr. Pinckney assured her. 
“ Moreover there is some coal and wood coming. 
Don’t you think, Jennings, you’d better hurry 
those reindeers. I am afraid they are stalled 
with being overfed yesterday, or perhaps 
Comet has balked ; he has a way of doing that, 
I hear.” Jack and Jean giggled with delight. 
They simply adored Mr. Pinckney when he 
talked that way. Jennings took the hint and 
went out, returning soon with a man who 
brought a bag of coal and a bundle of wood. 


140 The Four Corners at School 

“ I thought I’d see that this came at once,” he 
said gravely. “ The rest will follow soon, Mr. 
Pinckney.” 

“ Very good, very good,” Mr. Pinckney re- 
turned. “Now kindle up a fire, Jennings, and 
when it is well started we will leave these young 
ladies a little while and come back for them later.” 

Jennings soon had a fire crackling in the little 
stove, and followed Mr. Pinckney down-stairs 
to the carriage. Just what errand was to be 
performed the children did not know, but, re- 
lieved of the presence of their elders, their 
tongues were unloosened and the three were 
soon chattering in the most friendly manner. 

Christine’s dolls were produced, the little new 
one and a rather battered specimen which had 
been her constant companion for a long time. 
“ I don’d know vat I do mitout my Gretchen,” 
she said. “She is such gudt friendt as never vas. 
She never complains nor says vords she should 
not, as the children in the street do. I do not 
like the children in the street ; they — they mock 
at me.” 

“ I think they are very cruel,” said Jack in- 
dignantly. 

Jean tried to change this unpleasant subject 
by saying, “We had lovely dolls for Christ- 
mas, and some beautiful books, too. Can you 
read, Christine?” 


Little Christine 


141 


“ A little, yes. My grandfader hears me 
sometimes. Before he has lost his job I vent to 
school, but I do not go now ; I vould not like 
it.^’ 

“ I don’t like it particularly, either,” said Jack 
frankly, “ but I have to go all the same.” 

“ Why don’t you like to go, Christine ? ” Jean 
asked. 

Christine hung her head. “ I haf not varm 
clothes and shoes,” she said in a low voice ; 
then brightly : “ But maybe when the spring 
come I shall go. It is noding not to go in the 
vinter. Are you too varm here ? ” for the 
stove was sending out such heat as it had not 
given that year. 

“ It is a little warm,” said Jack ; “ I’ll take off 
my coat, and you take off yours, Jean.” 

But just here Mr. Pinckney returned to carry 
them away. He had evidently settled some 
things to his satisfaction, for he was in high 
good humor. “ It is getting colder,” he said. 
‘‘You must keep up a good fire, Christine. 
There is plenty more coal where this came 
from. Get up a nice supper for your grand- 
father and give him this ; ” he handed a sealed 
envelope to the child. Then he turned to the 
twins. “ I find I did Comet an injustice,” he 
told them ; “ it wasn’t his fault at all. The 
whole team got stuck in an unusually deep 


142 The Four Corners at School 

snowdrift when they first started out, and they 
floundered about such a time that it made them 
late getting around to everybody. Good-bye, 
Christine. Don’t forget to keep up the fire and 
if you feel like nibbling at some of those cakes, 
old Kriss won’t care.” 

“ Good-bye, Christine,” chimed in the little 
girls. “We’ll come to see you again.” 

“ And you must come to see us,” called back 
Jack, remembering that under all circumstances 
this was the proper thing to say. 

But outside the door Jean remonstrated. 
“You oughtn’t to have said that, ought she, 
Mr. St. Nick?” 

“Why not?” he asked, feeling his way down 
the dim stairway. 

“ Because she can’t go anywhere when she 
hasn’t any warm clothes and 1 don’t suppose 
she has any car fare either.” 

“ Bless me ! ” exclaimed Mr. Pinckney. 
“ This place will be the death of me yet.” 
He did not answer Jean’s question till they 
had reached the carriage and even then not 
till they had driven some distance. “ Would 
you like to have her come to see you?” he 
asked. 

“ We’d love it,” they said in unison. “ We 
don’t know any little girls in New York,” said 
Jack, and I think it would be nice to have her 


Little Christine 


H3 

see our Christmas gifts. I’d let her play with 
my new doll.” 

” So would I let her play with mine,” echoed 
Jean. 

“Well, then, it must be arranged. We’ll 
turn it all over to Miss Dolores and your sisters, 
and I think we can arrange it. She isn’t as big 
as either of you, is she ? ” 

“ She is two months older,” Jack told him, 
“ but she is very little. She only comes up to 
Jean’s ear and Jean isn’t quite as tall as I am.” 

“ Then there’ll be no trouble about it,” re- 
peated Mr. Pinckney. 

The upshot of it was that Nan and Miss 
Dolores were called in consultation. For some 
reason Mary Lee didn’t favor the idea. “Why 
do you want to mix up with po’ whites?” she 
asked Nan. 

“She is as good as Daniella,” exclaimed 
Jack indignantly, “ and we mix up with her.” 
Mary Lee was obliged to back down from her 
position. “Oh, well, she may be,” she said, 
“ but it is different with Daniella. She really 
belongs to a good family, she is from our state, 
and besides ” 

“ Besides nothing,” put in Nan gruffly. 
“ Don’t be a snob, Mary Lee. I don’t see what 
right you have to object, anyhow. It isn’t your 
house, and if Mr. Pinckney invites her you’ve 


144 The Four Corners at School 

nothing to do with it. If she had been a lame 
monkey or a rat even you would have been all 
up for it.” 

Thus rebuked Mary Lee took refuge in an 
injured silence, though to tell the truth, she was 
ashamed of her objections and felt that what 
Nan said was very true ; if Christine had been 
a lame beast of any sort, Mary Lee would have 
left nothing undone in order to better her con- 
dition, moreover it was only because she was 
a little jealous of Miss Dolores’ interest that she 
took this attitude. 

“ Now, Miss Zeph,” said Mr. Pinckney when 
he had called her to the conference, “ what is 
your imagination doing with this situation ? 
Suppose you get up some noble scheme for the 
bettering of the old man and his little grand- 
daughter. First ril tell you what I have al- 
ready done and then you can fill in the chinks.” 
Zeph was Mr. Pinckney’s nickname for Nan 
as Prisms was Mary Lee’s and the Trin was 
Jean’s. Jack was always the Kid. “ I have 
secured a fairly good position for Mr. Klein. I 
find that he speaks very good German, being a 
native of Hanover, so I have found a place for 
him in a German club house where the work 
will not be too hard. We have supplied the 
pressing needs for the present, but we must get 
them into more comfortable quarters and the 


Little Christine 


145 


child must see a doctor. I have written to my 
old friend Deford who is an authority upon such 
cases, and he will look after her. It is probable 
that she will have to go to a hospital for a 
while, but in the meantime she must have a 
confortable home. Now fill in your details.^' 

“Then,” said Nan, “I say we get Jennings 
to hunt up a nice respectable flat in his neigh- 
borhood. We will all cheerfully chip in with our 
Christmas money to add a little more furniture.” 

“ Hold on, that is my affair.” 

“ Oh, is it ? All right. Then we’ll get some 
nice warm clothing for Christine and have her 
come here to spend the day with the twins. 
That day Miss Dolores, Jennings, you and I 
will go get the place settled and when Christine 
goes home she will be taken there. Her 
grandfather will meet her at their new home. 
There will be a nice supper smoking on the 
table. We will disappear to leave them to en- 
joy it alone. The carriage that brings Christine 
can take us back. If Jennings could only find 
a flat in the same house that his is in it would 
be fine, for then the Jennings family could have 
an eye to Christine and she wouldn’t be so 
lonely. If she gets well or even better, she can 
go to some little church kindergarten or some- 
thing, I don’t know just what they have here in 
New York.” 


146 The Four Corners at School 

“Couldn’t have arranged it better myself,” 
said Mr. Pinckney rubbing his hands. 

“And do you really mean to carry it all 
out ? ” asked Nan joyously. 

“ Indeed I do.” 

“ Good ! It is just like a story book. I 
never expected to take part in anything so de- 
lightful.” 

“ I am glad you are so enthusiastic, my dear 
child. What do you think of it, Dolores?” 
Mr. Pinckney asked his granddaughter. 

“ I say it is a beautiful plan, and I am glad 
to help carry it out. I think, grandfather, that 
your good friend, Dr. Deford can perhaps tell 
of some school which would be proper for our 
little friend. If not we will look up one our- 
selves. Ah, what pleasure to have the means 
to do such good things.” 

“ And to have the good heart that makes one 
want to do it,” said Nan, rubbing her cheek 
affectionately against Mr. Pinckney’s shoulder. 

He patted her hand kindly. “ Always some 
nice thing to say. Nan. I own to having been 
rather self-centred most of my life, my dear. I 
haven’t been ungenerous, I hope, for I have 
given to large charities, but I have never had 
individual cases brought home to me as you 
Corners have brought them, and I think here- 
after I shall look around in different directions. 


Little Christine 


H7 


I shall take more pains to find out where money 
can do the most good, and I must thank you 
Corners for showing we what pleasure can be 
had in attending to things one’s self. In fact, 
my obligations to you keep piling up. I shall 
never get square with you, I am afraid.” 

“ Don’t mention obligations, Mr. St. Nick,” 
cried Nan. ‘‘You never stop doing things for 
us.” 

“ And I never shall, my dear. Now, let us 
call in the others and tell them our plans.” 






CHAPTER VIII 


A WELL-LAID SCHEME 

Probably no member of the household was 
more interested in carrying out the plan to help 
the Kleins than was Jennings. As he had 
fathered the original scheme of giving Christine 
the Christmas stocking, so he felt responsible 
for the things that followed, and indeed, his 
entire family swelled with pride at being asked 
to help. In consequence a small four-room flat 
was found in the same house as that in which 
the Jennings lived, and Mrs. Jennings cheerfully 
offered to clean it thoroughly. It was the 
greatest of the Corners’ holiday pleasures to go 
shopping for the furnishings, although it was 
not without some arguing that old Peter Klein 
was persuaded to accept all that was intended 
for him. He had a sturdy pride which refused 
unnecessary assistance, but at the children’s ap- 
peal and at their insisting that it was all for 
Christine, he yielded so far as to consent to 
their plans in the matter of furnishings, but he 
declared that he must assume the rent himself. 
Mr. Pinckney must not place him under that 


152 The Four Corners at School 

obligation, for now that he was making good 
wages he could pay his own way, though he 
appreciated the offered aid. In vain Mr. Pinck- 
ney said, “ But my dear man, I shall not miss 
it. If the Lord has favored me, who am not so 
deserving as you, why will you not allow me to 
share with you ? ” 

“ I am not a socialist, not an anarchist, Mr. 
Binckney,” Peter returned. “ I dank you and 
I bless you on my knees for what you haf 
alretty done, but I am happier to earn my own 
vay.” And so this much had to be yielded. 

The children, however, had their way about 
providing an outfit for Christine and to this end 
went each gold piece that had been found in 
the stockings. Miss Dolores, too, added her 
share, and one day the little girls were made 
happy by the arrival of Christine in state. She 
wore a pretty brown frock coat and hat. Her 
fair hair was tied back by a splashing bow, 
arranged by Nan’s fingers, dextrous from tying 
many such for the twins. And when they had 
sent off Christine thus arrayed, half afraid, 
wholly awed by being the sole occupant of the 
big carriage. Nan, Miss Dolores and Jennings 
took possession of the dingy little attic room, 
packed up and cleared out all the Kleins’ be- 
longings which were quickly removed to the 
new flat. Here the three met Mr. Pinckney 


A Well-Laid Scheme 


153 


who was in his element. Mr. Klein had agreed 
to keep the removal a secret from his little 
granddaughter, and the good old man was 
looking forward to her surprise and pleasure 
with more keenness than any one. 

“ It does look so nice,” said Nan standing in 
the middle of the room and looking around. 
“ It seems almost a pity to put the old trash in 
here.” 

“ But no doubt it has associations,” said Mr. 
Pinckney, as Jennings set up a table here, 
placed an old chest there or hung a tiny mirror 
on the wall. 

“ Mrs. Jennings and her girls have made 
the place spotless,” said Nan. ‘‘ I am so glad 
they are near by. Mrs. Jennings says she will 
have the supper all ready by six, when Mr. 
Klein gets home. What a nice bright little 
kitchen it is, isn’t it, and even the bedrooms 
get a little sun. I do hope Christine will be 
happy here. Let us set her old doll on her 
bed so it will seem homelike to her. I am 
glad you thought of getting Anderson’s Fairy 
Tales, Mr. St. Nick, for now her little row of 
books is quite complete. They look very ap- 
petizing, I mean to the mind. What are you 
doing, Miss Dolores?” 

“ Setting some little plants in this south win- 
dow. Christine will like to watch them grow.” 


154 The Four Corners at School 

‘‘I am sure she will. What in the world 
have you there, Mr. St. Nick ? ” 

“ Wait a minute and I will show you. Have 
you that hook up good and strong, Jennings?” 

‘‘Yes, sir, I think so,” returned Jennings 
as he stood waiting Mr. Pinckney’s further 
orders. 

“ I hear something moving,” said Nan ex- 
citedly as she watched Mr. Pinckney unwrap 
something he was carrying. “ Oh, Mr. St. 
Nick,” she cried, “ it is a canary bird. Who 
thought of that ? ” 

“ I must confess to being the one,” he re- 
plied well pleased at her appreciation. 

“ Isn’t it a dear ? ” said Nan, chirruping to 
the little songster in its new gilt cage. “I 
think you were a perfect darling to get it.” 

“ I doubted at first whether Christine would 
be able to take care of it, but I consulted her 
grandfather and he seemed delighted at the 
idea, so I felt the little fellow would not suffer 
from neglect. I think I have picked out a good 
singer.” 

“ He will be a rival for my little surprise,” 
said Miss Dolores taking a small music-box 
from her bag. 

“Why no, I don’t think he will be,” said 
Nan. “ He will simply sing to the accompani- 
ment of the music-box. It will inspire him, I 


A Well-Laid Scheme 155 

am sure. That was a bright idea, too, Miss 
Dolores. Isn’t it nice, Jennings ? ” 

“ It is a fine little home,” ventured Jennings. 
“I’d ask no better myself.” 

“You think there is enough for comfort?” 
said Mr. Pinckney. “ Do you think we could 
have added some things ? ” 

“No, sir, excuse me, but I think any more 
would only be a care. There is more than 
enough for comfort and it is all fresh and new. 
Of course it seems very plain after your home, 
Mr. Pinckney, but they are not used to such 
as that, nor to as much as this, for that matter.” 

“ Very true, it is all according to what stand- 
ards we have, I see. Well, young ladies, are 
you satisfied ? Isn’t it about time for the pro- 
prietors of this palatial residence to arrive ? ” 

“ It is just six, sir,” said Jennings. “ I will go 
down and see if they are coming.” 

Meanwhile the twins were entertaining 
Christine in fine style. At first their visitor 
was very shy in this grand house, but when 
the dolls were brought out, and when Mary 
Lee having set aside her top-loftiness, consented 
to read a fascinating fairy story to the three, 
the ice was broken and the day passed happily 
enough. The carriage was ready betimes, and 
Christine’s first surprise was when it stopped 
at the club house to pick up her grandfather. 


156 The Four Corners at School 

This had been Miss Dolores’ suggestion and 
was considered a good one. Christine was so 
occupied in telling her grandfather about her 
day’s delights that she did not notice where 
they were till the carriage stopped and he 
lifted her out. “ Why, this is where Mr. Jen- 
nings lives,” she said. 

“ Yes,” said her grandfather, “ we are going 
to have supper here.” 

“ Oh, how gudt ! ” Christine had always 
been fond of the Jennings. She was puzzled, 
however, when her grandfather stopped at 
another door than theirs, and when Mr. Pinck- 
ney opened it she looked at him amazed. 
“We are in the wrong place, grandfader,” she 
said. 

“ No, you are not.” said Mr. Pinckney. 
“Come in. Tell her about it, Mr. Klein, for 
we must be going, as the carriage is waiting 
and these young ladies of mine will be wanting 
their dinners.” 

“Good-bye, Christine,” said Miss Dolores, 
following her grandfather. 

“ Good-bye, little Christine,” said Nan who 
lingered till the last. “ I hope you will like it 
as much as I do.” 

Then the door closed after them all and 
Christine was left alone with her grandfather. 
“What does it mean, grandfader ? ” she asked. 


A Well-Laid Scheme 157 

“ It means, liebchen, that Kriss Kringle has 
sent us friends and that the lieber Gott has not 
forgotten us/^ 

“ Did you think He had, grandfader ? ” 

‘‘ Sometimes I did, but I vass wrong, vicket 
and wrong. Come now and let us eat our 
supper that the so gudt Mrs. Chennings has made 
hot for us. After we look at all our friends 
have done. So ? 

But for two reasons Christine could eat but 
little. In the first place she had been served 
with more good things that day than it had 
ever been her lot to see, and in the second place 
she was so full of wondering excitement that 
food was a very unimportant matter. She sat 
gazing silently around the room while her 
grandfather enjoyed both the meal and the tell- 
ing of how this all happened. 

At last there came a time when he had 
finished eating and then the two made a com- 
plete survey of their new premises, the very 
last thing that Christine observed being the 
soft downy ball with head under wing, in the 
cage hanging above the flowering plants. 

A beert I ” exclaimed the little girl in awe- 
struck tones. “ Is it alive ? 

For answer her grandfather tapped on the 
gilded wires and whistled softly till a yellow 
head appeared and two bright eyes looked 


158 The Four Comers at School 

around as if to inquire why this interruption of 
sleep. 

“ It is alive ! ” Christine’s delight was almost 
too much for words, though nothing would do 
but her grandfather must lift down the cage that 
she might have a closer view of this dearest of 
birds. She hardly dared hope he would sing, 
but it was quite enough to possess such a 
treasure, though he might only chirp. Her 
complete joy came later when she and her 
grandfather were clearing away the supper 
things, and the clatter of the dishes started up 
first a low trill, then a fuller, sweeter song from 
the bird in the next room. 

“ He does sing I Oh, grandfader, listen ! 
Christine almost dropped the cup she was 
washing. 

“ Oh, yes, he is a canariken beert,” returned 
the old man. “ He vill sing much and keep you 
gudt gompany, but it is time my little beert was 
in bedt. No more vurk to-night.” 

“ Oh, will it really all be here in the morn- 
ing ? ” said Christine feeling that in some way 
this lovely dream would depart with her awak- 
ing. 

Her grandfather smiled and nodded. “ The 
feerst ting you hear in de morning is de canari- 
ken beert ; he vake us oop airly.” 

“ What shall I call him, grandfader ? ” came 


A Well-Laid Scheme 159 

from Christine’s room some time after she had 
gone to bed. 

“Avake yet, already?” Her grandfather 
came to her door. 

“ Maybe I call him after you.” 

“Ach, no. I am not a zinger. Give him 
the name of our gudt freund, Nicholas Pinck- 
ney.” 

” Is he a gudt zinger ? ” 

” I dondt know dat yet eider, but he is a gudt 
man and dis is a gudt beert.” 

ril call him Nick then, for Jack and Jean 
call Mr. Pinckney St. Nick, and he is a Kriss 
Kringle, the same as St. Nick, for he has given 
us more than Kriss Kringle ever did.” 

‘‘ Sh, sh I You must not say so of the good 
Kriss. St. Nick we will have it, to remind us of 
our so gudt freund.” 

Therefore Nick it was, and Christine went to 
sleep the happiest little girl in all New York. 

The holidays passed all too quickly for the 
Corners ; they were marred by only one thing 
and that was a feverish attack which overcame 
Jean for two or three days and which was due 
to too many Christmas good things. It may 
be that her dinner on Christmas Eve prepared 
the way for her illness, but she soon recovered 
under the doctor’s treatment. She rather en- 
joyed being an invalid, receiving Miss Dolores’ 


i6o The Four Corners at School 

special attentions and Mr. Pinckney’s solicitous 
visits. She even hoped she might not be quite 
well enough to return to school with her sisters, 
but when she saw them packing up she said 
very decidedly : “I am so glad I feel crite 
well again.” 

“ Then you don’t want us to leave you here ? ” 
said Nan from behind the lid of her trunk. 

** Oh, no.” 

“ But you thought yesterday that you might 
like to stay,” said Miss Dolores. “ Are we not 
to have one little girl ? ” 

“You can have Christine,” said Jean com- 
fortingly. 

“Isn’t it queer?” said Mary Lee. “Two 
years ago we discovered Daniella and this year 
we have Christine.” 

“ And last year you discovered me,” said Miss 
Dolores in a low voice. “ I can never forget 
that, dear Mary Lee.” 

“ I think,” said Nan, still behind the trunk lid, 
“that it would be a good plan if we could make 
up our minds to discover some one every Christ- 
mas, some one who was lonely or was poor or 
who hadn’t any one to make Christmas for him 
or her.” 

“ Like Mr. Kirk,” put in Jean. 

“ Oh, we’ll have him every year,” said Jack, 
and wondered why Miss Dolores got up so sud- 


A Well-Laid Scheme i6i 

denly that she dropped all her work on the 
floor. 

“ We can’t have him every year,” said Jean, 
“ for he lives here and we aren’t going to spend 
our Christmases in New York forever.” 

“ Where are we going to spend them, then ? ” 

“ Why, at home, of course.” And this 
brought them to a talk of home, of Aunt Sarah 
and the boys, of Unc’ Landy, Mitty, Lady 
Grey and Trouble. They wondered if the red 
rooster with the frost-bitten toes were still alive, 
if Lady Grey and her kittens were permitted to 
stay in the house, if Trouble still followed Unc’ 
Landy everywhere. If Unc’ Landy ’s “ rheu- 
matiz ” were troubling him and if Aunt Sarah 
were alone during the holidays. 

“ Of course she can go over to Cousin Mag’s 
whenever she wants to, and I know Polly and 
Phil will go to see her every day,” said Mary 
Lee. “ Oh, dear, it certainly was mighty nice 
at home on Christmas. I reckon po’ old Unc’ 
Landy misses us terribly.” 

‘‘ Aunt Sarah said he wasn’t well when she 
last wrote,” remarked Nan, “ and that he said 
he would go mo’nin’ all his days till we came 
back.” 

“Could we have gone home if we hadn’t 
come here?” asked Mary Lee thoughtfully. 

“ I don’t know ; I suppose we could, but Mr. 


i 62 The Four Corners at School 


St. Nick would have been so disappointed and 
he certainly has been mighty good and kind to 
us. We surely have had a good time, but a 
different kind of one from that we’d had at 
home.” 

“ But if we had gone home we never would 
have known about Christine,” said Jack, “ so 
I’m glad we came here instead.” 

“Yes, it was better, considering all things,” 
said Nan rising from her knees and shutting the 
lid of her trunk. “ We should have missed 
mother more, and Aunt Helen, too, and it 
would have been sort of forlorn. Are you sure 
you’ve brought me everything. Jack? Go look 
again in all the drawers. You go, too, Jean, 
and then there’ll not be anything overlooked.” 

Owing to Jean’s more particular search, sev- 
eral articles were discovered, all of them Jack’s, 
and these were crowded into the trunk which 
was then pronounced ready, and the next 
morning saw the departure of the four Corners 
from New York. 

“ I wish we didn’t have to take this journey 
alone,” sighed Mary Lee, as they settled them- 
selves in the car. “ It is always so nice to have 
a man with you.” 

“ Oh, but there will be no trouble,” Nan 
answered, “ our trunks are checked all the way 
through, and we don’t have to change cars till 


A Well-Laid Scheme 163 

we get to Boston. Tve been in and out so often 
now that it doesn’t bother me a bit.” 

“ It bothers me,” returned Mary Lee, “ and I 
wish we girls were not going alone.” 

“You’re not going quite alone, if 1 will do 
for an escort,” said a voice behind her. 

Mary Lee started and looked around to see 
Mr. Kirk. “ Oh,” she exclaimed, “ you scared 
me. Are you going to Boston, Mr. Kirk ? ” 

“ Yes, it so happens that I must go on a 
business trip. I chanced to meet Mr. Pinckney 
just now, and he charged me to look out for 
you. Let me get those bags and umbrellas 
out of the way.” He deftly stowed away their 
belongings in the rack overhead and saw to 
it that the twins were provided with illustrated 
papers. At first he devoted himself to his 
first acquaintance, Jean, but after a while it 
seemed that he found Mary Lee the most agree- 
able companion, and if one had listened the 
reason would not have been hard to find, for 
Mary Lee never followed a more interesting 
topic of conversation, than her adorable Miss 
Dolores. 

It added much to the dignity of the party, 
Mary Lee thought, to have a man with them 
when they went to the dining-car, though Nan 
would have preferred to show her independence 
by doing without him. The journey, after all. 


164 The Four Corners at School 

did not seem long, not long enough, com- 
plained Jack, whose love for school was never 
very fervent. 

“ Do we have to go right out to the Wads- 
worth school ? ” she asked. 

“ I think perhaps we’d better,” replied Nan. 

“ Why not stay till a later train ? ” suggested 
Mr. Kirk. “ Then we could see a little of the 
city together. I have a business engagement 
to-night at eight-thirty, but until then I am 
entirely at your service.” 

“Oh, do let’s stay. Nan,” begged Jack. 

“ Is there any special need of your getting 
back early ? ” asked Mr. Kirk. 

“ No,” returned Nan hesitatingly, “ as long as 
we are there some time this evening so as to 
begin school to-morrow morning, it will be all 
right. We took a morning train so as to get 
in before dark, but ” 

“ Will they be expecting you by some special 
train ? ” 

“ Oh, no, I didn’t say what train when I 
wrote. I only said we would be back to-day.” 

“ Then why not finish up the afternoon ? 
What do you say. Miss Mary Lee ? ” 

“ I’d love to stay.” 

“So would I,” chimed in Jean. 

“ And I,” echoed Jack. 

“ The majority has it. Miss Nan. I guaran- 


A Well-Laid Scheme 165 

tee to see you safely on your train. Is the 
school far from the station ? ** 

“Not very. We always take the ’bus any- 
how.” 

“ Then let us consider it settled. You have 
been to the library of course and to the Art 
Museum.” 

“ Yes, and to Old South Meeting House and 
to King’s Chapel, and the Granary burying- 
ground,” put in Mary Lee. 

“ I know what I want to see,” chirped Jean ; 
“ I want to see the church steeple where they 
hung the lantern for Paul Revere’ s ride. The 
church is way down in a funny part of town 
and Aunt Helen said we mustn’t go there by 
ourselves. We didn’t have any man with us 
then and we didn’t have time anyhow, for we 
were in Boston only a day with mother and 
Aunt Helen.” 

“ That is the very place to go,” agreed Mr. 
Kirk. “ I have always meant to see old Christ 
church myself. We will start right away. 
First let me look up your trains and see how 
much time we can give ourselves.” He left 
them for a moment and was soon back with a 
time-table. Running his finger down the line 
he read : “ Six, six-thirty, six forty-five, seven ; 

they run pretty often. Would seven be too late 
for you ? Then we could have a bite to eat at 


i66 The Four Corners at School 


six, make our train and I can get back in time 
for my engagement, for I see there is a train 
back at seven twenty-five, five minutes after 
your train arrives.” 

“ Oh, but you are not going all the way out 
with us,” expostulated Nan. 

“ If you will allow me, though I am afraid I 
cannot see you to your very door.” 

“ That will not matter in the least when there 
are four of us,” Nan told him, “ but it seems too 
bad to take you so far.” 

“Not a bit of it, and I am sure it will be a 
satisfaction to Mr. Pinckney if I can tell him I 
saw you safely to the end of your journey.” 

After this, there was nothing further to say, 
so they started on their pilgrimage to the old 
North church well pleased to have this little in- 
terruption to their original plan. 

The route took them through a queer foreign 
neighborhood, where Polish Jews and Russian 
refugees jostled them on the narrow sidewalks, 
and made them glad of their stalwart escort. 
There was not much to see, after all, when they 
arrived, but it was a satisfaction to have visited 
the spot and to see on their way back old 
Faneuil Hall, and the Province House, made 
famous by Hawthorne’s Tales. Mr. Kirk was a 
good guide, and Nan felt that she knew old 
Boston better than the new one by the time they 


A Well-Laid Scheme 167 

had reached the modest hotel where they were 
to take supper. 

This came at the end of their Christmas frolic, 
for an hour later they parted from Mr. Kirk at 
the railway station of their town and were on 
their way back to school. 

“ Now for old Blue China, lessons and hard 
work,” said Mary Lee. “I’ll be glad to see the 
girls, but I am sorry our fun is all over. Isn’t 
Mr. Kirk a dear ? Do you know, Nan, I think 
he is almost good enough for Miss Dolores and 
I know he likes her.” 

“ Nonsense,” said Nan. “ Of course he had 
to be polite and talk about what pleased you, 
and you never want to talk about anything but 
Miss Dolores.” But here the omnibus stopped 
at the gate, and the next thing they heard was 
the rustle of Mrs. Channing’s black silk skirts 
and the chatter of the parrot in the sitting-room. 


CHAPTER IX 
BACK 1 0 SCHOOL 









CHAPTER IX 


BACK TO SCHOOL 

After all it was not unpleasant to get back, 
to meet all the girls again, to display Christmas 
gifts and to interchange holiday experiences. 
It was almost like having a second Christmas, 
Jack said, for several belated packages had ar- 
rived while they were away, and it was excit- 
ing to open these, small though the tokens were. 

“ It doesn^t take long to settle down, does 
it? said Nan as she and Charlotte were having 
a confidential chat. '‘Any new frocks, Char- 
lotte ? 

“Yes, three. I had to have something for 
Nellie Tufts’ party, and so I have that, and a 
new school suit, then mamma thought while we 
were about it I might as well get some sort of 
light thing for occasions when the party frock 
would be too dressy.” 

“ And what did you get ? ” 

“ A white wool. I brought it with me for 
Ethel Stearns’ luncheon. What did you get ? ” 

“ We all have new Peter Thompson’s, white 
ones, and I have a dark blue wool for school. 
I wish I had a new party frock for Blanche 


172 The Four Corners at School 

Clark’s affair, but I reckon my white China 
silk, or my pink frock will do, although I have 
worn them pretty often. Mother didn’t expect 
us to be so gay, and besides she doesn’t approve 
of our having new frocks, unless our others are 
really shabby.” 

“ Your pink frock is lovely, and so becoming. 
Ellen Willson says Daniella has such odd things, 
very handsome materials, but more suitable for 
a grown person than for a little girl.” 

‘‘ That’s the truth,” responded Nan. “ Her 
uncle seemed to think that silks and satins 
would be all right, and the more expensive the 
better. The poor dear had no one to choose for 
her, but I notice she never wears anything but 
her plainest things, and keeps the other for high 
days and holidays. Come, Charlotte, I want to 
see that white frock.” 

Charlotte led the way to her room which was 
in the state of wild disorder, that generally in- 
dicated the late presence of Josephine. Life was 
so very full for Jo. She was always in a hurry 
and never had time to give to such unimportant 
matters as the shutting of a closest door or the 
closing entirely of a bureau drawer. 

I do wish Jo would be more particular,” 
sighed Charlotte as she poked a skirt back into 
the clothes-press and thrust a hanging ribbon 
into Jo’s top drawer. “ She is the dearest thing 


Back to School 


173 


in the world and is as neat as a pin when it 
comes to her person, but she is so disorderly. 
There isn't anything she wouldn't do for me. 
She gives me the lion's share of everything in 
the way of space, but she never seems to see fly- 
ing ends and dusty spots. Look at her writing- 
desk, isn't it in a clutter ? " 

Indeed Jo's desk was piled up with a medley 
of things, books, papers, stockings, work- 
basket, empty candy boxes and partly filled 
ones, apple cores, banana peelings, photographs. 
Nan smiled. “ It reminds me of Jack's," she 
said. I used to be something that way my- 
self, but I am trying to do better, and with 
Jack's example before me I am learning to 
despise getting things in such a mess. I have 
to keep her up to the mark and it doesn't do for 
me to fall short or I'll hear from her." 

‘‘ How you do love that little sister of yours," 
said Charlotte, “ and yet she isn't half so good 
a child as Jean." 

“That's why, I suppose," said Nan. “Jean 
hardly ever gets into scrapes ; Jack is always 
doing it. I have spent my life in getting her 
out of them. There is lots in Jack and she 
does love her old Nan." 

“She ought to," returned Charlotte, going 
to the clothes-press to get her new frock. This 
being duly admired the talk turned again to 


174 The Four Corners at School 

Daniella whose visit to Ellen Willson had done 
wonders for her. 

“ She hasn’t been nearly so dependent upon 
us, since we came back,” Nan remarked, “ so I 
reckon after all it was a good thing she didn’t 
go to New York.” 

“ 1 am thankful enough she is more friendly 
with the other girls,” returned Charlotte, “ for 
I never could have you a minute to myself. 
Nan, you must go home with me on Friday, so 
I can show you my Christmas gifts. I have 
such a lovely new rug for my room, too.” 

“ I don’t know about this week,” replied 
Nan doubtfully. ‘‘ I’ve just been away, you 
see, and Miss Barnes might object to my flying 
off so soon again.” 

“ Well, you can lunch with me on Saturday, 
anyhow, even if you do have to come back the 
same evening.” 

Nan agreed to this, and here they were inter- 
rupted by Jo’s bursting into the room followed 
by Abby Russell and Daniella. The first two 
girls were half laughing, half angry ; Daniella, 
however, was not in fun. “ Hide us, hide 
us!” cried Jo. “She has her spurs on and 
her shooting-irons all ready. I’m scared to 
death of her.” 

“How you do talk, Jo,” said Charlotte. 
“ What is this all about ? ” 


Back to School 


175 


Josephine was making a bulwark of Nan 
while Abby entrenched herself behind Charlotte. 
Daniella stood still, her eyes fiercely glowing. 

“ She is such a fire-eater,” said Abby. “ We 
were just teasing her. Nan, and she got mad 
and went for us like a wildcat.” 

“ You mustn’t be so fierce, Daniella,” said 
Nan laughing. 

“ They were making fun of us Virginians,” 
explained Daniella. 

“Well, bless you, honey, suppose they did; 
it’s easy enough to retaliate. I am surprised 
that Jo wasn’t on your side ; she always is. 
We know these Yankees think they made the 
United States and all that therein is, and that 
they fought the Revolution all by themselves. 
They make fun of us because we don’t always 
use the broad a and because we sometimes 
drop our h’s while they do exactly the same 
thing.” 

“ Oh, we don’t,” Abby began to protest. 

“ You don’t say staas and Haavaad and 
caas, I suppose,” retorted Nan. “ What do 
you call that but a flat ‘ a ’ and the dropping 
of you r’s, too, I don’t see why one isn’t as bad 
as the other. As for the rest we were here 
before your old Mayflower ever saw Plymouth 
Rock, and we began the Revolution before you 
ever thought of it, and we finished it, too.” 


176 The Four Corners at School 

“ Oh, Nan, that isn’t so,” Charlotte chimed 
in. 

“Yes, it is.” Nan had her historical facts 
settled beyond question. “ They overthrew the 
tea and burned the Peggy Stewart at Annap- 
olis before you Bostonians had your Indian 
masquerade and we had our Bacon’s Rebellion 
and the Mecklenburg declaration of independ- 
ence while you were thinking about getting 
up your mad. You can’t down us. We gave 
you Washington and Jefferson and the whole 
lot. No, sir, you can’t crow over us. ’Rah for 
old Virginia I” 

“ Good for you, Nan,” cried Jo. “ Nan is 
getting herself worked up to the occasion. 
Next thing she’ll be burning Abby’s copy of 
Uncle Tom’s Cabin and tearing up Frank’s 
ancestral chart. Come down from your lofty 
perch. Nan.” Jo saved the situation, for all 
were getting a little too excited, and as it had 
been agreed that sectional disputes were to be 
avoided, since they created hard feeling and 
could do no good, Nan subsided. Once when 
the subject of the Civil War had been brought 
up and Nan had distinguished herself by re- 
lating tales of horror attending Sherman’s 
march to the sea the situation grew so intense 
that there was nearly a pitched battle between 
the girls. Then and there a solemn compact 


Back to School 


177 


was made to preserve peace and never to rake 
up old feuds. This time it was really Jo’s fault. 
She delighted in ** taking a rise out of Daniella” 
as she called it, and had gone a little too far 
in her fun. She was honest enough to confess 
her error. 

“ It was all my doing,” she said. “ Let’s 
stop right here. I had no business to keep it 
up so long, Daniella. I love old Virginia my- 
self, and think she is the greatest state in the 
Union. That’s all right, Abby, I’m in earnest. 
Now we’re going to talk of something else. 
Have you all heard the latest ? ” 

No. What is it ? ” All the girls were 
eager to know what Jo had in store. 

** Miss Wheeler has a beau.” 

‘‘No! Really? Don’t believe it,” came 
from one direction and another. 

“ Yes, honest. I saw him coming home from 
church with her last Sunday.” 

“ That old thing ? Why, she must be nearly 
thirty,” said Nan scornfully. 

“ Oh, no, Nan, not quite,” said Charlotte, 
bound to be exact, “ but of course she is quite 
old for such things and it would be very silly 
of her. I guess Jo is mistaken.” 

“ Indeed I’m not.” 

“Oh, well, it just happened that once. Who 
was it, Jo ? ” 


178 The Four Corners at School 

** Dr. Foster, and it isn’t the first time it has 
happened. I know that.” 

“ Now, Jo I ” 

“Honest, it isn’t. Ethel told me she has 
seen them together several times, and she asked 
me if he came very often to see Miss Wheeler. 
I say, girls, let’s have some fun. I’d like to get 
even with her for being so mean about my 
Latin last month. She never gives a fellow half 
a chance to get a good report. I really did 
want at least one to send home before the first 
of the year, but she seemed to pile on the 
agony before the holidays when she knew we 
were all busy. All the other teachers let up a 
little, but she? Ah, no, not Minerva A. 
Wheeler. I wonder if he calls her My Nervy 
Wheeler, by the way.” 

“ Oh, Jo ! ” The girls could not help laugh- 
ing, for in truth not one cared much for Miss 
Wheeler. She had not the faculty of attracting 
the pupils, though she was a most painstaking 
and conscientious teacher. 

Jo was busying herself with a bit of paper 
and a pencil. “ How is this? ” she said after a 
moment. 

Dr. Foster, an impostor 
Is Minerva A. 

Vinegar's behind her honey, 

All her pupils say.” 


Back to School 


179 

Fine I ” came a chorus. “ You’re quite a 
poet, Jo.” 

Jo laughed. “ Such beautiful poetry, isn’t it? 
Shall I make some more ? ” 

** Oh, yes, do go on.” 

Josephine gave herself up to making another 
jingle : 


** Dr. Foster, if you lost her 
You would be in luck. 

Cut you loose 
From that old goose, 

Whom you think a duck.” 

” Good I ” commented the girls again. 

think that will be enough for my pur- 
pose,” said Jo. 

“ What purpose ? You’re not going to give 
it to him, Jo,” cried Charlotte. 

” No, to her.” 

” But she’ll find out and there will be a fuss.” 

“ No, she’ll not.” 

“Why?” 

“ Because.” 

“ I don’t think you ought really to send it, 
Jo,” expostulated Nan after a moment’s 
thought. “ It’s all well enough for us to laugh 
over it and to let out our feelings in that way, but 
I don’t think such things are ever in good taste.” 

“ Oh, dear, my Western roughness again, I 


l8o The Four Corners at School 


suppose. I think it will be such fun to rile her 
up a little.” 

“ Let's do it some other way.” 

“ How?” 

“We might send her some flowers in his 
name.” 

“No, sir, I’m not going to spend my good 
money on her and let her have all the fun. No, 
siree, you can do it, if you want to, but I beg 
to be excused.” 

Some of the other girls demurred and the 
matter was dropped, so far as they were con- 
cerned, though Joe felt such pride in her 
rhymes that she told herself they ought not to 
be wasted. She, therefore, wrote them out 
carefully on Nan’s little typewriter and then 
tucked them away in one of her school books 
till she should decide upon what she would do 
about them. If Miss Wheeler behaved her- 
self she should be spared, but if not she must 
be punished. 

But Fate’s pranks are equal to those of any 
schoolgirl and this time Fate played an unex- 
pected trick, for Josephine, in her usual helter- 
skelter manner, took no pains to remove the 
compromising paper from her copy of Caesar, 
and dropped it out on her way to class the next 
day. Nan picked it up, intending to return it 
to Jo, and in turn dropped it from her algebra. 


Back to School l8i 

It next fell into the hands of Miss Barnes who 
saw Nan drop the paper, and so it was her eyes, 
and not Miss Wheeler’s, which fell upon the 
verses. But it was Nan who was sent for and 
not Josephine. 

Unfortunately Nan had lately made a remark 
about “ that horrid old algebra class ” in Miss 
Barnes’ hearing, moreover Nan was known to be 
rather a clever rhymester and finally Miss Barnes 
knew that she was the only one of the girls who 
possessed a typewriter, one that Mr. Pinckney had 
given her. It was only a small affair and Nan 
was most generous in allowing the other girls 
to use it, but Miss Barnes did not think of this 
and felt that all evidence pointed to Nan. So 
she was summoned to Miss Barnes’ study. 
This in itself meant something a little out of 
the ordinary, and Nan wondered what she had 
been doing, or if it were Jack who was again 
the culprit. Miss Barnes wore her most judicial 
look as Nan appeared. She was fingering a 
folded paper nervously. 

I want to speak to you, Nancy,” she began. 
** Sit there, please,” she indicated a chair in 
front of her. Nan seated herself and waited 
further developments. Miss Barnes was silent 
for a few moments, then she said : “You do 
not get along very well with your algebra, do 
you, Nancy?” 


i 82 The Four Corners at School 

So that was it. Nan felt that her struggles 
to do her best hardly called for this special ses- 
sion. “ I don’t get along so very well,” she 
confessed, “ but I manage to keep up with the 
class and I haven’t had such very bad marks so 
far, Miss Barnes.” 

“But you dislike it?” 

“ Yes, I am afraid I don’t enjoy it very 
much.” 

“ Purely on account of the study itself, or 
have you a more personal reason?” 

Nan hesitated then she replied truthfully : 
“ I don’t believe I like Miss Wheeler as much 
as I do the other teachers. Somehow it is 
harder to get at her explanations. I don’t 
seem to be able to grasp them, and if it were 
not for Charlotte I’d be a worse bungler than 
I am.” 

“ I should hardly think, though, that you 
have sufficient reason for personal spite. Has 
Miss Wheeler ever done anything to arouse 
your personal enmity, anything that singles 
you out as one whom she does not like ? ” 

“ Why, no, I don’t think so. She isn’t very 
popular, you know.” 

Miss Barnes nodded acquiescence. “ I know 
you Southerners are hot-headed ” — pretty 
mean to throw that up against us, thought Nan 
— “ but I did think you girls would refrain from 


Back to School 


>83 

a personal attack upon a teacher. I have here/’ 
she unfolded the paper, “ some rhymes, which 
are very undignified, to use a mild term. They 
have fortunately fallen into my hands instead 
of the person for whom they were intended, 
for I see they are addressed upon the back to 
Miss Wheeler. Everything points to you as 
the perpetrator of a very poor joke, a very un- 
ladylike attack.” 

Nan was silent. Jo’s rhymes, but why 
were they foisted upon her entirely innocent 
self ? 

“ In the first place,” Miss Barnes went on, 
** I saw you drop them ; they are typewritten 
in the second place, and as you are the only 
one who has a typewriter I am forced to be- 
lieve they came from your hand. In the third 
place, you are known to be something of a 
rhymester. I have heard you make remarks 
which lead me to think you have a personal 
grudge against Miss Wheeler on account of 
your mathematics, so I feel I am justified in my 
suspicions. Now, I wish you to answer me. 
Did you ever see this before ? ” She handed 
the paper to Nan who glanced at it and handed 
it back. 

** I have seen the rhymes before, but I did 
not write them,” she said. 

” Do you know who did write them ? ” 


184 The Four Corners at School 

Nan made no answer. Did Miss Barnes 
suppose for one moment that she was a tattle- 
tale ? ” 

“ Please to answer me, Nancy.*^ 

“ Miss Barnes, aren’t witnesses allowed not 
to answer questions that would incriminate 
other persons ? ” 

‘‘That depends. In this case I expect an 
answer.” 

“ I cannot give it.” 

“You mean you will not.” Miss Barnes was 
not used to being defied and Nan had never 
seen her angry before. “ I wish to sift this 
affair to the bottom,” she said sternly. “ I can- 
not have my teachers insulted and I do not 
intend that they shall be.” 

“ But Miss Wheeler did not get the paper,” 
Nan found voice to say. 

“ The intention was the same ; it was simply 
a chance which prevented, for it was the evident 
intention that she should eventually receive it. 
I surmise that it was dropped purposely at her 
class-room door under the supposition that it 
would be picked up and given to her, the writer 
thus escaping detection, but fortune has ordered 
otherwise. I should like to tell you something 
about Miss Wheeler, Nancy, and perhaps you 
will regret this impertinent act. She is the 
eldest of six children. Her father is dead, her 


Back to School 


185 

mother an invalid. From the time she was no 
older than you she has helped to support and 
educate her brothers and sisters. She is now 
sending her youngest brother through college ; 
when he is self-supporting she will be free, for 
the first time, from burdens which would have 
weighed a less brave woman to the earth. She 
has never known the youthful pleasure you 
enjoy, for she has always had heavy responsi- 
bilities. She has denied herself all the amuse- 
ments which are part of most girls^ experiences, 
and she has done this that she might save 
her earnings for her family. 

If she seems severe and hard, it is because the 
softer side of life has never been hers to enjoy. 
Now there seems a possibility of there coming 
to her a happiness which she never expected, 
and I do not think the most hard-hearted person 
would be willing to rob her of what is justly 
hers. She is so free from vanity and self- 
esteem that a very slight thing might alter 
all her future for her. I think you understand 
what I mean, Nancy, since you know about 
this.’^ Her hand closed on the paper. “ Of 
course I shall destroy this copy, but I cannot 
be sure that another copy will not be made 
to be used in playing a dangerous and cruel 
joke. I want you to know exactly the situation 
and I warn you that if Miss Wheeler had re- 


i86 The Four Corners at School 


ceived this I could not have allowed you to re- 
main in the school.” 

Nan fairly gasped. So after all, Miss 
Barnes believed her guilty in spite of her denial. 
The blood rushed to her face so that she was 
crimson to her very ears. She sprang to her 
feet. “ If you believe that I can tell a direct 
lie, and if you think I am capable of insult- 
ing Miss Wheeler, you are insulting me, and 
the sooner I leave your school the better,” 
she cried indignantly and then rushed from the 
room. 

It was Friday. Charlotte had already gone 
home. In the fierceness of her anger Nan 
resolved to follow her. She flew up-stairs leav- 
ing Miss Barnes bewildered and distressed. 
Was it guilt or innocence which had caused 
the outburst? Miss Barnes could not decide, 
and as she sat making up her mind what 
course to pursue next. Nan gathered quickly 
together some of her clothing, stuffed it into 
her suit-case, collected the music she would need 
next day, and started forth to take the first train 
for Boston. -On her way out she spied a 
letter, addressed to herself, lying on the hall 
table. She thrust it into her pocket and 
walked on. 

Half way down the walk she met Daniella. 
“ I am going to Boston,” she said. 


Back to School 


187 

I thought you weren’t going till to-morrow,” 
returned Daniella. 

“ I have changed my mind,” said Nan. “ Tell 
Mary Lee and the twins that I decided I would 
go to-day.” 

There was barely time to make the next 
train and she hurried along realizing that she 
had not asked permission, and wondering if 
she would ever come back in the face of that 
consuming accusation. Of course evidence was 
against her, but it was because she was not a 
Yankee, that Miss Barnes believed her guilty, 
she bitterly told herself. She would not have 
laid such a charge on Charlotte, she was firmly 
convinced. What should she tell Charlotte, by 
the way ? Should she tell her at all ? Was it 
right to shield Josephine in the same way that 
she had always shielded Jack ? How far ought 
one’s sense of honor and right carry one in 
such a case ? Of course Charlotte, as well as 
the rest of the girls, knew Jo had written the 
verses but they did not know their result, and 
if they did know they would at once exculpate 
Nan from any part in the matter. Well, she 
would have time to decide what it was best to 
do, but she would never, never forgive Miss 
Barnes and she hoped she could leave school 
altogether and go home. 

She pondered upon the subject while the train 


i88 The Four Comers at School 

bore her swiftly toward the city. Before she 
reached there, she had determined not to tell 
Charlotte after all, but to lay the case before 
Mr. Harmer, who, being quite disinterested, 
could tell her what to do. He was her friend 
as well as her teacher and took an interest in 
her on her Aunt Helen’s account. She would 
wait till to-morrow after she had taken her 
music lesson. Meantime she would go to Char- 
lotte, tell her that she had changed her mind 
about waiting till Saturday and Charlotte would 
gladly welcome her. 

Having settled this she put her hand into her 
pocket and mechanically drew forth the letter 
she had picked up on her way out. It was 
in a cheap, smeary envelope and the address 
was awkwardly written and incorrectly spelled. 
Who could the letter be from? She tore it 
open and glanced at the signature ; it was 
‘‘yours respeckfully, Mitty Johnson.” 

“Well, I declare,” said Nan half aloud and 
her eyes ran over the lines before her which 
ran : 

“ Deer Miss Nan : 

“ I takes my pen in hand to inform you 
that grandady is vey low and asts constint for 
you. The doctor says he boun not to git well 
and grandady say he kant die in peece lessen 
he see Mis Nan, so accodin to dekes I is a ritin 


Back to School 189 

to you to inform you of thes facks. Ef you kin 
kum grandady say the Lord bless you. 

“ yours respeckfully, 

‘‘Mitty Johnson. 

“ P. S. — Escuse bad ritin and spelin.’^ 

The train was entering the station before Nan 
realized where she was. She picked up her 
suit-case in a dazed way and followed the 
crowd out to the platform, but instead of rush- 
ing along to get a car for Brookline she turned 
toward the ticket office. 






CHAPTER X 


UNC’ LANDY 

Among those who passed through the big 
terminal station that evening some probably 
noticed a slender dark-haired girl who sat by 
herself in one corner. Every now and then 
she glanced at the clock. Once she went out 
and returned with a postal card upon which 
she hurriedly wrote, and which she immediately 
mailed. Later she had a light supper in the 
station restaurant and when the night express 
was called she arose with alacrity and hastened 
to the train. Nan had solved her problems. 
She would not disregard Mitty^s appeal and 
had decided that nothing should keep her from 
Unc^ Landy in his departing hour. She had 
just enough money to pay for her ticket home 
and for her sleeping berth. She left the ques- 
tion of getting back to be settled when the 
time came to return, if return she must, but 
now all she thought of was getting away. 

“ Po^ old Unc’ Landy I ” she said to herself, 
“ he carried me in his arms when I was a baby, 
and how he has toiled and moiled for us all. 
What would we have done without him in those 


194 The Four Corners at School 

days when we were so poor? It would be 
cruel to let him die without a sight of one of 
us.’' Even if she had not been glad of the 
excuse to get away, she felt that she could not 
have resisted the call. Now that she had 
posted the card to Mary Lee telling her tersely 
that Unc’ Landy was dying and that she was 
going to see him, she felt that she had done her 
best and that her conscience could be quite clear. 

By ten o’clock the next morning she was in 
Washington ; by half-past two she was stand- 
ing on the platform of the familiar railway 
station of her own town. How good, how good 
it was to get there. What a surprise it would 
be to Aunt Sarah and the boys to see her. 
Albeit she was heartily glad to get back, a little 
chill of loneliness crept over her as she thought 
of Mary Lee and the twins away off in Massa- 
chusetts, of her mother and Aunt Helen in 
Italy. Home was not really home without them, 
after all. 

But there it was, the house spick and span 
with fresh paint, the new fence white and clean, 
the out-buildings in good repair ; not the un- 
cared-for place it was three years before. Yet 
its very neatness made it less attractive and less 
homelike to Nan. The mountains loomed up 
in the distance and across the brook on the hill- 
top still stood the charred ruins of Uplands. 


Unc’ Landy 19^; 

Nan stood still for a moment and looked around, 
then she gave a deep sigh and went in, open- 
ing the front door softly and going through the 
hall to the living room. Here all was neat and 
orderly. No signs of children’s belongings 
cluttered the room ; Jack’s hat did not lie upon 
the floor ; Jean’s doll was not sitting stiffly on 
the sofa ; a new table occupied the place where 
the old melodion had stood. Nan viewed the 
place for a moment, then she went over to 
where her beloved piano stood ; she passed her 
hand caressingly over it as she went by to the 
kitchen where she was sure she would find her 
Aunt Sarah. But no one was there, not even 
Mitty. Lady Grey, the big Angora cat, lay on 
the floor under the stove ; Nan coaxed her out 
and she came rubbing and purring, ready to 
welcome this old friend whom she at once 
recognized. Nan hugged her up and whispered 
words of greeting, then she left her, sole oc- 
cupant of the kitchen, and went up-stairs to her 
Aunt Sarah’s room. 

The door of this was open and the afternoon 
sun was pouring in through the window at 
which Aunt Sarah sat in a low rocking-chair, a 
basket of mending by her side. She looked up 
quickly as Nan’s shadow darkened the door- 
way. “ Mercy me I ” she exclaimed, ** Nancy 
Corner, you don’t tell me it is you I ** 


196 The Four Corners at School 

Nan came forward. “ It’s I sure enough,” 
she said as she bent to kiss her aunt. 

“ What on earth is the matter ? What 
brought you home ? ” 

“ I came to see po’ old Unc’ Landy. How is 
he, Aunt Sarah ? ” 

“ Very low. The doctor thinks he cannot 
last another twenty-four hours. How did you 
happen to be able to leave. Nan? Did they 
give you permission, and how did you know 
about Unc’ Landy?” 

** Mitty wrote that he was asking for me and 
I thought it would be cruel to let him die with- 
out having that last wish granted, so I came.” 

“ Did they give you permission ? ” Miss Sarah 
repeated the question. 

“ Well, no, not exactly,” returned Nan slowly. 
“ Wait till you hear about it,” she went on as 
she saw Aunt Sarah ready with a scolding. 

It’s rather a long story and I don’t think I could 
have done differently. Indeed, as I have been 
thinking over it on my way here, I believe it is 
the best thing I could have done to come away 
just now, for — but I will tell you after a while. 
I don’t think I can do it just yet. You will 
suspend judgment, won’t you. Aunt Sarah, till 
you know all the whys and wherefores ? ” 

“ Where did you get the money.” 

‘‘ Oh, I had enough to get my ticket, and I 


Unc’ Landy 197 

will see cousin Tom Lewis about getting back, 
if I go.” 

“ If you go 1 ” 

“Yes, now please don’t get excited. Just 
wait till you hear my story. Do you suppose I 
can see Unc’ Landy right away?” 

“ I should think you could. He lies in a 
half stupor most of the time, but he is conscious 
when roused. I don’t think he suffers much 
now.” 

“ Who is with him ? ” 

“ His daughter, and Mitty when she is not 
needed here. Aunt Judy has been sitting up 
with him at night. She is a good nurse and 
the doctor can rely upon her faithfulness. I’ll 
go with you to see him. Nan.” Miss Sarah put 
down the stocking she was darning, threw a 
shawl over her shoulders, and the two passed 
out of the house and down the garden path to 
where stood Unc’ Landy’ s little cabin. They 
opened the door softly and went in. The room 
was neat and orderly, and was comfortably 
furnished. On the wood stove simmered a tea- 
kettle ; in a large rocking-chair by the fire sat 
Unc’ Landy’s daughter, Achsah, Mitty huddled 
at her feet. A table by the bed held bottles and 
glasses. Along the high mantel were ranged 
photographs of the Comer family, and some 
highly colored chromos were tacked on the 


198 The Four Corners at School 

wall. Under the patchwork quilt upon the bed 
lay Unc’ Landy, his eyes half closed. 

Mitty scrambled to her feet as she caught 
sight of Nan. “ Law, Miss Nan,” she ex- 
claimed in a subdued voice, “ I ’clar I thought 
you was a ghos’ ; I been thinking so much about 
ghoses lately. Mama, hyar Miss Nan.” The 
woman in the chair who had been nodding 
sleepily, opened her eyes and a flashing smile 
disclosed her white teeth. 

She arose at once and turned to Mitty. 
“ Get Miss Nan a chair, you fool nigger,” she 
said, “ ain’t you got no mo’ sense than to stan’ 
thar gigglin’? Set down. Miss Sarah. Yasm, 
he ’bout de same, jes lay quiet, oncet in a while 
open he eyes an’ say sumpin, den drap off agin.” 

Nan refused the proffered chair and went up 
to the bed. She laid her hand softly on the 
wrinkled black one which lay outside the 
coverlet, and Unc’ Landy opened his fast dim- 
ming eyes. For a moment he did not recog- 
nize the face which bent over him . “ Don’t 

you know me, Unc’ Landy ? ” said Nan gently. 

It’s Miss Nan.” 

“ Praise God, you come. Miss Nan,” said the 
old man weakly, his other hand groping to 
touch hers. ‘‘ I feels lak I kaint leave dis y earth 
twel some of de fambly come, Now de ole 
man ready.” 


199 


Unc’ Landy 

He paused and seemed to drop off to sleep 
again. Nan stood softly stroking the wrinkled 
hand, the tears very near her eyes. Miss Sarah 
joined her after a moment. “ Think how many 
kind things these old hands have done,” said 
Nan with a little choking sob. “ How well 
they have served us. What shall we do with- 
out him. Aunt Sarah ? ” 

“ Don’t ask me, child. It distresses me to 
think of it. There are mighty few like him left, 
and pretty soon we shall see no more of the 
good old-time servants.” 

Unc’ Landy opened his eyes. “You thar. 
Miss Nan?” 

“ Yes, Unc’ Landy, I’m right here.” 

A look of great peace came over his face. 
“I knowed Miss Nan would come,” he mur- 
mured . “ I ca’ied huh in mah a’ ms when she 

a little mite o’ baby. Yes, Mars Jack, I gwine 
do lak you say ; I ain’t nuvver gwine leave 
’em. I stay by ’em, suh, I sholy will. Mars 
Jack.” He wandered off again. 

“ He thinks he is talking to papa,” whis- 
pered Nan the tears dropping fast. “Oh, 
Aunt Sarah, can’t the doctor do any- 
thing ? ” 

Miss Sarah shook her head. “ It’s the young 
doctor. Nan, not old Dr. Woods, and he is 
quite up with the times, you know. The old 


200 The Four Corners at School 

doctor is laid up with rheumatism, but I am 
sure they consult upon the case.” 

Just then the door opened and the young doc- 
tor came in. He was a boyish looking fellow, 
for it was only a year since he had been given 
the right to be called doctor. “ How is the old 
man?” he asked as Miss Sarah turned to him. 

“Just about the same ; a little weaker, 
maybe,” she replied. 

The doctor came up to the bed and caught 
sight of Nan standing there. “Ah, Nan,” he 
said offering his hand, “ I’m glad you could 
come ; the old man has been asking for you.” 

Unc’ Landy heard. “ I been a honin’ fo' 
yuh, honey,” he said faintly. “ I ben a honin’ 
fo’ yuh. Dis Miss Nan, ain’t it ? ” 

“Yes, Unc’ Landy, I’m right here,” Nan 
answered. Then she turned to the doctor. 
“ Oh, can’t you do anything for him ? ” 

“ I’m afraid not,” replied the young man 
compassionately. “ He is old and has about 
run his race. He can make no resistance 
against disease. Indeed, Nan, we have done 
all we could. Father has brought all his ex- 
perience to bear, and I have consulted him con- 
stantly. Achsah, have you given him the 
medicine regularly?” 

“ Yas, suh, I ain’t missed once.” 

“ And the brandy and ice ? ” 


201 


Unc’ Landy 

“ Yas, suh, I done jes like you say.” 

The doctor took a small phial from his pocket 
and poured a few drops into a glass, half filled 
with water. “ Give him this every half hour,” 
he directed ; “ it will increase the heart action 
for awhile, though there is nothing we can 
really do beyond that.” He felt the old man’s 
pulse, then came away. 

Nan followed him to the door. “ How long 
will it be? ” she asked sadly. 

“ It is now only a question of hours. Possibly 
before morning he will go. Between midnight 
and dawn very likely when vitality is at its 
lowest. Are you all well, Nan, you and your 
sisters ? ” 

“ Yes, Dr. Paul.” The young doctor was so 
called to distinguish him from his father. 

“ I’ll drop in again to-night if I can,” said 
Dr. Paul. “ I would not stay here all the time. 
Nan ; there is really nothing you can do.” 

“ I can be here when he is conscious,” said 
Nan simply. “ I do not want to leave him for 
a second, for it is a comfort to him to know I 
am right by his side.” 

That’s good of you,” returned the doctor, 
** but I wouldn’t wear myself out.” 

It was fast growing dark, but Nan refused to 
leave her post though Aunt Sarah urged her 
and Achsah gave up her watching to Aunt 


202 


The Four Comers at School 


Judy. Mitty followed Miss Sarah back to the 
house and later brought Nan her supper. At 
another time Nan would have delighted in the 
hot biscuits and batter-bread, but now she took 
little account of them. 

About nine o’clock the doctor returned and 
at Nan’s questioning look said : “ Sinking 
fast.” 

“ He hardly ever speaks now,” said Nan 
brokenly. 

“ But you mustn’t stay up to watch.” 

“Yes, I must. I have come all the way from 
Boston, Dr. Paul, and I want to stay to the end 
right here by him.” 

“ But you are too young to endure such an 
experience.” 

“No, I am not. It is all I can do, and it is 
so much less than he has done for us all his 
life. He’d cheerfully lay down his life for me 
and can I grudge him a few hours of mine ? ” 

The doctor laid aside his overcoat and drew 
up a chair. Nan looked up in surprise. He 
smiled and said : “I am going to stay, too.” 
Aunt Judy by the fire slept peacefully. Once 
in a while she put a stick of wood into the 
little air-tight stove and the room would be- 
come suddenly warm. The hours passed 
slowly away. The doctor talked in a low tone 
to Nan. He had known her all his life, as he 


Unc* Landy 203 

knew most of his father’s patients, but he ob- 
served her with a new interest and questioned 
her about her school-days, about her studies, 
her friends, and in this hour of confidences 
Nan was moved to tell him of her trouble with 
Miss Barnes. “ Did I do right ? ” she asked. 

“ I don’t know exactly about that,” he 
answered, “ but I know you did what I would 
have done under the circumstances.” 

“ Even to coming here ? ” 

“ Even to that.” 

“ I couldn’t tell on Jo, you see.”. 

No, of course you couldn’t. Another girl 
could, but you could not.” 

“ And there wasn’t time to ask permission to 
do what I knew would not have been allowed. 
No one up there could have understood the 
way I feel about Unc’ Landy.” 

“ No indeed, I am perfectly aware of that.” 

‘‘ And you see what it means to him.” 

“ I do see. No, Nan, I may not be sound 
in my judgments, but I certainly don’t believe 
a girl like you could have done differently.” 

Thank you,” said Nan. This frank and 
hearty endorsement was a great comfort. “ I 
don’t know how I am coming out of it,” she 
told the doctor, “ but I am trusting to luck.” 

Just here Unc’ Landy opened his eyes again. 
The doctor gave him a spoonful of medicine 


204 The Four Corners at School 

which seemed to strengthen him a little. “ Is 
dat yuh a-holdin’ my han’, Miss Nan ? he 
asked. 

“ Yes, Unc’ Landy.” 

“ Is yuh gwine keep on a-holdin* ? ’* 

“Yes.” 

“ Thanky, Miss Nan. I feels lak I go easy 
if yuh has a holt of me.” Then he muttered : 
“ De valley o’ de Shadder, de valley o’ de 
Shadder.” 

The moments grew to hours. Miss Sarah 
came over and joined in the vigil, first entreat- 
ing Nan to go to bed, but she only shook her 
head. 

“ Let her stay,” said Dr. Paul ; “ this is what 
she came for, you know.” 

Just after midnight the old man suddenly 
threw out his arms and exclaimed, “ I’se a- 
comin’. Mars Jack I I’se a-comin’ ! ” Nan leaned 
over him and then turned with an appealing look 
to Dr. Paul. 

He understood and nodded in reply. Nan 
stood up and again stroked the now restless 
fingers. After a while they grew still and she 
felt their chill under her own warm palm. 

“ Come, Nan,” said Miss Sarah softly. Nan 
looked up only half understanding. 

The doctor led her quietly away. “ It is no 
use to. stay any longer, little girl,” he said. 


205 


Unc’ Landy 

“ You have done all you could. He has gone 
to hear the greeting : ‘Well done good and 
faithful servant.’ ” 

Nan, sobbing softly, allowed herself to be 
taken back to the house, to lie once more under 
the old familiar roof, but not to sleep till near 
daybreak when the dawn of a winter’s day 
broke over the mountains, and she at last 
dropped into a troubled slumber. 

Unc’ Landy himself would have been satisfied 
with the funeral which had always been a mat- 
ter of great concern to him. Colonel Lewis, 
as manager of the Corners’ affairs, had in trust 
a fund to be devoted especially to this purpose, 
and Mitty declaimed in her most oratorical 
manner to her friends about it. “ De preachah 
say hit suttnly were de fines’ fun’al he uvver 
see in dis county,” she averred. “ Dey wasn’t 
a nigger in dis town what didn’t drap evythin’ 
to go. All de ’cieties tu’ned out and all dem 
flowers what was sont mek yuh fergit it wan’t 
summah. De fambly sont ’em, dat who. Dem 
gre’t big palms o’ vict’ry Miss Nan sont dem, 
an’ de crown come fum Miss Ma’y Lee an’ de 
twins. Den de res come fum mo’ de fambly. 
Mr. Phil an’ Mr. Ran an’ Miss Mag Lewis an’ 
de Cunnel an’ de res’ of ’em. Grandaddy 
ought sholy to be pleased an’ I reckon he were. 
’Tain’ no white folks gets no finah fun’al. 


2o6 The Four Corners at School 

Miss Nan lay de flowahs roun’ huh own se’f. 
She gi’ him a big white rose to hoF an’ she cry 
lak he huh bes’ frien’.” 

But all this excitement was too much for 
Nan, and she seemed so broken and nervous 
that the old doctor, now out again, commanded 
her to stay in bed for at least a day and not to 
think of going back to school for a week. Her 
cousins, the Gordon boys and the Lewises, Polly 
and Phil, rallied about her, and Aunt Sarah 
coddled and humored her, preparing all her 
favorite dishes and anxiously trying to tempt 
her very slight appetite ; Mitty waited on her 
hand and foot, so that being home again came 
to seem the best thing in the world. 

Somehow the story of her difficulties was 
made known to Aunt Sarah through some 
other means than by Nan’s telling it and when 
she attempted an account she was hushed up 
with : “ There, there, I don’t want any explana- 
tion. I know all about it. Just let it drop. 
You did perfectly right. We don’t raise de- 
ceitful children in this family whatever those 
Yankees do.” Aunt Sarah had not yet re- 
covered from her resentment at the fact that 
her great nieces had been sent to a Boston 
school, and she lost no opportunity to rail 
against ‘‘those Yankees.” Nan might have 
known in the beginning that she would be up- 


207 


Unc’ Landy 

held by Aunt Sarah, at least. So after this 
outburst the girl lay languidly back on her 
pillows, feeling that she need not worry over 
the matter for the present. 

The next day she was down-stairs, looking 
rather white and wan, with dark circles under 
her eyes, quite unlike the glad, energetic 
creature who used to run wild over the place. 
Dr. Paul looked her over gravely. “ This 
won’t do. Nan,” he said. “You mustn’t worry 
so much.” 

“It is that wretched affair at school,” she 
confessed, “ and I do miss Unc’ Landy, too. I 
cannot get used to thinking of his not being 
here.” 

“Well, you must try to cheer up. Miss 
Sarah, feed her well, and make her drink plenty 
of milk, send her to bed early and keep her 
from practicing scales. Play a jig, if you like, 
Nan, but no hymn tunes, nothing serious of 
any kind.” He met Ran Gordon in the hall. 
“ You must chirk up that little cousin of yours,” 
he said. “ Get up something lively for her. 
Talk all the nonsense you can. Look up some 
funny books for her to read.” 

“ Why, is she really ill, doc ? ” asked Ran. 

“No, a little run down, that’s all. She 
evidently doesn't thrive in Boston atmosphere. 
She is an intense sort of somebody ; feels things 


2o8 The Four Corners at School 


deeply, takes them to heart. She is mothering 
the whole family up there and is pretty well 
used up over the old darky’s death. She 
needs to be taken out of herself, so you all be 
as cheerful as you can.” 

Ran nodded comprehendingly. “We’ll try 
to cheer her up,” he returned. 

“ Don’t be too noisy,” warned the doctor as 
he passed on. 

Ran went into the house. He had not had 
many chances as yet to talk to Nan. He found 
her sitting back in a big chair before the fire 
in the living-room, her eyes fixed upon her fa- 
ther’s portrait over the mantel. 

“ Hello,” cried Ran brightly. “ I suppose you 
don’t feel like taking a ride, do you ? ” 

“ It is rather cold, isn’t it ? ” 

“ Well, yes, too cold, maybe. Listen, Nan, I 
want to hear all about Daniella. I haven’t had 
a chance for a good talk with you since you 
came, and there is so much I want to know.” 

Nan launched forth into an account of this old 
acquaintance, who was now her schoolfellow, 
and Ran skilfully led her to talk of some of 
her California experiences, in return telling her 
of some of the schoolboy pranks which he had 
enjoyed, so that presently Nan was laughing 
heartily and Mitty who came in with a glass of 
milk for her went back to Miss Sarah with the 


209 


Unc’ Landy 

report that ** Miss Nan suttnly did favah huhse’f 
agin. She laugh jest de same as she uster/’ she 
declared. 

The good work thus begun only needed the 
impetus of a letter which came the next morn- 
ing, and which in a measure explained what 
had been going on at the Wadsworth school 
since Nan left it. 


•IP 



1 


J 

i 



WHAT WENT ON AT 
SCHOOL 

'§ 5 ^ 










CHAPTER XI 


WHAT WENT ON AT SCHOOL 

At the Wadsworth school Nan’s absence was 
not noticed until supper time of that eventful 
Friday. “Where’s Nan?” asked Jack. “I 
want her to tie my hair ribbon.” 

“ Go see if she is in Daniella’s room,” said 
Mary Lee, “ and don’t stay for it is late now ; 
the first bell has rung.” 

Jack went off but came back at once. “ Nan 
has gone to Boston after all,” she said in a dis- 
appointed tone, “ but Daniella tied my ribbon 
for me.” 

“ Isn’t that just like Nan ? ” said Mary Lee 
discontentedly. “ Why didn’t she tell us she 
was going? There is always something we 
want her to get for us when she goes to town.” 

“ Daniella said she was in such a hurry,” 
said Jack, “that she wouldn’t stop at all, but 
just called out to her as she was going. I sup- 
pose she made up her mind all of a sudden and 
didn’t want to miss her train.” 

“She might have told us,” repeated Mary 
Lee. “ Come on, children ; there is the second 
gong.” 


214 The Four Corners at School 

They had been several minutes at the table 
before Miss Barnes asked, “Where is your 
sister?’’ 

“ She has gone to Boston,” Jack spoke up. 

Miss Barnes compressed her lips and glanced 
across the table at Mrs. Channing, but made no 
remark. As the Corners were passing from the 
dining-room, however, she laid a detaining hand 
upon Mary Lee’s shoulder. “ I want to speak 
to you, Mary Lee,” she said. The others went 
on leaving Mary Lee behind. “ What time did 
Nancy go to the city?” asked Miss Barnes. 

“ I don’t know. Miss Barnes,” Mary Lee an- 
swered. “ I didn’t even know she had gone till 
Daniella told me. Why, is anything wrong ? ” 

“ She did not ask permission,” Miss Barnes 
told her, “ and you know that is always required. 
That is all, Mary Lee. You may join the 
others.” Mary Lee felt herself dismissed, but 
realized, by Miss Barnes’s expression, that she 
was much displeased. 

“ I don’t see why she should be so mad about 
a little thing like that,” Mary Lee said to Jo a 
little later. “Nan always goes to the city every 
Saturday anyhow ; that was understood when 
we came, and she as often goes on Friday as 
Saturday, so I don’t see what difference it 
makes if she chooses to go to-day instead of to- 
morrow.” 


What Went On at School 215 

** Oh, it’s on account of the old rules,” replied 
Jo. “ If a thing is against the rules they al- 
ways act as if the skies would fall whether it 
makes any special difference to anybody or not. 
There is Frank Powers looking for some one to 
play ping-pong or hold worsted or something ; 
let’s get out of her way.” 

Just why Miss Barnes was not pleased with 
Nan was not found out till the next day. The 
morning’s mail brought Nan’s postal card writ- 
ten at the railway station. Mary Lee read it and 
re-read it before she could quite take in the fact 
that Nan had actually gone home, and of her 
reason for making the j ourney . E^ger to spread 
the news she called the twins who were playing 
in the gymnasium. She ran toward them wav- 
ing the card. “ Nan’s gone home,” she cried. 

Jack wriggled down from the rope where she 
hung suspended. “ Who said so ? ” she asked. 

“ I have a card from Nan herself. Unc’ 
Landy is dying and Mitty wrote that he asked 
for Nan, so she just up and went.” 

“ And didn’t she tell Miss Barnes she was 
going?” 

‘T don’t reckon she did.” 

But she didn’t take any of her clothes ex- 
cept just enough to do her for over Sunday. 
Daniella told me she had only her suit-case with 
her.” said Jack. 


2i 6 The Four Corners at School 


‘*Oh, well, that is a small matter. She left 
enough behind at home, old things that she can 
wear around the house if she needs any.” 

“When is she coming back?” asked Jean. 

“ She doesn’t say. She wrote this while she 
was waiting for the train. I must say I think 
she had courage to start off on that long jour- 
ney all by herself ; I wouldn’t have dared to do 
it.” 

“ Oh, dear, I didn’t want her to go,” said Jack 
mournfully. 

Just then Jo joined them, her curiosity aroused 
by the evident excitement. “ What’s up ? ” she 
asked. 

“ Nan’s gone home,” Mary Lee told her. 

“ Gone home ? What for ? ” 

Mary Lee explained. 

Jo looked thoughtful. “ I wonder if that was 
the only reason. Miss Barnes has on that lofty 
expression of hers that means something is going 
on, and Mrs. Channing has an injured look. 
Some one said Nan was called to the study 
yesterday and came out looking as white as a 
sheet.” 

“ I don’t believe that had anything to do 
with it.” Mary Lee scorned the suggestion. 
“ Nan says she didn’t know anything about 
Unc’ Landy till after she got on the train when 
she read Mitty’s letter. I do hope nothing else 


What Went On at School 217 

is wrong. Goodness, I wish we were all at 
home this very minute. I feel so lost without 
Nan.’’ 

“Now, Mary Lee,” said Jo, “then where 
would I be? I shouldn’t want to desert you 
that way.” 

“There isn’t any deserting about it,” Mary 
Lee assured her. “ Here we are and here we 
shall have to stay, I suppose. Nan is the only 
one who dares to carry things with such a high 
hand. I expect Miss Barnes will be madder 
than ever when I tell her.” 

“ Haven’t you told her yet, and don’t you 
suppose Nan wrote to her, too?” 

“No, I don’t believe she did, for I took the 
mail myself, and I didn’t see any other thing in 
Nan’s handwriting. Come with me, Jo, and 
help me break the news. What do you reckon 
will happen? Suppose she says Nan can’t come 
back. I know one thing. I’ll not stay then, 
either, and neither will the twins.” 

“Gracious I” exclaimed Jo, “wouldn’t that 
be awful ? ” 

Miss Barnes took the news calmly, her only 
comment being: “I am not surprised.” Later 
in the day Mary Lee discovered a letter lying 
on the hall table ready for the postman to take 
when he should bring the afternoon’s mail. 
The letter was addressed to Colonel Lewis. 


2i 8 The Four Corners at School 


Mary Lee hunted up Jo to whom she took all 
her confidences. Jo was in her room botchily 
mending her stockings and munching peanuts. 
“ Glad to see you,” she said. “ Have some pea- 
nuts ? I must do something pleasant to make 
up for this disagreeable job, so I always keep 
a bag of peanuts handy. Haven’t you some 
mending to do ? Bring it along.” 

“ All right,” said Mary Lee, “ I will, for I 
want to talk to you.” She ran to her own 
room to get her work-bag and soon the two 
were comfortably rocking and chatting over 
their work. “What do you think, Jo,” said 
Mary Lee, “ Miss Barnes has been writing to 
Colonel Lewis.” 

“Who’s he?” 

“ Oh, you know ; he is a sort of cousin, at 
least he is Cousin Mag’s husband and he is our 
guardian, I suppose. He attends to mother’s 
business for her and pays our bills and sends 
us our allowance. What do you suppose she 
can be writing to him about?” 

“ Sending him a bill probably.” 

“ Oh, I hadn’t thought of that. I was afraid 
it was something about Nan. I don’t feel quite 
comfortable about her somehow.” 

“Oh, Nan’s all right. If she left here on 
Friday and reached home Saturday, she will 
probably stay only over Sunday and be 


What Went On at School 219 

back by Monday or Tuesday. I wouldn't 
worry.” 

But I can’t help feeling uneasy. Oh, bother, 
there is Jack calling; she is always wanting 
something.” 

Jack was running along the upper hall calling 
in distressed tones, “ Mary Lee, oh, Mary Lee ! ” 

Her sister went to the door. “ Come in here, 
Jack. What do you want?” 

Big tears were running down Jack’s cheeks 
and she was in a state of great excitement. 
“Oh, Mary Lee, Mary Lee,” she repeated, 
“ come with me and tell them it isn’t so. They 
are talking about my Nan, and they aren’t 
going to let her come back, and they are say- 
ing things that aren’t so. Nan didn’t break 
the record ; I did it, and I know she wouldn’t 
do any one mean.” 

“ Goodness, Jack, what are you talking 
about?” Both girls put down their work. 
“ Stop crying and tell us what you are trying 
to say,” said Mary Lee. 

Jack choked back her sobs. “ I was in the 
big schoolroom and Miss Barnes was with 
Blue China in the study. I was getting some- 
thing out of my desk, a paper doll one of the 
girls had given me, and I heard Miss Barnes 
talking, talking. I didn’t pay much attention 
at first till I found it was about Nan.” 


220 The Four Corners at School 


** How did you know it was about her?” 

“ I heard them say Nancy, and Miss Barnes 
said, ‘ I ’spected her when she didn’t confess to 
having broken the record, though there was 
some excuse for that and she replaced it right 
away.’ ” 

“ What was it about a record ? I never heard 
anything,” said Mary Lee. 

Jack was too distressed to care for conceal- 
ment now. “I broke one of the phonograph 
records and Nan got another in its place. She 
didn’t tell on me because she was afraid I 
would be blamed ; it was not long after we first 
came.” 

“ Oh, Jack, you were meddling and you had 
been forbidden to touch one.” 

“Yes, I know ; that was just the trouble, but 
I thought it would be all right if Nan got an- 
other. Then Miss Barnes said, ‘ This other 
thing is much worse and I am glad Miss 
Wheeler never saw those verses ; it would have 
hurt her feelings awfully.’ ” 

“ Gracious I ” exclaimed Jo, not noticing that 
it was out of all question to suppose Miss Barnes 
could have said awfully. “What next. Jack?” 

“ I don’t know exactly. I just found out that 
there were some verses that Miss Barnes found 
and that they were about Miss Wheeler. She 
thinks, Miss Barnes does, that Nan wrote them, 


What Went On at School 


221 


because Nan does write verses, you know. 
Miss Barnes said she had talked to Nan and 
Nan said she never wrote them, but she 
wouldn’t tell who did. Miss Barnes said she 
was sure that Nan had done it herself because 
everything pointed that way and that on top of 
that she had run off and she couldn’t allow her 
to come back.” 

Jo sprang to her feet. “ Come with me, 
Jack Corner,” she said gripping the little girl’s 
hand. “ We’ve got to go this minute and set 
this straight. We are the sinners, you and I, 
and dear old Nan has been making a buffer of 
herself for us. We’ve got to own up and not let 
this go on a single minute longer. You needn’t 
come, Mary Lee ; it’s my affair and Jack’s. 
We’ll tell you about it afterward.” She hur- 
ried Jack along the hall and down-stairs to Miss 
Barnes’s study without giving the child time to 
consider. Scarcely waiting for an answer to 
her knock she pushed open the door and went 
in, still holding Jack by the hand. Miss Barnes 
and Mrs. Channing were still in consultation. 

“ We’ve come to make a confession. Miss 
Barnes,” said Jo without preamble. “ There 
has been a big mistake. Nan didn’t write 
those verses about Miss Wheeler, and she 
didn’t break the phonograph record, either, but 
she was too white to tell on any one.” 


222 The Four Corners at School 


‘‘Why, Josephine!” Miss Barnes looked 
from one of the pair to the other. “ Are you 
sure you can prove what you say ? ” 

“Yes, I can. I can prove it by any girl in 
this house. One day we girls were all talking 
nonsense and I said I had heard that Miss 
Wheeler had a beau and it was Dr. Foster, 
then just for fun, on the spur of the moment, I 
made up some nonsense about it, and pre- 
tended I was going to send it to Miss Wheeler. 
I didn't really mean to do it, though just then I 
would like to have, for I was mad at her for 
piling on the agony in my Latin. What makes 
you think Nan wrote them, Miss Barnes ? ” 

“ I saw her drop them from a book on her 
way to class,” returned Miss Barnes. “ I knew 
she had been having some trouble with her 
mathematics, and when I picked up the paper 
addressed to Miss Wheeler I naturally thought 
they were from Nancy’s pen, knowing her 
facility for making rhymes. Moreover as the 
verses were typewritten I ascribed them to her, 
as she is the only one of you who has a type- 
writing machine.” 

“ I copied them on Nan’s typewriter. She is 
always so generous about letting the girls use 
it. I suppose I must have dropped the verses 
and she picked them up. I am always drop- 
hing things and stuffing them into places where 


What Went On at School 223 

they don’t belong. I didn’t think about them 
afterward and Nan never breathed a word to 
me about it.” 

“ It was only yesterday that it occurred,” 
said Miss Barnes. “ I am very, very sorry, 
Josephine. I have unwittingly accused Nancy 
unjustly and all on account of your thought- 
lessness and unkindness. I was greatly an- 
noyed, I must confess, for I would not have 
had Miss Wheeler see the verses for the world, 
and in my first heat of indignation I was 
probably more hasty than I should have been.” 

Oh, Miss Wheeler wouldn’t have seen 
them,” said Jo. “I hadn’t an idea of really 
sending them to her and I just stuck the paper 
in one of my books to show some of the girls 
at recess.” 

Would you have done that ? ” 

“ Why, certainly. Why, Miss Barnes, all the 
girls do and say foolish things that don’t mean 
anything at all. We get mad with a teacher 
for something and write all sorts of horrid 
things about her, then we feel better. It really 
doesn’t amount to anything. Nobody is hurt ; 
we work off our mad that way, and that is the 
end of it. Didn’t you ever do it when you were 
a girl ? ” 

** I don’t remember that I did.” 

‘‘ Then you were different from most girls.” 


224 The Four Corners at School 

Jo was nothing if not bold. “ You see you just 
happened to get hold of this particular piece of 
foolishness and that is where the trouble is. If 
you had not seen it there would have been 
no harm done ; all of us would have forgotten 
about it by now. I acknowledge that I wrote a 
little more hatefully than girls generally do, but 
it was so easy to write that way, and I enjoyed 
letting off my steam. If I had known what 
would come of it, I would rather have cut off 
my right hand than to have Nan Corner 
suffer.” 

Miss Barnes looked uneasy. Jo’s outspoken 
truths did make her feel that she had been over- 
particular and quite too hasty. 

“ Now,” continued Jo brightly, “ just say what 
is the damage and I’ll face the music. What 
shall I do ? Translate a page of Latin ? Take 
an extra study hour every day for a week? 
Pile on the demerits or what ? Nothing I can 
do will make up to Nan, and, as I see it, nobody 
else has suffered.” 

“ That is quite true,” Miss Barnes murmured. 
“ Suppose we take the Latin, Josephine, since 
the verses were directed against your Latin 
teacher.” 

“ But she’ll know then, won’t she ? that I’ve 
done something she ought to be offended about. 
It wouldn’t do to let her suspect, would it ? ” 


What Went On at School 225 

“ Probably not. Then let us add to your 
study period, half an hour each day for a 
week.” 

“ All right. That is settled. Now, what 
about Jack?” 

“ Jack ? What do you mean ? ” 

“ She broke the record, you know, and Nan 
replaced it. She didn’t want her little sister to 
get into trouble and so she let you think she 
did it. Good old Nan.” 

“ Dear me, Josephine.” Miss Barnes looked 
doubly distressed. “ Have I another mistake 
to correct ? ” 

“ Here, Jack, tell her about it,” said Jo, 
turning to her companion, and Jack faltered 
out her tale, ending plaintively with : “ Nan 
always helps me out of scrapes, and I didn’t 
think it v/ould make any difference after you 
had the new record.” 

‘‘ But you knew you were disobedient ? ” 

“ Yes, I knew, because I was so scared. I’m 
not nearly so scared now and I’ll do anything 
for the sake of having Nan all right. What 
shall I do. Miss Barnes ? I’m awfully sorry and 
I haven’t touched a record since.” 

“ I don’t think an added half hour to your 
studies will hurt you, Jacqueline, so you shall 
receive the same punishment that Josephine 
does. Thank you both for coming to me, and 


226 The Four Corners at School 


confessing so candidly. I have only to say 
that I wish I had known all this before so that 
I might not have made the mistake I did.” 

“ Are you going to punish yourself, too ? ” 
asked Jack with the funny little look which no 
one but Jack could give. 

“ I have already punished myself very 
severely,” said Miss Barnes gravely, “and I 
have further amends to make to Nancy. To be 
sure she did wrong in going away in this 
sudden manner, but after all there was great 
provocation and I am ready to forgive her, if 
she will forgive me.” 

“ She just had to go. Miss Barnes,” said Jack. 
“Why, just think, Unc’ Landy toted us every- 
where when we were babies and Jean and I 
cried like everything when we had to say good- 
bye to him. Now he is dying it would be cruel 
if he could not have one of us there. You 
wouldn^t like not to have any of your family 
with you then, would you ? ” 

“ But, my dear, he is only a servant, a negro, 
and you are not one of his family.” 

“ Oh, yes, we are, for he cares much more for 
us than he does for his own people. He bangs 
Mitty about awfully, she is his granddaughter, 
you know, but he would let us walk over him 
and there isn’t anything he wouldn’t do for 
any of us. He loved our papa, too, and that 


What Went On at School 227 

is one reason he loves us so much. He prom- 
ised papa, when papa was dying, that he would 
never leave us. Oh, Miss Barnes, Nan just 
had to go.” 

Although these sentiments were not wholly 
appreciated by Miss Barnes, she realized that 
Nan’s call was one the girl did not feel that 
she could disobey, and she promised to 
write to Nan that very day that she might 
know she was no longer under a cloud. So 
Josephine and Jack took their departure well 
pleased. 

“ We got away easy, I think,” said Jo. “ But 
when I consider how it might have gone on 
and no one ever have known what the trouble 
was it makes me wild. We didn’t tell Miss 
Barnes how we found out, and it is just as well 
she didn’t ask, for eavesdropping, you know. 
Jack, isn’t considered very proper.” 

It is true that this part of the matter never 
came up, and so chance favored Jack this 
time. “ It will be a lesson to me,” said Miss 
Barnes to her sister, “ but the circumstances 
all pointed to Nancy as the culprit, and I tried 
to keep the matter as secret as possible. She 
is a chivalrous, high-strung girl, I see now, 
and no doubt she has suffered keenly. I ought 
to have been more tolerant of schoolgirl folly, 
for I am learning every day that we cannot 


228 The Four Corners at School 


take such things too seriously. I am afraid we 
are too serious sometimes, Hannah.” 

“ I don’t see how one can be too serious,” 
returned Mrs. Channing primly. You must 
do your dooty toward these charges placed in 
your care, no matter how unpleasant it may 
be at times, and I think you were perfectly 
right to consider this a very serious thing. I 
hope you will not grow light-minded as you 
grow older, Louisa.” 

“ I hope I shall grow more charitable,” re- 
turned Miss Barnes with a little sigh. 

Both Jo’s Latin and Jack’s geography bene- 
fited by their added half hour of study and Nan 
rose to be a heroine in the eyes of at least six of 
the boarders, for it goes without saying that such 
an exciting theme was not allowed to go to 
waste, but was made the subject of talk for 
many days. Daniella, Charlotte, Josephine and 
Nan’s sister raised her to an honorable station 
while she was mourning her lowly place with 
great humility. 

True to her word Miss Barnes wrote the letter 
which did Nan more good than all the doctor’s 
visits. It was a dignified apology and the 
writer begged that Nan would not consider her- 
self under censure because of her hasty depar- 
ture. If her guardian approved. Miss Barnes 
would overlook the sudden escape, if Nan 


What Went On at School 229 

would make up the studies she had missed in 
her absence. 

And so at the end of a week Nan went back 
again, yet not at all realizing that she was to 
receive the welcome given one returning from 
victorious battle. One might almost say that 
she was met with flags flying and a band of 
music, for when she reached the station there 
were all the boarders lined up, with a number 
of the day scholars, and they greeted her so 
vociferously that the passengers in the out-mov- 
ing train looked from the windows to see what 
it was all about. 

“We are so glad to have you back again, 
Nan, you dear old creature,” cried Mary Lee. 
“ There, Jack, don’t hug her to death ; we want 
a little of her to take back with us.” 

“You don’t look very well. Nan,” said Char- 
lotte solicitously. 

“ I haven’t been,” returned Nan, “ but I am all 
right now.” 

“ It was a long journey for you to take 
alone,” remarked Abby. 

“ I wasn’t alone all the way, for a cousin of 
ours came as far as New York with me and I 
stopped over night with the Pinckneys, so to- 
day has been the only really tiresome part. It 
does seem good to see you all, and I am 
actually glad to get back.” 


230 The Four Corners at School 

“ I like to hear you say that,” this from 
Daniella. “ It hasn’t seemed the same since you 
went away.” 

“ Is Unc’ Landy really dead ? ” queried Jean. 

“ Don’t talk about that, Jean,” reproved Mary 
Lee. Of course he is. Let’s talk about some- 
thing pleasant. Did you have a good time in 
New York, Nan ? ” 

“ I didn’t try to do anything but rest. Of 
course I loved being with dear Mr. St. Nick and 
Miss Dolores.” 

“ How is Christine ? ” asked Jack. 

“ Doing finely. The doctor thinks she can be 
nearly, if not entirely, cured.” 

“ Oh, good ! good I ” cried the twins in 
chorus. “ What a lot you will have to tell us. 
Nan.” 

“ Don’t bother her to death with questions.” 
Mary Lee was most solicitous. “There is 
plenty of time and she can’t tell it all at once. 
You must remember that she hasn’t been well 
and that she is very tired.” 

Thus reminded the twins subsided and Nan 
with her escort was brought safely to the door 
of the Wadsworth school. 

Miss Barnes was there to meet her. She 
came swiftly forward, grasped both of Nan’s 
hands and kissed her lightly on the cheek. 
“ Welcome back, my dear,” she said. “ Come 


What Went On at School 


231 


right in. You must be cold. Mrs. Channing 
has a cup of hot chocolate for you in the sitting- 
room.” 

This coming back was all so different from 
what Nan had pictured that the tears sprang to 
her eyes, and because she was still unnerved, 
they would not be controlled. 

Miss Barnes patted her kindly on the arm 
whispering : “ It is all right, Nancy. I was 

most to blame and I am so very sorry.” 

This was too much for Nan ; her head went 
down on her teacher’s shoulder and she cried 
softly for a few minutes. Miss Barnes’s arms 
around her. “ I am a goose,” said Nan pres- 
ently, wiping away her tears. “ It’s nothing 
but nerves. Miss Barnes. I am all right now.” 
And they w^ent together into the sitting-room 
where Mrs. Channing and Miss Wheeler were 
both waiting with words of greeting, and the 
steaming chocolate. 

Later on there was a gathering of the girls 
in the Corners’ room where the chafing-dish 
came into service, and where unlimited supplies 
of fudge, cakes, olives and other things were 
consumed. It was long after nine o’clock 
when the girls dispersed, but Miss Barnes meet- 
ing them in the hall on the way to their rooms, 
only smiled and wished them a cheerful good- 
night. 



4 






















^■ OV^- 




i 


\ 

. ^ 



% 



,'> , v 



I 


I 

ir 

'. f 

^ 

. i 


« 

A 

' <* « 

' 

* t 


‘i ' . 

■' . . 


r ^ . 
‘ •-•, 


■ « 

I ' 

.* « 

r 


• ' • '. ( 


I > 


/ 






• J 


/ 

f 


\ . 


/ 


» 




I 


t 


9 


I 


1 


f 


V 




* 


/ 




J 



* 


\ 

i 

i 

j 

* 

\ 


\ 



\ 


* 


\ 


L' 


I 



T 



CHAPTER XII 


LIMERICKS 

The next day Nan and Miss Barnes had a 
long talk, and parted with mutual respect ; in- 
deed, ever after there was a better understand- 
ing between these two, and the girls teased Nan 
by calling her : “ teacher’s pet,” although there 
was scarce one who was not glad of the new 
relations. Nan now applied herself harder 
than ever to her studies in order to make up for 
lost time, and because the half-yearly examina- 
tions were near at hand. Her cousin. Ran 
Gordon, had explained so clearly to her some 
knotty points in her mathematics that she took 
up her work in this class with new interest, and 
quite surprised Miss Wheeler by her intelligent 
understanding. 

She was hard at work one afternoon when 
Josephine and Charlotte pounced upon her. 
“ Put up your books, you greasy grind,” cried 
Jo. “We are all worn out with thinking of 
exams and we want some light and refreshing 
entertainment. Come along. Nan, and help us 
to do something silly. I have been serious all 
day and I can’t stand it any longer.” 


236 The Four Corners at School 

“ What do you want to do ? ” asked Nan her 
fingers still keeping place in the half closed 
book. “ I ought to be studying my German. 
I have been working so hard for a record in 
math, that I am neglecting my Deutsches 
Buchr 

“ To the dogs with your old Dutch.” Jo 
snatched the book from Nan’s hand and flung 
it on the bed. “ This climate is getting into 
your system, and you’ll soon have a Puritan 
conscience the size of Lizzie’s. Live up to the 
reputation of your cavalier ancestors and have 
a good time. You all didn’t have Blue Laws 
but I don’t see but that your morals are just as 
good as ” 

“Take care,” interrupted Nan, “or you will 
have Charlotte on the defensive. What do 
you propose doing, may I ask ? ” 

“ Oh, I thought we’d make panuchee and 
limericks over in our room. Mary Lee and 
Danny have gone for the peanuts and sugar ; 
they will be back presently. Come on over.” 

“ Panuchee and ” said Nan doubtfully. 

“ Limericks. Oh, you blessed old dear, don’t 
look like that. I forgot that last rh3^ming at- 
tempt of mine, but we don’t intend to do up 
the teachers this go, we are going to hack at 
each other. I think it will be fun. I am dead 
sick of acute angles and hypothenuses, or 


Limericks 


237 


noses, or whatever they are. I want some- 
thing as frivolous as possible. Come, Nan.’^ 

Nan looked at Charlotte. “What do you 
say, Charley ? ” 

“ Oh, Fm in for it. I have studied till my 
brains feel like whipped cream, and I think it 
will do us good. Nan. You’ll have to come ; 
we can’t get along without you.” 

So Nan decided that she must go where 
pleasure led this time, and the three went out. 
Nan between the other two clasping her waist. 
It was good to be popular, she thought, and 
after all she would have missed much if she had 
not returned to school. 

“ You get the chafing-dish ready, Charley,” 
suggested Jo when they were ready to begin 
their frolic. “ I’ll go hunt up the other girls. 
The twinnies and Hermione will prefer their 
own plays no doubt ; we’ll give them some 
panuchee after a while. I think we’d all better 
take a hand at shelling the peanuts so as to get 
them done in a jiffy.” 

The girls had their own store of utensils, 
chafing-dish, pans, pitcher, cups, plates, etc., 
for many a feast was prepared in these upper 
rooms, the more secret the better. Jo skurried 
off to find Abby, Frances and Elizabeth while 
Charlotte and Nan began preparations. Mary 
Lee and Daniella were back before Jo re- 


238 The Four Corners at School 

turned, and all four set to work on the peanuts. 
They were soon joined by the others and all 
squatted on the floor, each taking a hand in the 
work. 

“The sooner we get through," said Nan, 
“ the quicker arrives the reward." 

“We can begin on the limericks while the 
stuff is cooking," said Jo, “and the one who 
gets her limerick done first shall have the 
biggest piece of the candy." 

“ Tm afraid I shall get none at all," said 
Daniella, “ for I couldn’t do what you do, to 
save me." 

“Yes, you can," insisted Jo. “They’re easy 
enough once you get started. There doesn’t 
have to be any sense in them ; in fact the sillier 
the better.’’" But Daniella was satisfied that 
she could not take part in this exercise, and 
made an excuse to leave the room before any 
one began to write. 

“ If it were night we might tell ghost stories," 
said Nan. 

“ We’ll do that when it gets dark," returned 
Jo. 

“ Nan’s tales are always so blood-curdling," 
remarked Elizabeth, “ they scare me to death. 
I got to thinking about one of them the other 
night and I nearly had hysterics." 

“ I should think you did," put in Abby. 


Limericks 


239 

** She thought there was some one in the room 
and I was on the point of going for Daniella’s 
pistol.” 

” Speaking of pistols,” said Nan, '' you should 
see Daniella shoot ; she hits the bull’s-eye every 
time, and how she can ride ! ” 

“ It is too bad her varied accomplishments 
have so little play here,” said Frances sarcastic- 
ally. The breach between herself and Daniella 
had never been healed. 

” They’ll have play enough when she gets out 
into the world,” remarked Jo. “ Didn’t you tell 
me. Nan, that Mr. Scott intended to send 
Daniella abroad to finish her education? Can’t 
you see her riding down Rotten Row with every 
one looking at her and saying, ‘There goes 
the beautiful American heiress ’ ? ” 

If there was one thing above another which 
Frances desired it was to go abroad, and there 
seemed little chance of it, as her mother feared 
to cross the ocean, and her father declared that 
Frances should not go without her mother. 
“American heiresses are very common abroad,” 
said Frances. “ I don’t believe any one who 
had no social position would be noticed over 
there, anyhow.” 

“ Oh, get out with your social positions,” ex- 
claimed Jo roughly. “Money will buy any- 
thing over there as well as here, and Daniella 


240 The Four Corners at School 

will look as patrician as the best when she gets 
dressed up in Paris clothes.” 

“You know it was Jo who married her to the 
prince,” put in Charlotte laughing. “ Those 
nuts ready, girls ? It’s time to put them in.” 

“ I think they are plenty fine enough,” said 
Jo with a final stroke of her chopper. “ Where 
are the pans ? ” 

“ I buttered them and put them over there,” 
Nan told her. “ I hope no one is sitting on them.” 

“ Let us hope not. No, Frances has just 
escaped. Now then, start up the limericks, 
girls, while this stuff is cooling. Mary Lee, 
you go tell Danny that we’ll let her off from the 
limerick if she will tell us a story of some western 
adventure ; she can do that like a breeze, and 
we want her here.” Jo felt very sure that 
Frances was quite as well satisfied to have 
Daniella left out of the fun, but she did not 
mean this to be. 

By the time Mary Lee had returned from her 
errand, bringing Daniella with her. Nan was 
ready with the first limerick. “ Mine’s finished,” 
she cried. 

“Good for you!” cried Jo, clapping her 
hands. “Miss Nancy Corner, first prize. Let’s 
hear it. Nan.” 

“ Read it out, read it out,” cried the others. 

So Nan read : 


Limericks 


241 


** A New England maiden named Lizzie, 
Concluded it well to get busy ; 

When all else would fail her 
With texts she’d regale her 
Then scour her conscience till dizzy.” 

There was great applause, for Elizabeth was 
given to much quoting of texts, her father being 
a clergyman, and she had a way of soberly 
” examining her conscience ” as she called it, 
which the others thought a little forced, since 
the result did not seem to make her any better 
than her companions. 

” I think it is fine,” declared Jo ; ” I shall 
never do half as well.” 

” Stop talking,” said Charlotte ; ” you confuse 
my ideas.” 

Jo returned to her task, murmuring, ” ese, 
knees, sees.” 

” Oh, do please do it to yourself, Jo,” begged 
Abby. ” I can’t think when you whisper so 
loud.” So Jo subsided. 

Charlotte was the next one to announce a 
conclusion and read out : 

** There was a young lady named Nanny 
Who told tales so very uncanny 
That we rose in the night 
Our souls filled with fright. 

And fled for protection to Danny.” 


242 The Four Corners at School 

“ That’s good I ” cried Nan when the clap- 
ping of hands had ceased. ‘‘ Keep it up, Char- 
lotte, and you may be a contributor to the 
Atlantic Monthly yet.’* 

“ Fancy the editor of the Atlantic hearing 
you say that,” remarked Frances contemptu- 
ously. 

“ My dear girl, I didn’t say you might be a 
contributor. I mentioned Charlotte,” returned 
Nan. 

“ Oh, quit your sparring and listen to mine,” 
said Jo. ‘‘ Here you are, Frances.” 

An elegant person named Fraunces 
Refused all her chaunces for daunces ; 

She’s so Bostonese 

That no one can please 

This particular wall-flower, Fraunces.” 

Frances looked rather scornful and some- 
what annoyed. She was not popular at the 
little gatherings to which the girls had been 
invited, and she felt the sting of Jo’s rhymes 
which the others applauded. 

” I have another ready,” said Nan, ” but as it 
is about Jean, I will wait till she comes in. 
Who’s the next ? ” 

” I’m nearly ready,” said Elizabeth, ” but I am 
cudgeling my brains for one word to fit into 
the last line. Let some one else go ahead.” 


Limericks 


H3 


‘‘Any one before Lizzie asked Nan. 

“ Mine’s done,” cried Mary Lee. 

“ Out with it,” said Jo, and Mary Lee read ; 

** A Puritan maiden called Abby, 

Encountered a chimney-sweep shabby. 

* I think it’s my dooty 
To say that you’re sooty,’ 

Remarked this good maiden called Abby.” 

The applause from the Southern side of the 
house was louder than from the Northern, and 
before it was over Elizabeth announced that 
she had found her word. 

“But if I had known what Mary Lee was 
doing I would have tried to fire some shot into 
the Southern ranks,” she said. 

“ Fire away,” cried Nan ; “ we won’t run.” 

“Too late now,” returned Elizabeth. “ I 
could never do another.” 

“ It’s a habit that grows on you,” remarked 
Jo. “I have started a second one but it will 
keep. Give us yours, Lizzie.” 

Thus encouraged Elizabeth read : 

** A girl that we like to call Charley 
Stops always to argue and parley; 

Your statements you’ll prove 

Or you cannot move 

An inch from her arguments, Charley. “ 


244 The Four Corners at School 

That’s pretty good,” criticised Nan. “ I 
should call this game Honesty, it seems to me, 
for we are getting hard truths all around. You 
look pleased, Jo. Have we the honor of includ- 
ing a future Mrs. Browning among our class- 
mates? What is your effusion? I see that 
you are dying to show it off.” 

“ That’s all right,” said Jo nothing abashed, 
think it’s pretty good, if I do say it as 
shouldn’t. It combines subtle reproof with 
obvious compliment.” 

“ Whewee 1 ” exclaimed Daniella, “ what 
fine sentences Jo is getting off. I could never 
say such things if I read Addison all my life.” 

“We were brought up on Addison,” re- 
marked Nan. “ I used to pore over the Sir 
Roger de Coverly papers till I knew them by 
heart, but I am afraid I didn’t profit by it as 
much as I might have done.” 

“ Really, did you read Addison before you 
came here?” asked Frances with her little 
supercilious air. “ I always thought, in fact, 
I have always heard that Southern girls were 
very superficial and frivolous, and not well 
educated at all.” 

Nan flushed up and a glance passed between 
her and Jo that betokened battle. “ I don’t 
think we pin on our knowledge as they seem 
to do up here,” said Nan. “ It so often seems 


Limericks 


HS 


a sort of extra trimming. I must say I have 
never heard education discussed at home quite 
in the way it is here, either. We take it for 
granted that a lady is an educated person, and 
I don’t know a house among those we visit, 
that hasn’t a good library which has been in use 
for generations. We don’t think it is necessary 
to have all the bindings alike, I admit, and I 
never saw any shelves stuffed out with sham 
books.” 

“That’s right. Nan, run up the flag,” cried 
Jo. “ Hurrah for old Verginny I All my for- 
bears came from there.” 

“So I should judge,” remarked Frances in 
her most sarcastic tones. 

Here Jo fired up. “Just what do you mean 
by that ? ” she asked. 

“ Here ! Here I ” Charlotte rapped for 
order. “ Stop right here, you fighters. You 
are spoiling all our fun. No matter who is 
right or who is wrong ; we are only girls and 
can’t vote or do anything much to alter con- 
ditions, and I say we stop this. The first one 
that dares to carry on the dispute will be 
ignominiously turned out of this happy com- 
pany and I’ll be the one to do it.” 

“Try it,” said Nan defiantly. “You can’t 
alter facts, Jo, and who cares, anyhow, what 
the opinions of some people are ; they are 


246 The Four Corners at School 

beneath notice. The only opinions that are 
worth anything ” 

“ Take care/’ warned Charlotte, “ or you will 
be on the other side of the door, Nan.” 

“ I’d like to see you put me there,” returned 
Nan, but she laughed as she said it and the 
rest discreetly kept silence. 

“We are waiting to hear Jo’s effusion,” said 
Charlotte. “ Favor us. Miss Keyes.” 

Seeing that this would be the best way to 
clear the atmosphere, Jo did not hesitate to 
give her limerick : 

“ A girl with the cognomen Dan 
Said, ‘ ril do the best that I can,* 

But when we began 
To plan, Dan ran ; 

No man can run faster than Dan.’* 

“ Bravo,” cried Charlotte. “ That’s good, 
Jo. You’re in one, Danny, for Jo has written 
two and we can count one for you.” 

“ But she is to tell us a story of Western ad- 
venture,” said Jo. 

“ So she is. We’ll have that later. Any- 
body else who hasn’t come up to time ? How 
about you, Abby? Your county hasn’t been 
heard from. I see you have something 
modestly withheld. Let it behold the light of 
day.” 



Jo Sprang to Her Feet, Bowing Right and Left 




^ ' 'a ■ 

>-- , ' .r 'ii 

fi;^v,'- '..«|*'^«v‘ ••.'f < 


I jS P ^.- ■ »•■. ^ .9-iT' aii -.B m ■.,.••:> • ,..|i! 

^ ' jSfi ^ <s - ^ 1 .^ ' 

✓ UVi*' ,_/* * * * % -*■'•■ 

•w ; JTl% ♦ ** ♦ 'sx ^ ’ *• . * ?^ * f 

* • A *. ■ “ 


B 



V • 


■•?■. 


f‘\u 


/ •' 






2g; .'iv f,*'5f ‘x? < , 




i 


it-^ 




p' 


^<iy 




^i. 




.■i. 


Ml. 


|^_A 


I' * 


A: 


« • 


rV 


'V 




,cr 


“. I 


4 'V 


>?V 


a^t 




'If 






» % 




icW •^. «. irNj> 



Limericks 


247 

Abby blushed and stammered, “It isn^t 
nearly so good as the others.” 

“ Tve no doubt it’s better. Let us be the 
judges.” 

“ Oh, I hate to read it before everybody.” 

“ You’d suppose there were at least two 
hundred of us. Give it to me.” Charlotte held 
out her hand. “You might retire behind the 
screen, if you can’t face this august company. 
It must be something rather terrible.” 

“It isn’t that, but ” Abby timidly held 

out the paper. “ Read it if you want to,” and 
she sat very red of face while Charlotte read : 

** A Westerner, soubriquet Jo, 

Is not one that you could call slow 
She’s breezy and slangy 
Loud-voiced and haranguey 
But what would we do without Jo? “ 

The reading was followed by great applause. 
“ You’ve hit it exactly,” cried the girls. 
“ What would we do without Jo ? 

“ Ladies, you embarrass me,” cried Jo with 
mock modesty. 

“ Speech ! Speech ! ” came from one after 
another and Jo sprang to her feet, bowing right 
and left. 

“In introducing this youthful poet to this 
distinguished audience,” she began clasping 


V 


248 The Four Corners at School 

the blushing Abby’s hand and saying in an 
aside : “ Get up, goosey ! ’’ — “ I feel that I have 

a double duty to perform. First I must offer my 
personal thanks for her beautiful tribute to my 
unworthy self, and secondly I must call your 
attention to the salient points of her exquisite 
ode. Ahem I Let us dissect it. ‘ A Westerner I ’ 
What does that suggest to you ? A wild-haired 
person in cowboy attire. Do I wear cowboy 
attire? Nay, I do not because I am a girl. 
Nevertheless the subtle suggestion remains, and 
I might wear it if I had nothing else. ‘ Soubri- 
quet Jo.’ Again we are reminded of Bret 
Hartian — how’s that for a word ? — Bret Hartian 
heroes, but alas, I am no hero, and I shall never 
be a heroine for I have a turned up nose. 
What’s the next line ? Oh, thanks, Charley. 
‘ Is not one that you could call slow.’ I am not 
slow. No, thank heaven, I am not. I leave 
that quality to others of a more deliberate and 
cautious temperament, some whom I could 
mention but refrain from so doing. Neither 
am I fast, at least I have never been accused of 
it. If I were a spiritualist I might be called a 
happy medium, but as I am — what do I hear ? 
A Mormon ? — Prove it who can. But as I am 
simply a plain ordinary, red white and blue, 
every-day girl, I shall announce that I am run- 
ning at a normal speed. I don’t jump hurdles ; 


Limericks 


249 

no one ever betted on my running powers, but 
I think ril get there in due course of time. 

* She’s breezy and slangy,’ ” Jo again read from 
the paper. “ Breezy is rather nice. I’d rather 
stir up things than let them stagnate ; as to “ 
slangy ; I like slang better than gossip or than 
backbiting and insinuating, so I bow to the 
compliment,” again a bow to Abby. “ ‘ Loud- 
voiced and haranguey.’ Would I whisper? 
Nay, nay. Would I squeak? Nay again. 
Would I be silent when occasion like the 
present calls me to address you ? A thousand 
times Nay.” She took a long breath and gazed 
absorbedly at her hearers. 

“ Before these final words, ladies, I feel my- 
self abashed. Also and likewise I feel inclined 
to weep, for well I know what you would do 
without Jo. You would get along uncom- 
monly well and forget her in six months. And 
now thanking you for your breathless attention, 

I once again present to you the coming poet of 
America, Miss Abigail Ann Russel, for whom I 
ask three cheers.” 

The cheers went up but the applause was 
all for Jo, who bowing with hand on heart, 
backed behind the bed and suddenly dropped 
down out of sight. 

When the laughter had subsided Nan hap- 
pened to glance at Frances who was sitting 


250 The Four Corners at School 

apart, paper in hand, with an injured expression 
on her face. “ Why,” exclaimed Nan, “ Frances 
hasn’t read hers. Read it, Frances.” 

Up went Frances’ eyebrows. “Oh, if you 
think it worth while,” she began. 

“Certainly it’s worth while. Why didn’t 
you speak up ? ” 

“I supposed if any one cared to hear it I 
would be invited to make the contribution.” 

“ Oh, bother your contributions and things,” 
exclaimed Jo, who had emerged from behind the 
bed. “Don’t be so difficult, Frank. You 
know you didn’t have it ready till just now, so 
don’t put on that injured look. Hurry up or 
there’ll be no time for the candy. It is quite 
cold now.” 

So Frances with an air of indifference began : 

** There is a young person, M. L., 

Who is pretty enough for a belle ; 

With a neat little nose. 

And cheeks like a rose. 

But — the rest we’d better not tell.“ 

“ I think myself the rest is better not told,” 
remarked Jo. “ If we told all we knew, you 
mightn’t be pleased the next time Louise gives 
a dance.” For the fact was that Mary Lee had 
been quite the most admired of Louise Bar- 
nett’s guests at a recent party, and Frances had 


Limericks 


251 

declared her forward and affected, neither of 
which things Mary Lee was, so the girls thought 
that in this instance Frances would have been 
wiser not to bring up the subject again since 
she herself had not been asked for more than 
two dances. 

The applause following this limerick was 
short and not very hearty, and Mary Lee was 
the only one who gave a word of praise. 

There were three more limericks ready but 
as the younger girls were the subjects of these 
it was decided to wait till they came in before 
reading them. Then the candy was brought 
in, and the girls fell upon it with schoolgirl 
eagerness so that the supply rapidly disap- 
peared. 

“ Let us take some in to Miss Wheeler,** 
suddenly suggested Jo, who, since she had 
heard of this teacher*s heroic efforts to help her 
mother and sisters, was an ardent partisan of 
the formerly despised person. The girls all 
agreed with Jo and she went off with a plate of 
the candy ; then the twins came in with Her- 
mione to receive their share. 

“ You* 11 have to take the limericks with the 
candy,** said Nan. ** We have one for each of 
you. ril read mine first : 

** A sweet little creature named Jean, 

Once went to call on a creen, 


252 The Four Corners at School 

But, wasn’t it creer, 

That when she came near, 

'Twas not only the room that was green ? ” 

The girls all set up a laugh at this for there 
was not one who had not heard of Jean’s esca- 
pade, but Jean looked rather abashed. “ You’re 
always making fun of me. Nan,” she said. 

“We’ve all been making fun of each other 
this afternoon,” Nan told her. “That is what 
limericks are for. Jack has one, too. Char- 
lotte wrote it. Let us have it, Charley.” 

Charlotte produced her paper and began : 

“There is a small girlie named Jack, 

Who has a most uncommon knack 
Of getting in scrapes. 

But always escapes 

From having a record that’s black.” 

Jack grinned. She recognized the truth and 
appreciated it. Hermione’s limerick was of 
Nan’s composition and made the quiet little 
girl herself smile, for the name her housemates 
had given her was the Mouse. 

“A little mouse, Hermione D., 

Crept out of her house after tea ; 

A pussy-cat saw her. 

And lest it should claw her. 

Straight back again crept Hermy D.” 


Limericks 


253 


This last limerick had been read through 
when Jo returned quite excited. “ I’ve some- 
thing to tell you girls,” she said. “ Run out, 
little kitties. Give them their candy, girls.” 
She filled their hands with the sweets, and 
though they were loth to depart, having 
scented a secret, they knew there was no pro- 
testing against the older girls’ decree and so 
they went. 



« 


r 

-# 




« 









• i 






A 






V 








I t 
/ 


t 

» 

V' 


{ 

• i 





'. I . 


k 


i 


I 








CHAPTER XIII 


A ROMANCE 

As soon as the three younger girls had left 
the room, Jo carefully shut and locked the door. 
“ Girls,” she exclaimed, “ I have had the love- 
liest time in Miss WheelePs room, and what do 
you think? She is really going to marry Dr. 
Foster ; she showed me the ring.” 

Exclamations from the interested group 
around her, then, “ Do tell us about it, Jo.” 

There was nothing Jo desired more to do, so 
she settled herself on the divan, pounded a 
couple of pillows into shape and stuffed them 
behind her head, curled up her feet and was 
ready to begin. The other girls grouped 
themselves around her as accommodations 
afforded more or less comfortable seats, Char- 
lotte in the Morris chair with a girl perched 
on each of its arms, Daniella and Nan on the 
floor, Mary Lee on the divan by Jo, Frances in 
the one rocking-chair. 

“ Girls,” began Jo, “ you wouldn^t believe it, 
but she was really human. She was pleased 


258 The ‘Four Corners at School 

as Punch at my taking in the candy and sent 
her thanks to you all. While I was standing 
there, I caught sight of a photograph of Dr. 
Foster on the bureau and when she saw me 
looking at it I wish you could have beheld her 
blush.” 

“ Now, Jo,” put in Nan, “ that is a little too 
much for you to expect us to believe. Of 
course it makes your story sound better, 
but ” 

“ She actually did,” protested Jo. ” Hope I 
may never, if she didn’t. Of course we have 
none of us seen her when she had occasion to 
do such a thing before. One can’t look senti- 
mental over x+y and unknown quantities and 
things, but when it comes to talking about one’s 
best beau it is quite different. So, I repeat, 
she blushed, and began to twirl something on 
her finger, looking down at it just as conscious 
as anybody. So I ups and says : ‘ What a 
pretty ring, Miss Wheeler, was it a Christmas 
gift? I haven’t noticed your wearing it be- 
fore.’ ” 

” Oh, Jo, how did you dare ? ” exclaimed 
Abby. 

“Why, bless you, child, she was dying to 
have me notice it, besides, I wanted to find 
out and how can a body learn anything with- 
out asking questions. Where was I ? Oh, yes. 


A Romance 


259 

well, then she said, no it wasn’t a Christmas 
gift, but since I was so interested and would 
have to know before very long anyhow, she 
would tell me that it was her engagement ring, 
and that her engagement to Dr. Foster would 
soon be announced.” 

“ What did you say ? ” asked Mary Lee. 

“ I said : ‘ Congratulations, Miss Wheeler ; I 
am awfully flattered that I am the first of the 
girls to know.’ And please somebody feel if 
the top of my head seems charred, for here 
come in the coal of fire, for what do you think 
she said ? ‘You have been so kind and attentive 
to me lately, Josephine, and have had a smile 
where many would have given a frown, so I 
am glad to let you be the first of the girls to 
hear my news.’ And that after my writing 
those dreadful things that came so near to being 
Nan’s undoing. I declare 1 felt like a hollow 
cheat.” And Jo threw herself over on her side, 
buried her face in the pillows and shook with 
laughter. 

“Yes, you act as if you were greatly morti- 
fied,” said Charlotte. 

“ I don’t see anything to laugh at,” said Eliza- 
beth ; “ I think it was pathetic.” 

“I think it was too funny for words, and 
after I got over the hollow cheat feeling that 
didn’t last more than a minute, I could scarcely 


26 o The Four Corners at School 


keep my face straight. You never did have 
a proper sense of humor, Lizzie Trask.” 

** But I think it was mean to fool her.” 

‘‘Fool her? I didn’t fool her a bit. I was 
awfully glad, of course I was, and I told her so. 
I kissed her, too.” 

“ No ! ” from all the girls. 

“ Um-hm,” Jo nodded, “ I really did, and 
that’s more than any of you ever did. Didn’t 
I tell you she acted real human ? ” 

” Is it a handsome ring?” asked Frances. 

“ Fine. I am sorry for your sake, Frances, 
that I wasn’t told the price. It isn’t the head- 
light kind, but just a pretty clear sparkle, just 
big enough and Miss Wheeler has such pretty 
hands that it looks very well.” 

“ When did you discover that she had pretty 
hands, Jo? ” 

” Some time ago. I got to wondering what 
it was that attracted Dr. Foster, and I began 
to look up her good points ; they are hands, 
teeth, hair, rather a good figure,” Jo counted 
them off on her fingers. “ ‘ That is the outward 
appearance,’ as Blue China would say. As 
for her sterling qualities I have no doubt they 
are many, and as long as she is to give up 
teaching math, I expect she will turn out to be 
a real pleasant sort of somebody. She is turn- 
ing already, if it comes to that, and smole the 


A Romance 261 

sweetest smile when I said I thought Dr. Foster 
was lovely.” 

“ When are they to be married ? ” asked 
Nan. 

“In June, directly after school closes.” 

“ We must give her a linen shower,” said 
Charlotte. 

“For pity’s sake what is that?” asked Jo. 
“ I have heard of showers of frogs and of locusts 
and of red rain, but never of a linen shower. 
How do you manage it ? ” 

“ Poor unenlightened creature,” said Charlotte 
in a pitying tone. “ I suppose you, in the far 
West, never did hear of such a ceremonial. 
It is this way : everybody gives some pretty 
piece of linen for the trousseau or the linen 
chest, and then they give the bride elect a 
luncheon or a tea or something and present her 
with the things.” 

“ Good idea. We’ll do that.” 

“ I wonder if they will go to housekeep- 
ing.” 

“Yes, right away. They will, of course, live 
here where the doctor has his practice.” 

“ Shall we all go over in a body and offer our 
congratulations, or shall we wait till we happen 
to meet her alone ? ” asked Nan. 

“ Oh, I think it would be less embarrassing 
for all to go together,” remarked Abby. 


262 The Four Corners at School 

“ For us, maybe, but not for her,” said Char- 
lotte. 

“ The greatest good to the greatest number,” 
cried Nan. “ Come on, girls, and let’s get it 
over with.” But arriving at Miss Wheeler’s 
room they found her gone, so they retired crest- 
fallen, and consoled themselves with finishing 
the remainder of the candy. 

From this time on, interest in Miss Wheeler 
was great. She never went out but it was sup- 
posedly to walk with her fiance ; she never 
went to the city but the girls imagined she was 
going to buy articles for her trousseau. If she 
looked thoughtful she was thinking of her lover, 
if she were sad they had had a quarrel ; if she 
were severe, she was venting the displeasure 
upon them which properly belonged to Dr. 
Foster, who must have said or done something 
to offend. So was Miss Wheeler’s conduct 
measured by the ups and downs of a love 
affair, and in consequence anything she might 
say or do was excused. 

It was one morning a few weeks after the 
limerick party that the girls so deeply inter- 
ested in Miss Wheeler’s romance received a 
shock. It was Jo’s sharp eyes which discov- 
ered a reason for this teacher’s severity which 
she had somewhat softened of late. It was Jo 
who gathered her cronies into her room and 


A Romance 


263 

under promise of secrecy divulged to them the 
fact that Miss Wheeler’s diamond ring was 
missing from the third finger of her left hand. 

“ Heavens ! Do you suppose she has lost 
it?” exclaimed Mary Lee. 

Nan bestowed upon her a look of withering 
scorn. “No, goosey,” she said, “ of course not ; 
they have quarreled.” 

“Oh I” Mary Lee gave her attention to this 
view of the case. “ How do you know ? ” she 
asked presently. 

“ I don’t know,” replied Nan, “ but I suspect. 
Don’t you know that in books there are always 
lover’s quarrels ? People don’t seem to be able 
to get along without them. Besides, if she had 
lost the ring we would have been told. Every 
one would have been asked to look for it, don’t 
you see ? ” 

“Astute Nan,” cried Charlotte. “I was in- 
clined to be of Mary Lee’s opinion at first, but 
now I see that yours is the best guess.” 

“ Don’t you suppose they will make up ? ” 
asked Abby anxiously ; “ they always do in 
stories.” 

“ They don’t always in real life,” vouchsafed 
Frances. “ I had a cousin who didn’t.” 

“What did she do? Pine away?” asked 
Nan eagerly. 

“ No, she married another man.” 


264 The Four Corners at School 

The girls giggled. “ That is a blow to your 
theory, Abby,” said Charlotte. 

“ But I don’t suppose there is another man 
who would marry Miss Wheeler,” remarked 
Mary Lee innocently, “ so what’s she to 
do?” 

Another chorus of giggles from the girls ; 
they were just of the giggling age. 

“ Give it up,” said Nan. “ I don’t see that 
we can do anything about it, anyhow.” 

“ Maybe we can,” said Jo. “ Anyhow, I am 
going to keep my eyes open for a day or two. 
If the ring does not reappear, and if Miss 
Wheeler keeps on looking like that ” 

“And acting like that,” put in Nan. 

“Yes, if all that keeps up, something has got 
to be done. Dr. Foster always walks home 
with her from church on Sundays, and comes 
in the evening ; if that doesn’t happen next 
Sunday, then ” 

“ What ? ” chorused the girls. 

“ See me performing the part of a friend.” 

“ What are you going to do ? ” 

“ No matter ; just you wait.” 

On Sunday the girls who attended the Con- 
gregational church reported that Dr. Foster did 
not walk home with Miss Wheeler; that she 
passed him at the church door and did not 
even turn her head; that they waited to see 


A Romance 265 

what would happen, and that Dr. Foster walked 
off with another girl. 

“ She might have been a visitor at his 
mother’s house,” explained Abby, “ for she sat 
in the Fosters’ pew.” 

“ It doesn’t make any difference if she was a 
visitor, he ought not to have gone with her,” 
declared Jo, with righteous indignation. 

“ I’ll bet she won’t be the first to offer to 
make up,” said Nan, “ and it’s just like her not 
to turn her head. If she gets that iceberg look 
on her face no man will want to come near her.” 

“ Now, Nan,” protested Jo, “ I don’t suppose 
it is her fault at all.” 

“ I didn’t say it was ; I only said she’d not be 
the one to make any advances. Don’t you wish 
you knew what they quarreled about? Oh, 
dear, it will be dreadful not to have that linen 
shower.” 

“ And it is more dreadful to think she’s 
bought some of her wedding things,” sighed 
Elizabeth. 

“ It will never do in the world to let it run 
on,” said Jo decidedly. 

‘‘ I don’t see how you’re going to help it,” 
returned Nan. “ It would never in the world do 
to say anything to Miss Wheeler ; she’d be 
madder than hops and would freeze you stiff 
with one glance.” 


266 The Four Corners at School 


I thought persons were heated when they 
were angry,” came in Frances’ mocking tones. 

But no one paid any attention to her and Jo 
went on, “I’m not going to sajy anything. Just 
let me manage this. I’ll not mix any of you up 
in it ; I have had all I want of that sort of thing.” 

This was all that was said upon the subject 
just then. The day went by and not even Nan 
had any suspicion when Jo retired early saying 
she had a bad headache. These headaches were 
a not infrequent result of Saturday feasts, but 
when Jo did not appear at breakfast on Mon- 
day morning Miss Barnes inquired if any one 
knew why she was late. 

“ I’m sure I don’t know,” returned Nan who 
was the one asked ; “I haven’t seen her this 
morning. She went to bed with a bad head- 
ache and perhaps she isn’t able to get up. I’ll 
stop in and see what is the matter if she isn’t 
down by the time I have finished breakfast.” 
No Jo appeared, however, and Nan on her way 
to her room put her head in at Jo’s door. The 
room was darkened and Jo was lying in bed. 
“Are you ill, Jo?” asked Nan coming to the 
bedside. 

“ My head aches fearfully, and I have such a 
sore throat,” answered Jo. “I think I’ve had a 
chill, too. Please put something more over me, 
Nan.” 


A Romance 


267 

Nan threw on extra covers. “ Don^t you 
want any breakfast ? ” she asked solicitously. 

No, I don’t want anything,” replied Jo, 
wearily closing her eyes. 

Nan stood looking at her for a moment, then 
she left the room to report to Miss Barnes, who 
went up immediately to interview the patient. 
Jo in a weak voice complained of her ills and said 
she thought she would like to see the doctor. 

” I will telephone him at once,” said Miss 
Barnes ; ” we shall just about catch him before 
he goes out. It looks to me as if you might 
have an attack of tonsilitis, though I cannot be 
sure, and it would be best to have a doctor’s 
advice.” 

“ Doctor Foster ? ” said Jo as Miss Barnes was 
leaving the room. 

Miss Barnes hesitated and then said, ” I in- 
tended to call up Dr. Beaman.” 

“ Oh, not that old man,” protested Jo. ” I 
like Dr. Foster so much better. Dr. Beaman 
has never done me the least good ; he gives me 
the blues just to look at him.” 

“If you feel that way about it,” said Miss 
Barnes, “ I suppose Dr. Foster it must be.” 

“ Tell him to come right away,” said Jo in a 
stronger voice. 

“ Very well,” came from the doorway as Miss 
Barnes passed out. 


268 The Four Corners at School 


A few minutes later Nan was startled to see 
Jo burst into her room. She had not even taken 
pains to throw on a wrapper over her night- 
gown and had merely thrust her feet into a pair 
of slippers. 

“Jo Keys I ” exclaimed Nan, “are you out of 
your mind ? ” 

“ No, but I shall be with this head of mine. 
I want you. Nan. Come right over to my 
room.” And she sped across the hall, leaped 
into bed and was covered up to her chin by the 
time Nan had collected her senses sufficiently to 
follow. 

“What is the matter?” asked Nan in alarm. 
“What do you want of me, Jo?” 

“ I want you to go ask Miss Wheeler to 
please come and rub my head,” said Jo. 

“ Can’t I do it? It is nearly school time and 
she may be busy.” 

“ It isn’t school time yet and she nearly cured 
a headache for me not long ago. Please ask 
her to come. I’m much obliged to you for 
offering, but I’m afraid you couldn’t do it as she 
does.” 

“Well,” exclaimed Nan, “I do really believe 
you are out of your mind, but I’ll tell her.” 
She went to Miss Wheeler’s door and explained 
that Jo wanted her. “ I believe she is half out 
of her head,” said Nan, “ for she came flying 


A Romance 


269 

into my room and begged me to ask you to 
come rub her head. She must be suffering 
very much.” 

“ I hope not,” returned Miss Wheeler ; ** but 
I will go at once. It is not quite school time 
and I can spare a few minutes.” She followed 
Nan to Jo’s room and sat down by the bedside. 

” I want you to rub my head,” said Jo lan- 
guidly. “ I know you can help it for you did 
before. You needn’t stay. Nan.” 

Thus dismissed Nan went out and a few 
minutes later from her window saw Dr. Foster 
coming up the walk. “ Oh,” she exclaimed, 
“ and Miss Wheeler is in there I ” Then a slow 
smile overspread her face. “The little wretch I ” 
she murmured. Nevertheless, she went down 
to meet the doctor herself and to offer to show 
him up-stairs. Miss Barnes was already in the 
schoolroom and Nan decided not to call her. 
She understood Jo’s plan well enough to help 
her carry it out. Mrs. Channing had gone to 
market, Charlotte had not yet arrived, and the 
coast was clear. Nan gravely conducted the 
doctor up-stairs. As she opened the door of 
Jo’s room Miss Wheeler looked up and catch- 
ing sight of the form close behind Nan she rose 
hastily. Jo clutched her hand and said in 
agonized tones, ” Don’t leave me ! Please, 
dear Miss Wheeler, stay. I can’t stand it if 


270 The Four Corners at School 

you stop one minute,” and Miss Wheeler, very 
pale, sat down again. She inclined her head 
slightly as the doctor came near. 

He gave her one searching glance, drew up 
a chair, felt Jo’s pulse and began to question 
both her and Miss Wheeler. “She seems a 
little feverish,” he said at last, “ but I think it 
is no more than an attack of indigestion and 
perhaps a slight cold. She’d better stay in 
bed to-day. I will leave a prescription for 
her which will ease her head and make her 
sleep.” He drew forth his prescription tablet 
and wrote out a formula which he handed to 
Miss Wheeler who received it without a word. 
The doctor bade Jo good-bye, saying, “ If you 
are not better call me up and I will stop in.” 

“ I wish you would,” said Jo, “for I feel bet- 
ter already.” 

The doctor smiled. “That is giving more 
credit to my powers than I usually get.” He 
moved toward the door, paused, looked back, 
turned. “ I should like to consult you for a few 
minutes. Miss Wheeler,” he said. 

She arose haughtily and followed him to a 
recess by the window and Jo heard them talk- 
ing in a low tone. She caught enough of the 
conversation to know that she was not the sub- 
ject of it, but she did not open her eyes when 
the doctor went out and Miss Wheeler with 


A Romance 


271 

him. Nan had already gone, promising to re- 
turn in a moment, and presently she was by 
Jo's side. 

“You old fraud," she whispered, “open your 
eyes." 

Jo opened them and gave Nan a sly wink. 

“ You're not ill one bit," said Nan shaking 
her gently. 

“Yes, I truly have a headache," replied Jo, 
“ and I was so excited when the doctor came 
that it is no wonder he thought I had a fever." 
She buried her face in the pillow and shook 
with silent laughter. “I've got to stay in bed 
all day," she said presently, “ but I don't mind 
that ; it will be sort of fun to rest. You try to 
get leave to stay with me all you can. Nan, for 
not a soul but you suspected. How did you 
find out ?" 

“ I put this and that together." 

“ I was so deadly afraid Miss Barnes would 
come in with the doctor and that Miss Wheeler 
would slip out. I was so relieved when I saw 
you come in with him. Was that an accident 
or did you manage it ? " 

“ I simply did not tell Miss Barnes when I 
saw him coming. She was in school and I 
knew she would be satisfied when she heard 
that Miss Wheeler was here to receive him, so 
I just slipped down to escort him up myself." 


272 The Four Corners at School 

“ Good old Nan ; it was just like you to help 
me out.” 

am dying to know how your scheme 
worked. What did they do ? ” 

** Like an angel he fell right into the trap, 
and was evidently anxious to make the most of 
his opportunities, for he made a chance to talk 
to her and that was all I wanted. I know they 
weren^t discussing me all the time they were 
whispering over there by the window. I think 
I saw him take her hand once when I couldn't 
help peeping, but I can’t be sure. I do hope it 
is all right. It was the only plan I could think 
of, and I was so afraid he wouldn’t get here be- 
fore she had to go that I was nearly wild, but it 
turned out beautifully. You must never give it 
away. Nan. Sh ! here she comes.” 

Nan seated herself sedately while Jo lay with 
closed eyes. Miss Wheeler came in softly. “ I 
have sent for the prescription to be filled,” she 
told Nan. ‘‘Are you going to stay here for 
awhile, Nancy?” 

“Yes, Miss Wheeler. I have nothing this 
first period, and I am sure Miss Barnes will not 
object.” 

“I am sure she will be perfectly satisfied. 
You can give Josephine a dose of the medicine 
when it comes ; the directions will be on the 
bottle. Mrs. Channing will be back before it is 


A Romance 


273 


time for another dose, and Josephine will prob- 
ably sleep after she has the medicine. She is 
not very ill, you know.’^ 

Jo opened her eyes as Miss Wheeler bent 
over her. “ Thank you so much for coming to 
me. Miss Wheeler,” she said. “I am better 
already. I knew you could help me, and it is 
enough to make any one feel better to see 
Dr. Foster come in, don’t you think so? He 
is so kind and hearty, and yet so gentle.” 

For answer Miss Wheeler stooped and kissed 
her forehead. Jo caught her hand and laid it 
against her cheek. As she did so she saw that 
the ring was again in its place, and she was 
satisfied that though she had deceived every 
one but Nan, she had accomplished her pur- 
pose, and it is quite certain that any one would 
have forgiven the pretence. 



t 




i 


4 





i 




4 

I 

‘i 

i 

I 

¥ 

I 


t 


. ] 

» 

t 

t < 

,< 


t 


I 


I 



4 

f 

\ 

t 

I 






\ 


4 


t 


1 


> 


« 


1 

t 


I 


► / 


/ 


J 

4 






T 




t, 


( 


0 


y 


ft 




> 


L 


• » 


> 


t 


k «. 



BLUE CHINA AND THE 
KITTEN 

'§ 8 ^ 












CHAPTER XIV 

BLUE CHINA AND THE KITTEN 

Mrs. Channing was a person of opinions 
and prejudices. She could not be persuaded 
that good housekeeping existed out of New 
England. She liked parrots and strongly disap- 
proved of cats. Because of this latter prejudice 
the girls were forbidden to keep eatables in 
their rooms lest they attract mice, but there was 
a storeroom on the second floor where each 
girl was allowed shelf space for such things 
as she felt inclined to stow away there. Keys 
were provided for this place, and the girls 
could have access whenever they pleased. The 
storeroom was lighted by a window high up 
in .the wall, and was a very satisfactory place, 
since no one could get in who had not a key. 
Jo was the only one of the girls who did not use 
it for her belongings. She preferred to keep 
these close at hand. As if I were going to 
traipse away out there whenever I want a 
chocolate or a nut,^’ she said. “ No, sir. Til 
keep my things in my own room.” 

” Then the mice will come,” said Mary Lee. 


278 The Four Corners at School 

“ I don’t care if they do. I’m not afraid of 
mice.” 

“ Oh, Jo, aren’t you really ? ” Abby could 
scarcely believe this. 

“ No, of course not. I’m bigger than any 
mouse.” 

“But they are so creepy and they run so 
fast, you never know where they will get 
next.” 

“ Of course they run fast to get away from 
us, poor little things.” 

“You might have a cat,” suggested Mary 
Lee. 

“ You’d see how long I’d keep it,” returned 
Jo. “ Old Blue China would hustle it out of 
the way quick enough ; she hates cats.” 

“ How can she ? ” exclaimed Mary Lee, 
“ when they are so furry and purry and adorable. 
We have three at home, perfect beauties. If 
Blue China would let us have one of them we 
could send for it.” 

“ She wouldn’t do it for a farm,” replied 
Jo, “so there’s no use talking about it, and 
the mice will have to come, if they want to.” 

A few days after this, Nan observed Mary 
Lee and Jo running across the lawn in great 
haste. There had been a fresh fall of snow 
the day before, and the girls’ footprints were 
seen to cross diagonally from the comer of the 


Blue China and the Kitten 279 

fence. “ What in the world have those two 
girls been doing down there ? ” said Nan lo 
Charlotte. ‘‘ They are always up to some non- 
sense.” 

“ Very likely they have been digging con- 
gealed ants from out their ant-hill so as to give 
the poor creatures a chance to get warm and 
finally to starve indoors,” returned Charlotte. 

Nan stood watching the girls scud around 
to the schoolroom door. Next they were 
heard coming through the upper hall whisper- 
ing excitedly, and presently they burst into the 
room, Mary Lee promptly closing the door be- 
hind them. “You can’t guess what we have,” 
she said. 

“A frozen ant,” suggested Charlotte. 

“ A field-mouse,” said Nan. 

A shake of the head in reply to each of 
these guesses. 

“ A bird. I know it is something alive or 
half alive,” remarked Charlotte. 

“ Perhaps it’s a toad or a snake,” ventured 
Nan. “I warn you, Mary Lee, if it’s either 
one you can take it straight back to where you 
got it. I am not going to harbor snakes or 
frogs in this room.” 

“ Oh, how silly you are. Nan,” said Mary 
Lee contemptuously. “ Of course it isn’t any- 
thing like that. I know well enough that 


28 o The Four Corners at School 


snakes and frogs are torpid in winter and I 
wouldn’t disturb them.” 

‘‘You’re quite likely to do something as 
ridiculous,” replied Nan. “ Produce your beast, 
whatever it is. I hope it doesn’t sting or bite.” 

Mary Lee laughed and drew from under her 
coat a small gray kitten. 

“ Oh ! ” Nan was all interest at once. All 
four of the Corners adored kittens. She took 
the soft clinging little thing from Mary Lee’s 
hands, while it set up a faint protesting mew. 

“Just think of it,” said Jo; “if we hadn’t 
discovered it the poor dear would probably 
have frozen to death. We saw some boys 
throw something over the fence, and presently 
we heard a little meow, so we rushed over and 
there was the darling floundering in a snow- 
drift. Wasn’t it cruel ? Of course we couldn’t 
leave it there.” 

“ Oh, if we could only keep it,” said Nan. 

“We’re going to,” returned Jo decidedly. 

“ How shall you manage ? ” asked Charlotte, 
herself not indifferent to the kitten’s charms. 

“ We’re going to keep it in one of our rooms 
when we’re there, and when we’re not we’re 
going to lock it up in the storeroom. If all 
the girls will agree to keep the secret we can do 
it easily. The storeroom is cleaned only on 
Saturdays and we can have it with us then. I 


Blue China and the Kitten 281 

think we can count on all the girls, even 
Frances, for I know she likes cats; I have 
heard her say so.” 

“We think it must be half starved,” said 
Mary Lee, “so we want you two to keep it 
while we go for some milk. You’d better take 
it over to your room, Charlotte, for the kiddies 
might come in and get excited before we have 
a chance to warn them.” 

The kitten was therefore conveyed to the 
room occupied by Jo and Charlotte, while its 
rescuers went for milk. “ I don’t see how we 
can feed it regularly,” said Nan, snuggling the 
kitten in her lap. “ It will be very hard to 
keep Blue China from knowing, though at first 
it will need only milk. After a while it must 
have meat and what then ? ” 

“Jo will invent a way,” said Charlotte. 
“ You will see.” 

So they did see, for there was nothing that 
the combined ingenuity of Jo and Nan could 
not devise, and it is certain for a few days that 
never had a kitten a more exciting life. It was 
hustled out of one room into another, thrust 
suddenly into a closet, covered up in a basket 
at a moment’s notice, even shut up in a bureau 
drawer for the space of a minute. At night 
it slept at the foot of Jo’s bed ; during 
school hours it spent a lonely period in the 


282 The Four Corners at School 


storeroom where a box served as a sleeping 
place for it. Fortunately the room was of a 
fair size, and it was not crowded for space. 
One of the day scholars faithfully brought its 
daily portion of milk and promised later to pro- 
vide bits of meat, so it led the existence of 
an escaped prisoner for days and was called 
Bruce in consequence. 

Yet as the novelty of such a possession be- 
gan to wear off the girls grew more reckless 
and more than once ran the risk of discovery. 
The four Corners were the first to arouse sus- 
picion, for one day when Mrs. Channing had 
come into the room for some housewifely office, 
Bruce was heard mewing in the next room. 
Nan, however, was quick to grasp the situation, 
for she immediately went to the door and said 
severely to the little girls who were playing in 
there, ** Children, stop that noise. Mrs. Chan- 
ning will think we have a parcel of cats in 
here.” This so convulsed the twins that they 
had to stifle their laughter with the sofa pillows 
while the kitten was shut up in the closet for 
bad behavior. 

At another time Mrs. Channing discovered a 
saucer of milk on the floor in Jo’s room. 
“ What in the world is this doing here ? ” she 
inquired sharply. 

” I put it there,” replied Jo lamely ; then 


Blue China and the Kitten 283 

with quick wit, Milk is good to take out ink 
spots, isn’t it ? ” 

“ Oxalic acid would be better,” said Mrs. 
Channing. “ Hereafter don’t be so careless as 
to place a saucer of milk on the floor, ink or no 
ink. Give me your linen, or whatever it is, and 
I will see if I can remove the spot.” 

Ink spots were easy enough to find on Jo’s 
clothing, so she, with a droll look at Charlotte, 
went to her bureau drawer and produced a 
much stained handkerchief which Mrs. Chan- 
ning promptly carried away with her. 

The next narrow escape was one Saturday 
when Mary Lee suddenly threw down a half- 
darned stocking exclaiming : “ Gracious ! the 
kitten is shut up in the storeroom and Blue 
China will be there directly for the weekly 
cleaning. Come, Nan, we must get the cover 
on the box and put kitty in a safe place.” Nan 
promptly agreed and the two had bare time to 
turn over the excelsior, press down the lid of 
the box, grab the kitten and get it out of the 
storeroom when Mrs. Channing appeared fol- 
lowed by the maid carrying bucket and 
broom. 

“She’s coming! Hide Bruce, Nan,” whis- 
pered Mary Lee. 

Nan gathered up her skirt, dumped the kit- 
ten into it and proceeded on her way. Mrs. 


284 The Four Corners at School 

Channing stopped her when they met at the 
door. “ What have you there ? ” she asked. 

“ Something I’m bringing from the store- 
room,” said Nan evasively. “You always let 
us have what we want on Saturdays, Mrs. 
Channing.” 

“ Oh, very well, but I should think you could 
find a better way to carry what you have,” said 
Mrs. Channing, and passed on. 

“That was a close shave,” whispered Mary 
Lee. “ Suppose Blue China had insisted on 
seeing what you have, what would you have 
done ? ” 

“ I’d have prayed that Bruce could be turned 
into apples, as St. Elizabeth’s loaves of bread 
were turned into roses,” returned Nan. 

“ You goose,” replied Mary Lee, more prac- 
tical ; “ you know that couldn’t have happened.” 

“ Well, it didn’t have to this time. It is well 
Bruce likes to be carried this way, for if he had 
once meowed all would have been up with us.” 

“ He is such a sensible dear,” said Mary Lee ; 
“ it seems as if he always knew when to keep 
still.” 

They made haste to reach Jo’s room and to 
warn her not to let Mrs. Channing in. 

“ As if I could keep her out,” said Jo pick- 
ing up Bruce. “ Poor little tootsey, wootsey, 
lubby-dubby, did it have to be hunted from pil- 


Blue China and the Kitten 285 

lar to post ? Isn’t he the best darling in the 
world? I wonder that Blue China doesn’t 
sometimes hear him scampering over the floor 
when he gets wild with play.” 

“We always lay everything on the twins,” 
said Mary Lee, “ but I know the day is coming 
when we shall get found out and then what 
will happen ? ” 

“ Don’t bother,” said Jo calmly ; “ there’ll be 
some way out of it.” 

Discovery did take place that very day, for, 
in a moment of forgetfulness, Jo left the kitten 
in her room while she went over to speak to 
Mary Lee. She stayed longer than she in- 
tended, and on her return what was her dismay 
to find that Mrs. Channing had arrived on the 
scene and was gazing with horror upon Bruce 
curled up placidly on the foot of Jo’s bed. She 
turned angrily to the girl. “ How did that 
creature get in ? ” she asked. 

“ Why, through the door,” returned Jo 
saucily. “ It isn’t an elephant, you know, Mrs. 
Channing.” 

“No impertinence, if you please. Take it 
away instantly. Whose is it ? ” 

“ Some of the schoolgirls’.” 

“ Then return it at once. I am surprised that 
you should suppose for one moment that I 
would permit you to keep it.” 


286 The Four Corners at School 

“ I thought it might catch the mice,” said Jo. 

“Mice? Are there mice in here?” Mrs. 
Channing gathered her skirts about her. 

“ I saw one the other day.” 

“You have too much trash around. I must 
see that the room is kept in better order and 
you must have a trap.” 

“ That’s what I thought when I brought in 
the kitten.” 

“You are unnecessarily flippant, Josephine. 
Remove that animal. You know I cannot bear 
cats.” 

“ Neither can I bear parrots, Mrs. Channing, 
but I have to stand one,” returned Jo, stung be- 
yond prudence. 

“ I shall report you to Miss Barnes,” returned 
Mrs. Channing. 

Jo made no reply. She felt that she had 
gone a little too far. 

“You are disobeying rules,” went on Mrs. 
Channing, not satisfied with letting well enough 
alone. 

“ What rules ? ” queried Jo. 

“ You are not allowed to have a cat.” 

“ I was never told so. I know you don’t 
like them, but as long as you didn’t see this 
one, I couldn’t see how it made any difference. 
I don’t see where the breaking of rules comes in.” 

“ How long has the horrid little beast been in 


Blue China and the Kitten 287 

here ? ” asked Mrs. Channing, not willing to 
drop the subject. 

“ Oh, an hour or so,” Jo told her. “ It 
doesn’t hurt any one, and it will catch the mice, 
so I don’t see why it can’t stay. It is a per- 
fectly well-bred cat, Mrs. Channing, and has the 
best of morals. I am going to ask Miss Barnes 
about it,” and before Mrs. Channing could stop 
her she had gathered the kitten into her arms 
and was out of the room. She went straight to 
the study where she found Miss Barnes busy 
over her accounts. 

“ I want to show you this dear little kitten,” 
said Jo sweetly. “ It is so pretty and so good. 
I wish I could keep it to catch the mice in my 
room.” 

** There shouldn’t be mice in your room, 
Josephine,” said Miss Barnes. “ If you kept 
fewer apple cores and such things scattered 
about you wouldn’t have the mice.” 

“ I do throw them in the scrap basket, some- 
times, but that only makes it easier for the 
mice,” said Jo. 

Miss Barnes smiled and stroked the kitten’s 
satiny fur. ” It is a dear little thing,” she said, 
“but you know Mrs. Channing has a rooted 
aversion to cats.” 

“ I don’t think they are half so unpleasant as 
parrots,” said Jo. 


288 The Four Corners at School 


“ I don’t object to cats myself ; in fact I like 
to have a nice one around, but as my sister is 
housekeeper we must respect her feelings on 
the subject. As the parrot is in a cage and 
the cat is not we must consider that the cat 
would be a more obtrusive member of the 
family. You’d better take it home, Josephine.” 

“ Mayn’t I have it as a visitor on Saturdays 
and sometimes of an afternoon, if I keep it out 
of Mrs. Channing’s way ? ” 

“ Why, yes, I don’t see why not, if its owner 
will let you borrow it.” 

“ Thank you so much,” said Jo. “ You know. 
Miss Barnes, it does make it seem so much 
more homelike to have a pet like this. We 
girls can’t help being homesick sometimes, for 
just such things as pets. The Comer girls 
have such a number of animals at home and I 
have always had, so has Daniella, and we do 
miss them awfully. Couldn’t we let Mike keep 
the kitten down in the tool-house and let us 
get it when we wanted ? We would pay for its 
food, and it would be such a comfort some- 
times.” Joe sighed and gave Miss Barnes the 
appealing look which she knew was the most 
fetching. 

Miss Barnes hesitated. It was her aim to 
have hers a homelike school, and if the posses- 
sion of a harmless pet added to the girls’ con- 


Blue China and the Kitten 289 

tent why not allow it? The gardener would 
not object to keeping it in the tool-house, which 
was some distance from the main building, and 
after some thought she said, “ If you will not 
allow it to interfere with your studies, and if 
you will keep it strictly out of Mrs. Channing’s 
way I see no reason why it cannot live at the 
tool-house and pay you a visit occasionally.” 

“ Oh, indeed, indeed, it will not interfere with 
our studies.” Jo hugged the cat ecstatically. 
“ It really helps us. You feel so contented and 
comfortable when it lies in your lap and purrs, 
and Mrs. Channing shall not have so much as 
a glimpse of it. Thank you a thousand times, 
Miss Barnes ; you are so good.” And she 
rushed tumultuously to the Comers’ room. 

“ We are going to keep Bruce,” she cried, 
rushing in like a whirlwind. 

“ Josephine Keys, what do you mean ? ” said 
Mary Lee. 

‘‘Just what I say. Old Blue China will be 
as mad as hops, but it won’t do any good. 
Bruce is to stay.” 

“ I don’t believe it,” said Mary Lee. 

“Really, Jo? You’re not joking?” came 
from Nan. 

“No, it is really true. We had a set-to in 
my room, and I walked off to get Miss Barnes’s 
ear before Blue China could, and it is all settled. 


290 The Four Corners at School 

The dear kitsy is to live with Mike in the tool- 
house when we don’t have him here, and we 
are to borrow him whenever we please.” 

“Who? Mike?” asked Nan. 

“ No, silly ; Bruce, of course. Mike is a good 
old soul and will like to have the kitten around, 
and if he knows Blue China has turned our 
darling out, he will be good to him, for Mike 
and Blue China are none too fond of each 
other.” 

“ I don’t see how you managed it,” said Mary 
Lee. “I should never have had the courage 
to ask.” 

“ Nothing venture nothing have,” laughed 
Jo. “ I expect there will be a pretty how-do- 
you-do when Blue China finds out what has 
happened, but Miss Barnes will keep her prom- 
ise ; she never goes back on that. She says 
we mustn’t let Bruce get in her fussy old sis- 
ter’s way, and we won’t.” 

“ Well, you certainly are a witch,” declared 
Nan. “ Miss Barnes wouldn’t have done it for 
any one else, not even for Charley. I can’t 
understand yet how you did it ; you must have 
hypnotized her. It certainly will be a relief not 
to hustle Bruce off to the storeroom in a panic 
every day, and I am sure the dear little fellow 
will be happier where he has more freedom.” 

“You’ll have to pay up for it, Jo,” Mary Lee 


Blue China and the Kitten 291 

warned her. “You will be sure to get the 
smallest piece of pie, and the tiniest helping 
of dessert for weeks to come. Blue China will 
manage that, you will see. She always takes 
that way to show her spite.” 

“ 1 don’t care,” responded Jo. “I can make 
it up some way. I still have some of my Christ- 
mas stores left, and when those fail I’ll write to 
Aunt Kitty to send me some more.” 

It is true that Mrs. Channing was aggrieved 
and had an argument with her sister, but since 
Miss Barnes assured her that she should not be 
annoyed by the kitten, and that the promise 
once given could not be withdrawn, Mrs. Chan- 
ning was obliged to submit to the inevitable 
and contented herself with helping Jo to dessert 
in much the manner that Mary Lee had 
prophesied. Mrs. Channing was not a person 
of large ideas and her petty way of doing many 
things lost her the love and respect which the 
girls gave Miss Barnes. Fortunately the girls 
did not come in contact with Mrs. Channing 
very often, for it was only when Miss Barnes 
was absent that she took control of anything 
outside of her domestic affairs. Jo, it must be 
confessed, was at no pains to conceal her dis- 
like for the parrot, so that while there was not 
open war between herself and Mrs. Channing, 
there was visible friction which Jo did not at- 


292 The Four Corners at School 

tempt to correct and which Mrs. Channing, by 
losing her temper, constantly aggravated. 
Neither one, however, opened argument in Miss 
Barnes’s presence. 


CHAPTER XV 
THE VELVET FROCK 


CHAPTER XV 


THE VELVET FROCK 

Nan was thoughtfully looking at a letter 
which lay on the table before her when Charlotte 
knocked. “ Come in/’ said Nan. 

Charlotte opened the door and stood on the 
sill looking in. Nan’s chin was buried in her 
two hands, and her shoulders were hunched up 
in a position which showed deep attention to 
some grave subject. Outside it was cold and 
bleak. The bare branches of the trees were 
outlined against a January sky and the leafless 
vines rustled against the window. Indoors it 
was cheery and bright, for the sunlight glanced 
along the buff tinted walls, turned a hand 
mirror into a prism whose rainbow tints danced 
on the ceiling, and lighted up the furthest 
corner of the room. A pile of Nan’s books 
were lying in the middle of her bed, to be sure, 
and her golf cape hung over the back of a 
chair, otherwise the room was orderly enough. 
Nan did not look up and seemed to have for- 
gotten the knock till Charlotte spoke. What 
a brown study, Nan. What can you be think- 
ing of ? ” 


296 The Four Corners at School 

“ About half a hundred things,” replied Nan, 
looking up thoughtfully. “You are just the 
girl for the hour. Come in and help me solve 
these weighty problems that are burdening my 
soul.” 

Charlotte accepted the invitation and threw 
herself into a large chair by the window. 

“Two things are warring in my brain,” said 
Nan tragically, “and I am trying to make 
peace between them. I had a letter from my 
blessed mother this morning and this afternoon 
came an invitation to Effie Glenn’s dance. 
You had one of course.” 

“ Yes ; I think we all did.” 

Nan nodded. “ What do you think of 
Effie?” 

“ I think she is a nice enough girl ; a little 
silly about boys and style and that sort of 
thing.” 

“ Not the kind of girl you would like to be.” 

“ Heavens I No. There is really no harm 
in Effie, however, and I shouldn’t wonder if she 
would outgrow her silliness when she is older. 
Her mother is quite a sensible woman in many 
ways. The only trouble is that the Glenns 
have too much money, and Effie attaches a 
little too much importance to it.” 

“ It seems rather queer,” Nan went on, “ that 
mother’s letter and the invitation should come 


The Velvet Frock 297 

the same day, for mother has been warning me 
against ‘ the world, the flesh and the devil.’ I 
don’t mean that she has been preaching ; mother 
doesn’t preach, but I know she feels anxious 
and she wants to keep us unaffected girly girls. 
She says she would hate to have us precocious 
young women who have outgrown all their 
enthusiasms before they leave school, who will 
be blase before they are out of their teens. 
Now, when you think of Efffe and her teas, her 
dancing classes and theatre parties, her card 
clubs and all the things she is forever talking 
about and which Frances, too, adores, do you 
think we ought to accept the invitation ? ” 

** Don’t you want to ? ” 

“ Of course I do. I am wild to do it, but I 
would rather give up a thousand dances than 
distress my blessed mother for one minute.” 

Charlotte regarded her with a half puzzled, 
half admiring expression. “You are always 
coming out with something unexpected. Nan,” 
she said. 

“You see,” Nan continued, too occupied with 
her subject to notice what Charlotte said, “ you 
see, when we came here to school, mother 
didn’t expect us to do much frolicking. She 
wanted us to have recreation, of course, and a 
jolly lark once in a while, but she’d hate us to 
get into the way of thinking of nothing but en- 


298 The Four Corners at School 

tertainments and clothes and all that. She’d 
hate to come back and find us spoiled, and I am 
dreadfully afraid I might be spoiled by such 
things, for when I do a thing I do it with my 
whole heart. Now, Miss Barnes rather likes to 
have it said that ours is a fashionable school. I 
think she doesn’t mind our going to these — 
these functions, as the newspapers call them. 
She has said to me that she thought we ought 
to accustom ourselves to social affairs, as they 
would give us ease of manner and prepare us 
for taking our places in the fashionable world 
when we are older, so — you see why I was 
thinking so hard when you came in.” 

“ Effie’s is going to be the affair of the 
season,” remarked Charlotte. “Suppose you 
go to that and then draw the line tight, say 
that you will go to no more large parties as 
your mother does not care to have you. This 
will be a Friday night affair, you see, and 
you don’t have to go to school the next day, 
so it won’t matter so much this once, and 
you can’t get into very bad habits if you stop 
there.” 

“I might do that,” said Nan doubtfully. 
“ Mary Lee will go if I do. Of course the 
twinnies are out of it, for it is only for the 
older set. I think perhaps we might go this 
once, and then I can write to mother to tell 


The Velvet Frock 299 

Miss Barnes that she would rather we didn’t 
accept any more invitations of this kind ; that 
will settle it. The only thing I’m afraid of is 
that I shall like it so well I won’t want to de- 
cline the next. I’d better write to mother be- 
fore I have a chance to change my mind, then 
there will be no help for it.” 

“ As I just now said, Nan, you are a con- 
stant revelation to me. You are always ready 
to march up to the cannon’s mouth without 
flinching, and yet you never make any fuss 
about it. You are not forever talking about 
your conscience and your duty, but you just go 
along, and do heroic things in the most natural 
manner.” Which high compliment, coming 
from Charlotte, Nan considered worth a great 
deal. 

However, she answered only with a proud 
uplifting of her head and the words, “ It was 
the way my father always did. I am a sol- 
dier’s daughter, you know, and I must face the 
guns.” 

Then Charlotte rose to greater heights. “ I 
do know. Nan,” she said gently. “ My father 
says no braver men ever fought than those 
ons your side, and that they deserve all honor 
and praise. He thinks General Lee one of the 
finest characters in American history.” 

The tears sprang to Nan’s eyes. ** Oh, 


300 The Four Corners at School 

Charley,” she said, “ how lovely of you to say 
that. Thank you. I shall never let any one 
call you a Yankee again.” 

Charlotte laughed. “ But I am a Yankee 
and I’m proud of it. Come, let’s talk about the 
dance. What are you going to wear ? ” 

“ I shall have to wear my pink frock, for 
if I’m going to give up frivolities it wouldn’t 
do to get anything new, though I suppose all 
the girls will have something specially made 
for the occasion. You will wear your new 
Christmas frock, I suppose.” 

“Yes. I have had it on only once and I 
am sure mamma will not want me to have 
another this winter. You ought to see the 
state of mind Frances is in. She is wild for 
something new and is desperately afraid she 
will not get it. She was almost in tears when 
I left her just now and is preparing to write 
a petition home. You’d think it was a matter 
of life and death with her. What about 
Daniella, Nan?” 

“ Why, I don’t know. What? ” 

“ She is invited, you know.” 

“ Is she ? I wonder if she will go.” 

“ The girls have been begging her to, and 
she said she would think about it. I wonder if 
she has a proper frock to wear.” 

Nan ran over in her mind the contents of 


The Velvet Frock 


301 

Daniella’s wardrobe. “ The handsomest thing 
she has is that blue velvet/’ she said. 

“ But it is hardly suitable for a dance.” 

‘‘I know that. I’ll be consulted, of course, 
and perhaps we can get up something for the 
occasion. Mr. Scott is mighty generous to 
Danny, but he seems to think she has clothes 
enough for all times and seasons. I believe 
he imagines that he has dressed her like a 
queen.” 

“ It is more as our ideas of queens used to 
be when we were children,” said Charlotte. 
“ Heavy silks and velvets for every day aren’t 
what ordinary mortals pick out.” 

“ Danny knows that as well as we, but she 
is too proud and too afraid of hurting Mr. 
Scott’s feelings to ask for another thing. She 
ought to have pocket money enough, though, 
to get her some simple sort of frock. I know 
she had a nice fat check at Christmas.” 

That same evening Daniella did consult Nan 
about the party. She had learned to dance 
very well and dearly loved the amusement. 
This, however, was the first really important 
invitation that she had accepted, and she was 
much excited over it. “ Do you think my 
blue velvet will do ? ’’ she asked Nan wistfully. 

“It is very handsome, but it will be rather 
warm to dance in, won’t it ? ” said Nan tactfully. 


302 The Four Corners at School 

“ I hadn’t thought of that,” returned Daniella. 
“All my other things are made up with so 
much trimming, and are even warmer than 
that. Papa thought I would need warm things 
up in this cold climate.” 

“ So you do need them. He didn’t suppose 
you were going to be such a lady of fashion. 
Haven’t you even one white frock, Daniella ? ” 

“ No.” Daniella shook her head sorrowfully. 

“ You might wear one of Mary Lee’s ; it 
would about fit you.” 

“ Oh, no, no. I’d rather stay at home. When 
I have my own things, why shouldn’t I wear 
them ? ” 

“ Suppose you put on the velvet frock and 
let us see how it looks,” suggested Nan. 
Daniella obeyed looking anxiously at her 
friend for comment. “ Hm-hm ” — said Nan. 
“ Would you mind wearing low neck and short 
sleeves ? Most of the girls will.” 

“ I shouldn’t mind if the rest go that way.” 

“ Should you care if you were to have the 
sleeves cut off and the neck cut out of this 
frock? You could wear it with a guimpe after- 
ward and it would really be prettier. We 
might take it around to Miss Shearer and she 
would charge very little for altering it for you. 
What do you say to that ? ” 

Daniella’s face beamed. “ You always think 


The Velvet Frock 


303 


of just the right thing, Nan. That will do 
beautifully, thank you. Td better take it to 
Miss Shearer at once, hadn’t I, so as to be sure 
to have it in time? She may be busy. Do 
you mind going with me. Nan ? I have never 
been there, and besides you know so much bet- 
ter what to say.” 

“ Certainly I’ll go, child. Get something to 
put the frock in, a suit case or something, and 
we’ll toddle right along.” 

They sallied forth to Miss Shearer, who, 
though not a fashionable dressmaker, was em- 
ployed to do the altering for the girls and even 
to make simple things. She was a wiry, gray- 
haired little woman with a long nose, and con- 
sidering that her mouth seemed always full of 
pins, was so great a talker that the girls won- 
dered how she kept from swallowing dozens of 
pins. She greeted the girls volubly. Yes, she 
could alter the frock. She really hated to cut 
into that rich velvet, but if Miss Scott wanted 
her to why it was all right. “ It’s a grand 
quality,” said Miss Shearer, passing her bony 
hand over the velvet. ** I used to think I’d 
like a frock of just such a color, but I guess it 
will never come to me, now,” though she men- 
tally calculated that the material which she 
would cut from neck and sleeves would trim a 
frock for herself or at least a hat, if the pieces 


304 The Four Corners at School 

were not asked for. Miss Shearer would have 
been dressy if circumstances had allowed. 

The girls left her stuffy little house and drew 
a long breath as they came out into the frosty 
air. “ I wonder if she ever opens her windows,” 
said Nan. “ It always smells of cooking and 
cambric linings in there.” 

Daniella laughed. I wondered what that 
queer smell could be. Do you suppose she 
eats with her mouth full of pins ? ” 

“ She must be a regular pincushion, if she 
does, and a very flat one at that.” 

“ You do say such funny things. Nan,” said 
Daniella. She always felt more at home with 
Nan than with any one else, and was more 
communicative when the two were alone. 
“ You’ll stand by me at the party, won’t you ? ” 
she asked. “ I’ve never been to such a big one, 
and to tell you the truth I’m scared to go, but 
I know papa will be pleased when I write him 
about it. I know I ought to go out and meet 
all the people I can so as to get used to it. I 
don’t think I am quite as bashful and awkward 
as I used to be, and I don’t talk quite as bad as 
I did, do I, Nan?” 

“ No, indeed,” returned Nan warmly. “You 
are doing very well, Danny. Of course you 
forget once in a while, especially when you get 
excited or scared, but you improve all the time.” 


The Velvet Frock 


305 

I always do my worst before Frances/* re- 
marked Daniellac “ I wonder why that is.*’ 

“ Because she is such a disagreeable, critical, 
envious creature,” returned Nan. ‘‘ She is the 
only one of the girls that I cannot like. I wish 
she’d go home and stay there. She is such a 
toady, too, and always wants to be friends with 
very rich people. Then she is always talking 
about social position and such things as if she 
were a court lady, at least. My mother says that 
people don’t have to brag of position when 
they have it, for it is always an evident fact. 
Let’s drop Frances and talk of something else. 
I can’t bear a snob, so we’ll think of something 
pleasanter. Do you mind telling me, Danny, 
why you don’t get a new frock for the party. 
I know you had a big check at Christmas 
time.” 

Daniella flushed up. “ Didn’t I tell you 
what I did with most of that money ? ” 

“ Why no, but if it’s a secret, never mind.” 

“ It isn’t exactly a secret, but I thought I 
wouldn’t talk about it. I gave it to Dr. Ray 
for the Home Missions, for that school in the 
North Carolina mountains where the mountain 
children go and have to walk for miles to get 
there. I wasn’t as well off as they once. Nan, 
and I thought if I could help them, that hadn’t 
anything, to get some learning. I’d try to do it.” 


306 The Four Corners at School 

Nan squeezed her arm. ‘‘You are a darling, 
Danny. I was tremendously interested in that 
Home Mission talk myself. Wasn’t Dr. Ray 
surprised ? ” 

“ I think he was a little. He asked if I had 
been confirmed.” 

“ Did he ? What did you tell him ? ” 

“ Of course I told him no. I know you are 
going to be, Nan, you and Mary Lee, and I’d 
like to, but ” 

“ But what, Danny ? ” 

“ I shouldn’t like t;o bejh ere.” 

“ Come home with us at Easter, then, and we 
can all three be confirmed at our dear old 
church. Dr. Ray spoke to me about the con- 
firmation class and I told him we should have 
to be confirmed by our own bishop in our own 
church. He was really lovely about it and said 
he understood just how we felt, and that it was 
perfectly natural, and for us to come to the con- 
firmation class here and be ready at Easter, that 
he would write to Mr. Page himself. I am so 
very glad our bishop comes at Easter time. 
Will you come home with us, Danny ? ” 

“Oh, Nan, would you really like to have 
me ?” 

“ I’d like it tremendously, so should we all. 
Aunt Sarah into the bargain, so let us consider 
it settled.” 


The Velvet Frock 


307 


‘‘You don’t know how happy that makes 
me,” said Daniella after a pause. “ I know 
mama would be pleased to have me thereat the 
church with you.” 

“ Our mother will be, but she would so like 
to be there with us. However, she has urged 
us not to consider that and not to wait. We 
have had the dearest letter from our own rector, 
Mr. Page. I haven’t answered it yet, but when 
I do I shall tell him about you, Danny. I think 
it will be so sort of soul satisfying for us to go 
up together.” 

Daniella agreed with her and this serious sub- 
ject put party frocks out of their minds for the 
present. 

But when they reached home the interest of 
the other girls reawakened theirs and they all 
began preparations, forthwith. Daniella’s frock 
came home in due time and though she felt 
very conscious in this first low-necked gown it 
was a most modest and plain affair, at which 
Frances sniffed and which even the other girls 
thought might be enlivened by a little lace. 
Daniella, however, would borrow no plumage, 
and started off in her velvet gown, with the 
Corners who, in their party dresses, did not envy 
Frances her new and gorgeous creation which 
Charlotte pronounced “ witchy.” 

“ I wouldn’t be seen in such an overloaded 


3o 8 The Four Comers at School 

thing/’ she said. “ Imagine a girl of fourteen 
having any but the simplest of frocks.” 

“ Sh 1 ” warned Nan putting her finger on her 
lip and giving a glance at Daniella. 

‘‘ I’d much rather not have a particle of trim- 
ming than too much,” went on Charlotte 
smoothly. Give me fine materials and no 
trimming rather than all that lace and stuff.” 
And Daniella, who had heard, breathed a sigh 
of relief. 

It was truly a brilliant scene into which the 
girls from the Wadsworth school were ushered 
that Friday evening. Electric lights, concealed 
in flower screened globes, shone in every room, 
blossoming plants and palms were everywhere, 
roses scented the air with their odor. Effie in 
the prettiest of frocks received her guests with 
smiling self-possession, and they soon found 
themselves surrounded by girls and boys of 
their own age. Mary Lee and Nan were not 
long in finding friends, and had a good time 
from the outset. Indeed, Nan was in such high 
spirits and was so entertained that, for a while, 
she entirely forgot Daniella. It was just at the 
close of a dance with Effie’s brother. Hartley, that 
she came to a realizing sense of not having seen 
Daniella for some time. “ Oh,” she exclaimed, 
“ I promised to look after one of the girls, and 
I’ve forgotten all about her.” 


The Velvet Frock 


309 


“ Who is it ? ” asked Hartley. 

“ Danny Scott.” 

“ You said ker ; you mean him, don^t you ? ” 

“No, her name is Daniella. Have you seen 
her anywhere ? ” 

“ Don’t know the young lady. What does 
she look like ? ” 

“ She is a beauty. Golden brown hair, fair 
skin, dark eyes. She wears a dark blue velvet 
frock.” 

“ Oh, I remember her because she is the only 
one who hasn’t on a mosquito net or a Christ- 
mas candy bag frock or something soft and 
shiny like yours. Shall I go hunt her up ? ” 

“Oh, if you please, and ask her to dance, 
won’t you ? ” 

Hartley looked at his card. “ ’Fraid I can’t. 
I’m all filled up.” 

“ ril give up my next dance with you.” 

“ Don’t want you to do that.” 

“ Then we’ll split it as we do down home and 
you can take her the first half.” 

“ Perhaps we can do better than that. I 
think I can get some one to take my cousin off 
my hands ; she’ll be better pleased, anyhow, 
with some other fellow who isn’t so near of kin, 
and maybe you can beg off a dance for me.” 
They compared cards and Hartley declared he 
saw a way to arrange it, then he went off to hunt 


310 The Four Corners at School 

up Daniella. After a while he rejoined Nan who 
was chatting merrily, the central figure of a 
group. 

“Can’t find your friend anywhere,” said 
Hartley. “ I’ve hunted high and low for her. 
Perhaps she has gone up-stairs to curl her 
hair.” 

“ It curls naturally,” said Nan, “ but I’ll wait 
a few minutes and if she doesn’t appear I’ll go 
up.” 

“Who is the young lady in the fuss-and- 
feathers frock over there, whispering behind 
her fan ? ” asked Hartley. 

Nan looked in the direction he indicated. 
“That’s Frances Powers. Don’t you know 
her? She is quite a friend of your sister’s.” 

“ I’m happy to say I never met her. Does 
she always wear that extremely bored and dis- 
satisfied look ? ” 

Nan smiled. “She does when she thinks 
she ought to,” then not wishing to discuss 
Frances she changed the subject. She was 
beginning to wonder about Daniella, too, and 
presently declared that she must find her. 

“ Be back in time for the next dance but 
one,” said Hartley, as she went off. “ Remem- 
ber, it is ours.” 

Nan nodded in reply and mounted the stairs. 
“Nice girl that,” said Hartley to one of his 


The Velvet Frock 


311 

comrades. “ Not a bit of affectation about her ; 
awfully jolly, but not a bit silly.” 

“ They’re both all right girls,” returned Walter 
Fay. “ I’ve been talking to the sister, the 
pretty litde blonde in blue over there. She 
isn’t quite so sparkling as this one but she’s all 
right, and dances like a breeze.” 

“Yes, I’ve noticed that,” returned Hartley, 
“ and I’m down for a two-step, I believe. Ah, 
that’s it;” and he walked off to claim Mary 
Lee while Nan, up-stairs, was searching for the 
missing Daniella. 




CHAPTER XVI 
SOUR GRAPES 






• '.V 

f • • • 


» , \ 
. •< ( 









f 


t 






■l * 





# 






* 


V 


7 


t 


; ; 

' ' »■ • 

I 




t 


j 

*J . 



1 


CHAPTER XVI 


SOUR GRAPES 

Into the room where the girls had laid aside 
their wraps Nan first began her search for 
Daniella. She asked the two maids who, in 
spotless caps and aprons, stood ready to give 
assistance to any one requiring it. “ A young 
lady in a blue velvet frock ? She did come in 
here,” said the maid Nan first questioned, “ but 
I didn’t see her after that. She can’t have left 
the house, miss, for I have been right here to 
look after the wraps.” 

Nan examined the wraps and discovered 
Daniella’s fur-lined coat, so she knew that she 
must still be in the house. “ I will look in 
the other rooms,” volunteered the other maid. 
‘‘ Perhaps she was taken ill and Miss Effie 
brought her to her own room to lie down.” 
She went off on this quest but returned in a 
few moments with the report that Miss Effie’s 
room was empty. 

‘‘ Probably she has gone down-stairs again 
and I have missed her. No doubt I shall find 
her presently.” And again Nan started to make 
another search in the lower rooms. At the 


316 The Four Corners at School 

head of the first short flight of steps was a 
broad platform where tall palms and orna- 
mental plants were massed in front of a large 
window, giving a very effective decoration. 
Nan paused to look at a specially splendid 
begonia, and at the same moment detected a 
shadowy movement behind the plants. She 
parted the leaves and peeped in. There hud- 
dled on the window-seat sat Daniella. “ What 
in the world are you doing here?^’ asked Nan, 
half laughing. 

No answer from the girl behind the palms. 

“Come straight out here and give an ac- 
count of yourself,” said Nan, “ or Til tell every 
one where you are. I’ve been looking the place 
over for you.” 

Daniella crept out and stood before Nan, her 
face wearing the defiant, rebellious look of the 
mountain maid Nan had first known. 

“ What on earth possessed you to hide in 
there like a little wild animal ? ” said Nan. “I 
missed you and couldn’t imagine where you 
had gone.” 

“ I wanted to be where nobody could look at 
me,” said Daniella sullenly. 

“ A bashful fit ? Surely, Danny, you are 
getting over all that. I am sure you are very 
good to look upon.” 

“ Nobody else thinks so,” returned Daniella. 


317 


Sour Grapes 

“Fd have gone home only I was afraid Miss 
Barnes would ask why I came alone, and so I 
thought Fd hide in thar till you-uns was ready 
to go.” 

“ Oh, Danny, Danny, you’re forgetting every- 
thing. What is the matter ? ” 

“ I don’t care what I forget,” returned Dan- 
iella. “I wisht Fd never left the ranch. I 
wisht I was thar now. I don’t want to be a 
lady.” 

Nan gently shook her. “You silly, silly girl 
to talk that way. Sit right down here and tell 
me what makes you in such a mood. You 
looked happy enough when I saw you 
last.” 

“ So I was happy. It was all so beautiful. 
I never saw anything like it, and I was think- 
ing how pleased ma would have been and how 
papa would like to hear about it and then that 
girl spoiled it all.” 

“ What girl ? and how did she spoil it ? ” 

“Frances was talking to that lady in the 
white frock, the one sitting on the sofa with 
Mrs. Glenn.” 

“ Effie’s aunt, Mrs. Stearns. Well, what did 
she say ? Out with it. Sit down here on the 
steps and tell me all about it, every word.” 

“ I heard Mrs. Stearns say : ‘ Who is the 

little girl in the dark velvet frock ? ’ ” 


318 The Four Corners at School 

“ ril bet she said, ‘ pretty little girl,' ” inter- 
posed Nan. 

Daniella passed this over though she knew it 
was what had been said. ‘‘Frances took it 
upon herself to answer. ‘ It's Daniella Scott. 
Doesn't she look queer in that street frock when 
no one else is wearing anything but evening 
dress? She looks sort of half finished to me 
with no trimming on her waist. It calls for 
a guimpe and not for low neck and short 
sleeves. I would have stayed at home if I 
couldn’t dress more suitably than that.' ‘ She 
does look odd,' Mrs. Stearns said. ‘ Don’t she 
know no better ? ' ” 

Nan did not correct and Daniella went on. 
“ ‘ No she don’t,' said Frances ; * she's just a 
wild hoodlum that hasn't no business here 
nohow.’ ” 

“ Oh, Danny, don’t,” breathed Nan. 

“ Don’t what ? ” 

“Forget your double negatives. You are 
piling them on so thick.” 

“ I don’t care.” 

“Yes, you do, and if you don’t, you dear old 
Danny, I do. Go on and tell me the rest that 
sneaky Frances said.” 

“ She just told all about me and said a lot of 
things that aren't true. She made fun of me 
and of papa and of you all, and I did want to 



'‘Come on, Danny, or You Will Miss the Dance” 






^ V » ~ ^ v.- . r * 


' 



,0--- 


- •'Tl .. •» 


hh 


M 


Lr^,. 



^ 

i. -y. 




K* • * ' ^ ■■ , "Vn ':-* > 

ML, 

»€.K •>■’■ 


I ^ 


•4 . K 



m .“ •^'* 


rj>*> m;.4r ^ 

■j'i'.ijffi-., 


*> 




• ' 




JT .r 


. :* ^ BH 

■R* ' • : / • ’/ ■' ’* ’i'- • • 

Ia. ^ - / m; ' -* 





1 


>% 


j ? 


k-. 


70 


rf , V '"■ 








L^H; 




-• JS- 



ni^A.'' Ji. *'^4 

#'■' ''*f'’'ji'. ■* -. *1 _ ^1“* 



■ ■'' \ -. ^ 'if ‘‘■’ 






Sour Grapes 319 

jump out and fight her like a man. I was all 
ready to call her a liar and a sneak.** 

“ Oh, Danny, that would have been perfectly 
dreadful.** 

‘4 thought of that in time and I didn*t; I 
just swallowed down all I felt, and then I 
wanted to run away, but I didn’t want to 
go back to the school for the reason that 
I told you. When I caught sight of that 
little corner behind the plants I squeezed in 
there when no one was looking, for I wasn’t 
going to have Efiie mortified before her friends 
and family and so I thought I’d keep out of 
sight.” 

“ Effie isn’t a bit ashamed,” returned Nan 
with conviction. “ She told me not half an 
hour ago that she thought you looked lovely 
with the blue velvet against your white skin, 
and that she was so glad you had decided to 
come.” 

“ Did she ? Honest ? ” 

‘‘ She certainly did. Besides her brother 
Hartley wants a dance with you and I promised 
to present him so he could ask you. There he 
is looking for us now. Come right on, Danny, 
or you will miss the dance. Never mind that 
horrid vinegar-jug of a Frances ; it’s just like 
her, and you know Effie will tell her aunt the 
truth when she asks about you. Forget it all 


320 The Four Corners at School 

and have a good time. Come on.” She 
forced the reluctant Daniella down the stairway 
at the foot of which Hartley was waiting, hav- 
ing discovered the two as they sat on the step. 

“ Waiting, Miss Nan,” he said ; “ the music 
has begun.” 

“This is Effie’s brother Hartley, Daniella,” 
said Nan simply, and Hartley smiled at the 
girlish introduction. “ I’m glad she didn’t 
say, ‘Allow me to present Mr. Glenn to you. 
Miss Scott,’ ” he reflected as he led Daniella out 
upon the floor. He sought Nan’s eye as the 
music stopped and seemed to read her wish for 
he immediately brought up another partner to 
Daniella and himself claimed Nan. 

“ How did you know I wanted you to do 
that ? ” asked Nan. 

“ Do what ? ” 

“ Get a partner for Daniella.” 

“ I surmised it. What was the matter, by 
the way ? I fancied you two were having a 
heated discussion up there on the top step.” 

“ Oh, do you think any one noticed how 
very much in earnest we were ? ” 

“ You weren’t quarreling ? ” 

“No indeed, I don’t quarrel with Danny. 
Isn’t she a dear pretty child ? ” 

“She is a beauty all right and she dances 
well, but she isn’t great on conversation.” 


321 


Sour Grapes 

“ No, she doesn’t know small talk and that 
kind of thing, but you ought to get her to tell 
you some of her Texas experiences and about 
when she lived in the mountains and all that. 
She can talk then. It is as good as a play to 
listen to her.” 

** Can’t we get her on that subject now ? ” 
said Hartley eagerly. 

“ While the dance is going on ? Hardly.” 

“We might sit one out, but oh, bother, I 
have so many duty stunts to do that it is out of 
the question this evening, of course. I’ll get 
Effie to have her over to tea or something and 
you’ll come, too, won’t you ? ” 

Nan laughed to see how she had aroused his 
boyish interest. “ We’ll see,” she replied. 

“ You haven’t told me yet what that heart- 
to-heart talk was about up there on the stairs,” 
Hartley went on. 

“ I’m afraid I can’t tell you.” 

“ Oh, yes, you can. Suppose we sit this out. 
I want to hear more about Daniella and unless 
you care very much to dance ” 

“ Of course I care to dance but under the 
circumstances I will sit this out because I 
want ” She stopped short. 

“Want what?” 

“ Never mind ; I’ll tell you presently.” 

“ Come over here on the stairs then.” 


322 The Four Corners at School 

Nan followed to where he led and presently 
found herself telling him the whole story of 
how Daniella had overheard the speech which 
made her want to hide, of how she was sen- 
sitive and realized her disadvantages, but Nan 
did not name Frances in the recital. “ It was a 
pretty mean thing to do,” she said in conclu- 
sion, “ but girls can be mighty mean to each 
other sometimes.” 

** It was downright contemptible,” agreed 
Hartley, “ and I am very sure my aunt saw 
through it.” 

‘‘ Danny doesn’t look badly at all in that 
frock, do you think so ? ” said Nan. 

“ She looks like a picture, sort of quaint and 
unique.” 

“ And you know,” Nan’s confidences were 
expanding, “ she gave away all her Christmas 
money to one of the mission schools in the 
North Carolina mountains, or she could have 
had as many fripperies as anybody. She 
wouldn’t write and ask her father for a new 
frock because she is so proud and she felt that 
he had spent enough on her. He is her uncle, 
really, but he likes her to call him father, and 
she has taken his name.” 

“ I think she is the whole show,” said Hart- 
ley enthusiastically. “We must tell mother 
about the school business, for she is great on 


323 


Sour Grapes 

Home Missions. Dan is a dan dee all right and 
we’re bound to make her have a good time.” 

‘‘I’m willing to divide all my dances with 
her,” said Nan. 

“ Oh, I’ll see to it that she has all she wants,” 
returned Hartley. 

“ But please don’t tell any one what I have 
been telling you,” said Nan anxiously. 

“ Not I.” 

“ Effie would feel badly, for she is very fond 
of Danny.” 

“ She shall never know. I will be as dumb 
as an oyster about that, but we’ll get in our 
good work just the same. I wish I knew who 
the base slanderer was,” Hartley continued ; 
“ I’d warn all the fellows against her.” 

“You don’t expect me to tell,” returned Nan. 

“ No ; it is the last thing I’d expect from a 
girl like you.” 

“ Now I must get busy, so you’ll have to ex- 
cuse me. Have you all the dances you 
want ? ” 

“ Oh, yes, I believe my card is full. Thank 
you ever so much for championing our Danny.” 

“ I’m glad you told me her true history. She 
certainly is an interesting person. I must tell 
mother all about her, if you don’t mind her 
knowing ; she’ll be tremendously interested. She 
likes nothing better than to discover heroines.” 


324 The Four Corners at School 

“ And your aunt ? ” 

“Til get it out of her.” He gave Nan a 
quick look and she flushed up. 

“ Never mind,” Hartley went on, “ you 
didn’t give it away.” 

But somehow or other the boys all did find 
out who the girl was who had been gossiping 
unkindly about Daniella, and in consequence 
Frances reaped the fruits of her spite more 
quickly than is usually the case in such in- 
stances, for she received less attention than 
any of her friends, and even her new frock did 
not compensate for the envy with which she 
regarded the good time Daniella was hav- 
ing. The final drop of bitterness, however, 
was given to Frances when she heard Mrs. 
Glenn saying to Nan and Daniella, as they 
were taking their leave, “We want you two to 
come over and have supper with us next Sun- 
day evening, if you will. We shall all be so 
pleased to have you. I am asking you for 
Sunday because Mrs. Stearns is going on Mon- 
day and she specially wants the pleasure of be- 
ing here when you come.” 

Mrs. Stearns echoed the wish and Hartley, 
standing by, gave Nan a knowing glance. 

“We shall be delighted to come,” returned 
Nan without a moment’s hesitation. “ Thank 
you, Mrs. Glenn. It is very kind of you all to 


Sour Grapes 325 

want us. Boarding-school girls do so appreci- 
ate being asked out in that way. Fm mighty 
glad Effie has the kind of mother that feels as 
you do about us.” 

Mrs. Glenn was not used to this kind of ap- 
preciation from Effie’ s friends but she liked it 
and when the girls had departed she turned to 
her sister and said : Those Southern girls 

are so spontaneous and enthusiastic ; it makes 
them very charming.” 

“ I am deeply interested in that little Daniella 
Scott,” returned Mrs. Stearns. “ Hartley has 
been telling me about her, and really she must 
be an unusual character.” So did Hartley 
score against Frances. 

“ I tell you,” said the boy, who was listen- 
ing, “ she is the whole show, and she can have 
me.” 

‘‘Oh, Hartley!” exclaimed his mother in 
shocked tones. 

Hartley laughed. “ Fve been doing the so- 
ciety act all the evening,” he said, “and I must 
get down off my perch for a while now. Oh, 
yes, I forgot, I did lay aside my veneer for a 
short time when I was talking to Nan Corner. 
There’s another girl that’s no slouch.” 

Mrs. Glenn raised her eyes, and shook her 
head in despair. “ I think her sister is rather 
prettier,” said Mrs. Stearns. 


326 The Four Corners at School 

“ Mary Lee ? She’s all right, too, but Nan is 
so hearty and is such a good partisan, more like 
us boys. I think she’s as good-looking as her 
sister, too. I don’t care much for blondes my- 
self.” 

“ Hear the boy,” laughed Mrs. Glenn. 
“You’re getting too precocious. Hartley.” 

“ Well, if you will let Efi have grown up par- 
ties what can you expect from a fellow but 
grown up ideas ? ” was Hartley’s reply, and not 
a bad one. 

Through the frosty streets the girls from the 
Wadsworth school wended their way at the mid- 
night hour. Miss Barnes had forbidden them 
to accept the escort of any of the boys and had 
sent Mike to pilot them home. He stalked 
solemnly ahead of the four couples, each girl 
vieing with the other in her efforts to recount 
the events of the evening. 

“Didn’t you have a good time after all?” 
whispered Nan to Daniella. 

“ I surely did,” was the answer. 

“Are you sorry you went?” 

“ ’Deed I’m not.” 

“Won’t it be fun to go there to supper? 
Wasn’t it nice of Mrs. Glenn to ask us ? It was 
all on your account, Daniella. She thinks you 
are fine, and Mrs. Stearns has quite fallen in 
love with you.” 


Sour Grapes 327 

“No, it is all on your account,” contradicted 
Daniella. 

“ Then why did she ask you ? ” 

Daniella could not answer this, and they 
whispered together about Frances for whom 
they actually began to be a little sorry, for she 
had evidently been the least popular of the 
group. “ I don’t believe she had half as good 
a time as we did,” said Daniella. 

“ I’m sure she didn’t,” returned Nan, “ and I 
can’t help being sorry for her, though I know it 
serves her right. She was standing right be- 
hind us when Mrs. Glenn invited us for next 
Sunday and I am sure she heard. I know by 
the expression of her face when she saw us in 
the dressing-room that it was a bitter pill for 
her to take after trying to do you so mean.” 

So it may be believed that, the way of the 
transgressor being hard, Frances looked with 
no satisfaction at the starting forth of Nan and 
Daniella the next Sunday. Effie had begged 
them to come early and so, bundled in furs and 
in their Sunday best, they set out. It was a 
bitterly cold day, but it was pleasant to be 
received in the warm cozy library where an 
open grate fire was burning. Mrs. Glenn, herself, 
divested Nan of her wraps, while Mrs. Stearns 
did the same service for Daniella, touching her 
bright hair admiringly when she had removed 


328 The Four Corners at School 

the girl’s hat. “ I’d like Wallace Kempton to 
make a study of this little girl,” she said to her 
sister. “ He is so enthusiastic about color. I 
am speaking of an artist cousin of ours,” Mrs. 
Stearns went on to explain. “I’d like to take 
you to his studio in Boston some Saturday if you 
would care to go. Are you fond of pictures ? ” 

“Yes,” said Daniella, a little doubtfully. “ I 
like them sometimes, but I don’t understand 
them always.” 

“Who does?” laughed Mrs. Stearns. “Sit 
down and get warm, my dear. Effie will be 
here right away. You haven’t told me yet if 
you would like to go to Mr. Kempton’s studio.” 

“I’d like it. Yes, Mrs. Stearns, I’d like it 
very much. I’ve never seen a studio. I didn’t 
even know what one was till I came here to 
school.” At which frank avowal Mrs. Stearns 
smiled. 

“ We can’t be expected to know everything 
all at once,” she remarked. “We have all 
many things to learn. I have no doubt you 
could tell us much that we do not know, for we 
are entirely ignorant of your part of the world. 
You have never seen a studio and I have never 
seen a ranch. That is the way it goes in this 
world.” 

Her half playful, wholly interested way of 
speaking put Daniella at her ease so that she 


3^9 


Sour Grapes 

quite forgot that here was the person who had 
criticised her velvet gown and partly on whose 
account she had hidden behind the screen of 
plants. 

While this was going on Mrs. Glenn was 
drawing Nan out and was presently laughing 
at her merry sayings and her girlish descriptions 
of boarding-school life. Then Effie came in, 
followed by Hartley, and before long all atten- 
tion was centred on Daniella who lost herself in 
an account of a moonshiner^s escape from the 
revenue officers and who kept her audience 
thrilled by her graphic tales. So it was supper 
time before any one knew it and even then the 
table had to wait till Daniella had extricated 
Mr. Scott from a stampede of cattle. 

To Hartley, Daniella was a revelation. Such 
another girl, who had had experiences any boy 
might envy, was not to be met with every day, 
and though he had a hearty liking for Nan, he 
was evidently fascinated by Daniella and drank 
in every word she said. Mr. Glenn, too, a 
grave, quiet man, listened attentively to the 
mountain girl’s accounts of her early life. So 
the girls returned from their visit in triumph 
and Nan in great glee announced that Mrs. 
Stearns had made an engagement to take 
Daniella to Mr. Kempton’s studio the following 
Saturday. “ She is going to Boston with me 


330 The Four Comers at School 

when I take my music lesson,” said Nan, “ and 
Mrs. Stearns is to meet her at Mr. Harmer’s.” 

Even Frances was roused to remark, ‘‘Not 
Mrs. Stearns, Nan?” 

“ Yes, indeedy ; Mrs. Stearns,” returned Nan. 
“ Daniella bewitched them all from the baby 
up to Mr. Glenn himself, and I shouldn’t be 
surprised if Mr. Kempton were to ask her to sit 
for him ; Mrs. Stearns thought he might.” 

“ Oh, think of it,” breathed Abby ; “ a real 
studio, and to sit to such an artist as Mr. Kemp- 
ton. What luck I Don’t you wish we were 
asked, too, Frank?” 

There was nothing that would be a dearer treat 
to Frances, but she scorned to confess it and 
made the remark : “ Fools rush in where angels 
fear to tread.” 

“Pshaw!” exclaimed Jo, alert for a chance 
to annoy Frances, “if you had the chance, 
Frank, I think you’d be the first fool to do the 
rushing. I’ve heard you say a dozen times 
that you wished Mrs. Stearns would ask you 
to go to Mr. Kempton’s studio some time when 
she takes Effie.” 

“ That was long ago,” returned Frances 
striving to escape from the position into which 
Jo had thrust her. “ I wouldn’t go now if she 
asked me.” 

“ Sour grapes 1 ” returned Jo. 



i 


CHAPTER XVII 


THE EASTER HOLIDAYS 

The going home at Easter came to be a 
much talked of theme as the winter days 
lengthened and the March winds gave place to 
April showers. Nan had written to Miss Dent, 
telling her that they would bring Daniella home 
with them, and she had responded hospitably 
saying that the house was big enough for more, 
if they chose to add others to their party. “ The 
boys will all be away,” wrote Miss Sarah, “and 
their rooms will be vacant unless you fill them 
up.” 

“ Can^t you go with us, Jo?” asked Mary 
Lee. “ We should so love to have you.” 

“ And you know I’d like to go,” returned Jo. 
“ I half promised Charley, but I was at her 
home for the Christmas holidays. There will 
be other company there who will quite fill all 
the spare rooms, so I don’t want to butt in if I 
can help it, though nothing would induce me 
to stay here.” 

“ There is no need for that,” Mary Lee as- 
sured her. “Just make up your mind to come 
along with us. Even if we filled the main 


334 "The Four Corners at School 

part of the house there is still the wing that we 
could spill over into ; so just you consider that 
you’ve got to come.” 

No plan would please Jo better, but she 
still hesitated. “ I’m afraid your Aunt Sarah 
didn’t expect to be taken at her word so liter- 
ally.” 

“Yes, she did. She won’t mind in the least. 
It is just as easy to provide for six as for five, 
and I do want you to see Trouble and the 
cats and all the things you have heard us talk 
about.” 

Thus persuaded Jo yielded, the more espe- 
cially as Nan added her persuasions, and in con- 
sequence a jolly party of six girls started off 
one day in April for their two weeks’ vacation. 
Mr. Pinckney and his granddaughter had gone 
south and were still in Florida, so there was 
no stop in New York for the travelers who fol- 
lowed Nan’s example, and took the night ex- 
press to Washington, arriving at the old Vir- 
ginia home in the afternoon. It was not an 
eventful trip except as the girls’ own excitement 
and merriment gave it flavor, and they arrived, 
a happy troup, to storm Aunt Sarah’s castle 
and overrun the place. Within an hour after 
they had reached the house Jo had been shown 
over the entire premises. 

Old Trouble came out to meet them with 


335 


The Easter Holidays 

joyous barks and waggings of tail. Lady 
Grey, with stately step, advanced to receive a 
caress, the two younger cats, Baz and Ruby, 
came in for their share of petting. The chickens 
were counted and discussed. The finding of a 
new calf beside the cow was matter of great 
discovery. Old Pete, the mule, wagged his 
ears and thrust his wise old face over the side 
of his stall to receive the apples the girls had 
brought him. It was only when passing Unc^ 
Tandy’s unoccupied cabin that the girls hushed 
their laughter and stepped softly. 

“Po’ old Unc’ Tandy,” sighed Nan with 
tears in her eyes, “how glad he would have 
been to see us all.” 

“ But he’s up in heaven. Nan,” said Jean 
confidently, “ and when I get there I’m going 
to fly with him.” 

It took but little to change their mood, and 
when Jo laughed at the vision of Jean and Unc’ 
Tandy flying together, the others joined in. 

Nan’s old haunt. Place o’ Pines, was sought 
out, and Jo was introduced to this retreat. “ It’s 
where I used to come to make tunes and to 
dream or sulk or do anything one likes to get 
off alone to do,” Nan explained. 

“ It’s the first time I ever knew about it,” 
declared Mary Lee. “You certainly did keep 
it secret.” 


33^ The Four Corners at School 

“Nobody knew about it but Aunt Helen/' 
said Nan. “She discovered me there that very 
first day I saw her. This is the piano/’ she 
laid her hand on a fallen log. “I’ve had many 
and many a good hour here. There used to be 
a Giant Pumpkin-Head who guarded the place,” 
she sought for remains of the vine, “ but I 
reckon he has gone away in disgust since he 
found there was no more need of a guardian. 
It all seems very long ago when I think of it, 
for so much has happened since, and yet when 
I look around it is as if it were but yesterday.” 

“Don’t let’s stand here,” said Mary Lee, 
breaking in on Nan’s reminiscences. “ Let’s go 
down to the brook and see if there are any 
frogs in the little pools and if the fish have 
started to run.” 

“ I know there are wild pansies over on the 
hillside,” said Jack. “I remember just where 
they always grew.” 

So off they started down-hill, to the streamlet 
which brawled between the two gently rising 
elevations and which separated the older part 
of the estate from the newer. Springing over 
the oozy ground, stopping to gather wild flow- 
ers, picking their way across the brook by aid 
of the slippery stones, they reached the other 
side to rest under the sunset tree where Nan 
and her Aunt Helen held their first tryst ; then 


The Easter Holidays 337 

on to the charred ruins of Uplands where their 
grandmother had lived, and around by the road 
to Cousin Mag Lewis’s where they stopped for 
a ‘‘ howdy.” 

“You might have let a fellow know when you 
were coming,” said Phil Lewis in an injured 
tone. He and Mary Lee had always been 
chums up to a couple of years before, and he 
felt that he should have been considered. 

“ We might have sent a telegram, I suppose,” 
said Mary Lee, “ but we forgot everything ex- 
cept the joy of getting home. Aunt Sarah could 
have told you, however, for we had to let her 
know.” 

Phil confessed that he had not been to see 
Cousin Sarah since the boys had left and had 
no more to say about that grievance, but when 
the girls declared that they must go on he again 
reproached them. “You don’t stay long enough 
even to begin to answer our questions,” he said. 

“ We just stopped in for a howdy,” Nan told 
him. “ We’ll see you all, every day, I reckon, 
and at that rate we’ll manage to get through.” 

They were off again in a few minutes, streak- 
ing across the lawn and into the house to over- 
power Aunt Sarah by invading her kitchen 
from which they were routed without ceremony. 
After this they were ready to settle down in- 
doors, for it was growing dark. Nan opened 


338 The Four Corners at School 

her beloved piano and began to play softly old 
half-forgotten tunes. The twins stole back to 
the kitchen where this time they were allowed 
to stay, for said Jack plaintively, “We haven’t 
been in a kitchen since we left here and it is so 
cozy to see you cut out biscuits. Aunt Sarah.” 
Jean established herself in a chair with Ruby in 
her lap and began to suck her fingers in her old 
babyish way while Jack watched the prepara- 
tions for supper. 

Mary Lee, Daniella and Jo decided to un- 
pack their trunks and so Nan was left in sole 
possession of the living-room, and as the dusk 
darkened to night, her mood changed from gay 
to grave and the music expressed her mood. 
The old familiar tinkle of the supper bell roused 
her from her reveries and brought the three 
from up-stairs and the twins in from the kitchen 
to the dining-room where such a meal was 
spread as they had not sat down to for months. 
Aunt Sarah might not be very lavish with her 
words of welcome, but she certainly proclaimed 
her pleasure at their coming through the supper 
she gave them. The six hungry girls showed 
that they did not despise her efforts. 

After supper friends and cousins dropped in 
and it was long after their regular hour before 
they were ready for bed. 

“ Oh, me,” said Jo, as the four older ones sat 


The Easter Holidays 339 

around in their kimonos, ** doesn’t it seem good 
not to have to be afraid old Blue China may be 
sneaking along the hall, and to know that you 
don’t have to be down on the minute to-mor- 
row morning ? Miss Sarah said she knew we 
were tired and that we didn’t have to get up 
till we pleased.” 

“ It all seems good,” said Daniella. ** I love 
every foot of this place.” 

“ I don’t wonder,” returned Jo. 

** I wish you’d crit talking and go to bed,” 
came a small voice from the next room. The 
twins had been given that room that the four 
older girls might occupy one large room as 
they desired. “ It will be so much more fun,” 
they decided. 

“ Go to sleep, you owl,” cried Nan to her lit- 
tle sister. 

I can’t,” returned Jean. 

“ Shut your eyes and count a hundred sheep 
jumping over a fence,” suggested Nan. 

There was silence in the next room for a few 
minutes while the gossiping four chattered in 
subdued tones. Presently Jean’s voice was 
again heard. “ I’ve counted a hundred and 
I’m not asleep yet.” 

“ Then count two hundred,” Nan called back. 
“ There is nothing to do but turn in,” she an- 
nounced to the others. “ I suppose we really 


340 The Four Corners at School 

ought to go, for we are tired out, but it is so 
nice not to have to go at a certain hour that 
somehow I feel like taking advantage of the 
opportunity/’ But there was not much dissent 
from her proposition and before long the last 
whisper had ceased and all was still in both 
rooms. 

The next few days being those immediately 
before Easter were spent quietly, and E^ter 
morning dawned bright and balmy. Daffodils 
crowded the borders, violets strewed the hill- 
sides, anemones bent to the breeze, ferns un- 
furled their curled fronds down in the damp 
places. A happy little wren sang her cheerful 
song from the budding vine under the girls’ 
window when Nan arose to find Daniella al- 
ready up. The two girls made their toilets 
without much ado and spoke in low tones that 
they might not waken the others. 

“ Do you think we could go up to the moun- 
tain to-day?” asked Daniella. “Somehow I 
would like to very much.” 

“ This afternoon we might get Cousin Tom 
to take us,” replied Nan, after a moment’s 
thought. 

“ I ain’t been there since we left, that dread- 
ful day when your cousins let me go back with 
them and you stayed.” 

Nan put her arms around her friend’s 


The Easter Holidays 341 

shoulders. “ Do you really think you would 
like to go, Danny ? ” 

“Yes, but I wish just you and me could go, 
just us two together.” 

“Maybe we can manage it. I could get 
Cousin Tom to stop a little distance away and 
wait for us.” 

“ rd like that.” 

“ ril see Cousin Tom after church,” Nan told 
her. 

There were many who turned to look curi- 
ously at the visitors in the Corners’ pew that 
morning. Only a few recognized in the pretty, 
richly-dressed girl with the big solemn eyes, 
the little mountain maid who, two years before, 
had lived her lonely life on the mountain be- 
yond the town. Among those who did know 
her and who gave her a kind clasp of the hand 
was the good rector, Mr. Page, who stood at 
the church door as the congregation passed 
out. He was deeply interested in the child’s 
history and touched by the fact that she had 
chosen to be one of those whom he would 
present to the bishop a few days later. 

“ I want you to set the example, Kitty,” he 
said to his granddaughter, “ and ask Daniella 
Scott here to tea, when you invite the Corners. 
She is one of our Lord’s very precious lambs, 
if I am not mistaken.” And so sturdy little 


342 The Four Corners at School 

Kitty took the initiative and paved the way for 
Daniella’s entrance into the best society of the 
town. “ Po’ whites ” were much looked down 
upon in a community where aristocratic lineage 
was a matter of first consideration, but if Mr. 
Page’s family and the Corners thought it was all 
right to accept Daniella, it must be. And you 
know, my dear,” said one gossip to another, 
“ she is of good blood on the Scott side and 
has taken her mother’s name. We can’t ignore 
a Scott.” 

Daniella did not realize, nor did the Corners 
think of this when they made her their guest, 
but perhaps it was their very assured accept- 
ance of the mountain girl, which strengthened 
her position, with even good Mr. Page. 

Nan buttonholed her Cousin Tom after church 
and made her request. ” Of course I’ll take 
you,” he said cheerfully. ” I don’t often have 
the chance nowadays. Nan. I think I can go 
as well as not, but if anything happens to pre- 
vent me I’ll send a substitute, so you won’t 
miss your trip. There was some talk of Polly’s 
having company, and in that case I couldn’t 
very well leave, but you shall have your drive 
whether or no.” 

Therefore it was not altogether a surprise 
when Nan saw not Cousin Tom, but Dr. Paul 
Woods, who announced that he had come to 


The Easter Holidays 343 

take Tom’s place, for the two were great 
friends. 

“Oh, but. Dr. Paul,” protested Nan, “you 
will want to do something else, I am afraid.” 

“ Don’t be afraid of anything,” he returned. 
“ There is nothing I’d like better this blessed 
Easter day than to slip off into the mountains 
where it is so peaceful and quiet, but when I 
can have such charming society, why the expe- 
dition becomes doubly attractive.” 

Nan made a little face at the complimentary 
speech and Dr. Paul laughed. “Doesn’t go 
down, does it. Nan?” he said. “It’s honest 
fact, though.” 

“ I know you’d like to take Cousin Polly,” re- 
turned Nan slyly. 

Dr. Paul laughed again. “ Oh, you are way 
off,” he said. “ You’ve been away so long 
that you don’t know that old affair is over and 
forgotten. That was only puppy love, Nan. 
Besides, she turned me down.” 

“ Dr. Paul, aren’t you ashamed?” said Nan. 
“ I don’t believe a word about her turning you 
down.” 

“ And why ? ” said the doctor amused. 

“ Because — because,” Nan hesitated, stam- 
mered and then concluded lamely, “ oh, just 
because.” 

“ No reason at all. Some of these days I’ll 


344 Four Corners at School 

ask an explanation of that speech, but just 
now we’d better be getting off. Where is your 
friend ? ” 

‘‘ She is coming. Oh, Dr. Paul, would you 
mind — would you understand if I asked you 
to stop a little this side of the old Boggs house. 
Daniella, you know, hasn’t been there since we 
took her away and — and — do you under- 
stand ? ” 

“ Perfectly,” returned the doctor. “That’s all 
right. Nan. I know just what you would say 
without further words.” 

“ I thought you would. You always do,” 
responded Nan, turning to beckon to Daniella 
who was standing uncertainly on the steps. 

How familiar was the way up the mountain 
to both the girls ! What memories it stirred 1 
More than once Daniella gave a quick sigh as 
some well remembered landmark arose to view, 
or as the cry of a bird, the tap-tap of a wood- 
pecker, the distant bark of a fox brought back 
all her old life, when all her knowledge was of 
woodcraft. 

At the edge of a little clearing the doctor 
stopped his horse and the two girls alighted to 
make their way through a tangle of brush to 
the log cabin from whose chimney no smoke 
arose and whose hearthstone had been cold for 
many a day. Around the doorway weeds had 


The Easter Holidays 345 

been suffered to grow ; these were now brown 
stubble, but pushing up between the dried 
stalks were the green shoots of a newer growth. 
Nan pointed to them. “ It is like what Mr. Page 
said this morning, Danny,” she said ; “ ‘ a 
newer and more beautiful life often grows from 
the death of the old one.’ ” 

Daniella nodded. She had no words just 
then. They pushed open the door which, in- 
nocent of lock or bolt, yielded easily, then they 
entered the silent room. Many of the articles 
which formerly furnished it had been left there, 
bringing a pathetic suggestion of bygone days. 
The tin cup from which Grandpap Boggs drank 
his coffee stood on the deal table, his old hickory 
chair was beside the hearth. The long bench 
upon which Daniella had so often sat was still 
in its place, and the remnant of a curtain, her 
mother’s hands had tacked up, hung across one 
window. The tears sprang to Daniella’s eyes 
and she dropped on her knees by the chair, 
hiding her face in her hands and sobbing softly. 

Nan bent over her. “ Dear Danny,” she 
whispered. 

Daniella arose in a few moments. ” It’s the 
last time. Nan,” she said. ” I wanted to come 
just once more. I shall never see the old place 
again. I was born here and I didn’t know any 
other home all those years till I met you-alls. 


34^ The Four Corners at School 

Now there isn’t any more Daniella Boggs, and 
pretty soon there won’t be a stick nor a stone 
left here. They are going to tear it down. It’s 
good-bye to a good many things. I reckon I 
wouldn’t mind any of ’em if ma had been left 
me.” 

“ We all love you, Danny,” said Nan with an 
effort at consoling her. 

“ I know,” said Daniella, but Nan knew there 
was lost from the girl’s life something which 
could never be supplied, and she had no words 
of comfort, for she thought : Suppose it were 
my mother who had been taken. The thought 
sent her desires speeding across land and sea 
to the other side of the world. “ I want my 
mother too,” she said brokenly, suddenly putting 
her arms around Daniella and drawing her close. 

“ I know,” said Daniella again. “ That’s why 
I wanted only you to be here with me. Nobody 
knows like you. Nan, how I feel.” 

They softly closed the door on the past of 
Daniella Boggs and went out into the sweet- 
smelling woods where the sunshine was finding 
out the yearning growths of the new spring and 
where the world seemed to stand expectant. 

If Dr. Paul noticed the tear-wet lashes of the 
two girls he said nothing, and indeed all were 
silent for a little while, then the doctor opened 
a cheerful subject and kept them amused till 


The Easter Holidays 347 

the long street of the town stretched out before 
them, telling them that they were home again. 

Mary Lee and Jo met them with hands full of 
wild flowers. They had been ranging the 
woods to see how many varieties they could 
find. ‘‘WeVe had the loveliest time,” they 
said, “ and our feet are soaking wet.” 

“ Foolish girls not to wear rubbers,” said the 
doctor. “ Go right in and change your shoes 
and stockings or I will have two new patients 
on my hands.” 

The girls ran in, Mary Lee calling back : 
“ There are frogs in the pond ; we saw them.” 

“ ril be bound you did,” replied Nan. “ Where 
are Jack and Jean?” 

“ Don^t know. Over at Cousin Mag’s, I 
reckon,” came the answer. 

But it was not at Cousin Mag’s that Jack was 
discovered, for she was up to her old tricks, and 
celebrated her first Sunday at home by trying 
to ride old Pete up the mountain after Dr. Paul’s 
carriage. At the edge of town she had been 
ignominiously thrown off into the mud, for old 
Pete was given to offering surprises, from his 
youth up. ” He just up with his hind legs,” 
said Jack, ‘‘ and first thing I knew I was on the 
ground and he was trotting home lickety-split.” 

Aunt Sarah described how she had seen Jack 
go limping by, very muddy and much di- 


348 The Four Corners at School 

sheveled, and that she had sent her up-stairs in 
disgrace. “To think she hadn’t been here a 
week before she must be up to some fool trick 
like that,” she complained to Cousin Mag. “ I 
don’t know what ever will become of Jack.” 

“ She’ll turn out all right,” returned Mrs. 
Lewis. “ The trouble with Jack is that she 
needs an outlet for her energies. When she is 
older she will find it and you’ll see that you’ll 
have reason to be proud of her. I’ve always 
maintained that she was the smartest of them 
all.” 

“ She may be,” returned Aunt Sarah, “ but I 
wish her smartness would take some other turn ; 
she’s ruined her best frock.” 

“ Oh, well,” said Cousin Mag, always ready 
to look on the bright side, “ it is fortunate that 
she has plenty more.” 

A few days later the bishop made his annual 
visit. It was a solemn occasion to the three 
girls who knelt to receive his blessing, and 
though the dear presence of a mother was 
missing there was good Aunt Sarah who fur- 
tively wiped away a tear, and there were the 
kith and kin whom the Corners had known 
from babyhood. There, too, was the dear old 
rector who had officiated at marriages, baptisms 
and confirmations for the whole family during 
many years. And there was Jo, a strong link 


The Easter Holidays 349 

to the present. She was interested and sym- 
pathetic, but had a slight feeling of aloofness, 
for the girls had tried to persuade her to join 
the class. Some day, perhaps, I will be con- 
firmed,*’ she told them, ‘‘ but Fm sure I don’t 
know my catechism yet.” This was hardly a 
plausible excuse, but the girls knew it covered 
the real one and that Jo would rather be in her 
own home and with her own people at such a 
time. 

They all went home that spring night uplifted 
by the service, but feeling themselves suddenly 
older and more responsible for their personal 
acts. This past year had developed them in 
many ways, and they were fast becoming more 
self-reliant and were leaving childhood behind 
them. The twins, however, were still in the 
Happy Valley and looked to their older sisters 
for help and counsel as these two had been 
used to look to their mother. 


s 

J 


U ; ' I 

< ■ - 


i . 1 





t 

I 


t t 

r, i I 





,*■ 

* 


CHAPTER XVIII 
POOR POLLY 


% 







t 


r 


« • 


/• ^ 






« 




I .1 



t 




t 


ik % 





CHAPTER XVIII 


POOR POLLY 

“ Back again to the old grind/’ said Jo as she 
threw down her books on Mary Lee’s bed the 
day after they had returned to school. “ I cer- 
tainly shall be glad when ] une comes. I declare 
I am quite spoiled by my visit to Virginia and 
it seems harder than ever to stand Blue China’s 
pursed up mouth and Polly’s screams. Polly, 
by the way, is getting more unbearable than 
ever. Herr Muller had to put her in the closet 
to-day to make her stop her noise when I was 
having my music lesson. Wasn’t mein Herr 
mad, though? I don’t know what dreadful 
German things he called her, for he spluttered 
his schnells and his schlitz and things at a great 
rate and stamped around like a maniac.” 

The girls laughed. Herr Muller’s rages were 
amusing. ** Polly is a nuisance sometimes,” 
they declared. 

“She always behaves worse when I am 
around,” said Jo, “ for she knows I don’t like 
her.” 

“ I’d rather she’d scream and call herself 
pretty Polly and ask for crackers when I am 


354 The Four Corners at School 

practicing than to have her give that jeering 
laugh,” remarked Nan. 

“ She always begins that when Frances is at 
the piano,” said Jo. “I must acknowledge that 
Polly has a fine sense of appreciation. She 
knows perfectly well that Frances and I will 
never make musicians and never fails to mock 
us and jeer at us. She really has quite a dif- 
ferent manner when you or Charlotte practice. 
I have heard her coo and whistle and sing most 
seductively at those times. Frances was furious 
when I mentioned it to her, but as I was in the 
same box as herself, I didn’t see why I couldn’t 
speak of it. She’s always jealous of you girls 
anyhow and fairly hates Danny since Mrs. 
Stearns took her up.” 

“ Poor Frances,” said Nan thoughtfully. “ It 
must be dreadful to have such an envious dis- 
position.” 

“ It must be lovely to have such a forgiving 
one as yours,” returned Jo, throwing her arms 
around Nan. “ I’m free to confess that I like 
to get back at Frank when I can. I enjoy 
nothing more than to stir up her wrath.” 

“You’d better look out or you’ll stir it up to 
your sorrow,” remarked Mary Lee. 

“ I reckon I am equal to standing anything 
she can say or do,” Jo answered. 

“Yes, if it is open and above board, but the 


Poor Polly 35^ 

trouble with Frank is that she is so liable to do 
a sneaky thing and you may never know who 
did it, or when, how or why it was done.” 

“ Let’s drop Frank and talk about our themes,” 
said Nan. “I am tremendously interested in 
mine.” 

“ Oh, heavens, must we talk about those hor- 
rid things?” asked Jo. ‘‘I shall put off mine 
till an hour of inspiration and then dash at it 
till I get it all done at one fell swoop ; that’s the 
way I always do.” 

“ But suppose the hour of inspiration doesn’t 
come,” suggested Mary Lee. 

“ Then I’ll grind out something at the last 
moment. Have you decided already. Nan? 
We have weeks before the end of the term.” 

“ It’s none too long with all else we have to 
do. I think Miss Barnes has been lovely about 
the themes. She has given us plenty of rope 
and yet has kept us within certain bounds. I 
am so glad we don’t have to do stupid things 
like ‘ The Effects of Annexation,’ or ‘ How 
Blessings Brighten as They Take Their Flight ’ 
or anything like that. These will be real themes 
and yet they will count in our Lit. exams. 
Miss Barnes suggested something about the 
Lake school of poets and said we could bring 
in something about the Lake district, so I have 
been thinking of choosing one of those old fel- 


35^ The Four Corners at School 

lows. Frank thought maybe she would like a 
Laker, and I’m afraid she didn’t like it when I 
said I thought I should do one.” 

“ 1 am sure there are enough to go around, 
even if we all clamored for them,” said Jo. 
“ That’s just like Frank ; she is never satis- 
fied to go shares. I think she certainly is the 
limit.” 

“ Charley is thinking of German Music and 
Musicians. It is a tremendous subject, but she 
would probably simmer it down to one, 
Wagner, probably,” said Nan. “ I don’t know 
what any of the outers are going to take, ex- 
cept Effie, and she says she is going to stick to 
America. You are the only one of the inners 
in the class, Jo, who hasn’t about decided, and 
I think it’s up to you to get busy.” 

“ It’s up to me to find out what every one is 
going to take,” retorted Jo, ‘‘ and then maybe 
there’ll be nothing left for me, and I’ll be let 
off.” 

“ You goose I ” exclaimed Nan. “ You know 
there are subjects enough for thousands of 
girls, so what’s the use of talking that way ? ” 
Jo was bright enough, but hated to be pinned 
down to time and facts. She would very 
probably do good work, but it would be in an 
hour of sudden enthusiasm when, as she said, 
she’d dash at it. The girls were divided into 


357 


Poor Polly 

two classes ; the inners, those who boarded at 
the school ; and the outers, the day scholars. 
In most of Nan^s classes were Jo, Frances and 
Charlotte, while Elizabeth and Abby studied 
with Mary Lee. Daniella plodded along dog- 
gedly in the grades below, but was rapidly 
pushing forward and had been twice promoted. 
She was striving more and more to set her 
speech to the standards of her friends ; double 
negatives were fast disappearing, while the 
ain’ts and thars were seldom heard. Her 
greatest trouble was with you and I, for, in her 
efforts not to use me as a subject she discarded 
it almost altogether, and forced I to do duty for 
everything. Nan finally took her in hand and 
gave her some rules by which she soon learned 
to do better. 

“ You can’t say * she gave it to Jo and I ’ any 
more than you can say ‘ me and Jo went down 
town,’ ” Nan told her. You must always think 
of it this way : when you mean us, say ‘Jo and 
me ’ ; when you mean we, say ‘ Jo and I.’ ” So 
Daniella benefited by the counsel and even re- 
membered before such a critical person as 
Frances. 

Frances, by the way, liked the parrot no 
better than Jo did, and her dislike was increased 
by an encounter she had one day with Polly. 
The parrot was seldom allowed out of her cage, 


358 The Four Corners at School 

but on this occasion she had managed to force 
open the door and had stepped out upon the 
back of a chair near by just as Frances stooped 
to pick up something from the floor. With a 
mocking cry of triumph the bird swooped 
down on Frances’ head, terrifying the girl to 
the verge of hysterics. “ Take her off ! Take 
her off I ” she shrieked to Nan who happened 
to be in the room. 

“Don’t lift your head,” cried Nan. “Just 
bend down till your forehead touches the floor 
and she will climb down of her own accord 
without hurting you. Don’t say a word or you 
may frighten her so she will nip you.” 

But Frances was too scared and too enraged 
to strictly obey the good advice. She did 
lower her head, but she put up her hands too 
soon, at the same time exclaiming, “You vile 
wretch ! ” and Polly, as if resenting, caught her 
finger and gave it a vicious bite, making 
Frances scream in alarm and pain. 

By this time Nan was ready to present an 
umbrella handle of which Polly made use by 
climbing on it and by this means was trans- 
ferred to her cage, pitying herself by saying 
over and over, “ Poor, poor Polly,” in the most 
woebegone tones. 

“ I think it is perfectly terrible to have such 
a savage creature here,” said Frances, nursing 


Poor Polly 359 

her finger. “ I am going straight to Miss 
Barnes and demand that something be done 
about it.” She suited the action to the word, 
recefved sympathy and doctoring for her 
finger, but no promise that Polly should be 
given away, sold or otherwise disposed of. 

“ I am extremely sorry,” said Miss Barnes, 
“ and I will take pains hereafter, to see that the 
door of the cage is secure, or shall get another 
and safer one. My sister is so very fond of 
Polly, that I am sure it would grieve her very 
much to part with her. It will soon be warm 
enough to keep the parrot out of doors all day 
and then she will annoy no one.” 

But Polly was not destined to see the sunshine 
of summer, for a week after this she was noticed 
to be moping on her perch with drooping head 
and ruffled feathers, and the next morning was 
lying dead on the floor of her cage. 

I cannot think what could have made her 
ill,” said Mrs. Channing, her tears dropping on 
the pretty green feathers of her dead bird. 
“ She was perfectly well day before yesterday. 
I hope none of the schoolgirls gave her any- 
thing she oughtn’t to eat.” 

“ They have been asked not to give her any 
kind of food,” replied Miss Barnes, ‘‘ and here- 
tofore have been careful not to. I don’t think 
it could be that, Hannah.” 


360 The Four Corners at School 

“ Then what ailed her?” said Mrs. Channing, 
her tears falling afresh. “ I shall take her to 
the city and have an examination made, and 
then I shall have her poor body stuffed by an 
expert taxidermist.” This she promptly did, 
returning from Boston with the news that Polly 
had been poisoned but in what manner re- 
mained a mystery which was not solved at that 
time. 

Even Jo, who professed to dislike Polly, 
missed her lively presence and fully sympa- 
thized with the mourning Mrs. Channing. She 
even proposed to the other girls that they club 
together and get another parrot, but after 
sounding Mrs. Channing upon the subject it 
was found that no other bird could take the 
place of Polly, who was endeared to her mistress 
by early associations and whose place could not 
be filled by a stranger bird. So they gave up 
the scheme, though the proposition comforted 
Mrs. Channing by showing the kindly sym- 
pathy of the “ inners.” 

The excitement and interest aroused by 
Polly’s untimely death was lost sight of by an 
announcement which Miss Barnes made to the 
school one morning in May. “We have never 
given prizes,” she began, “ because we wished 
the pupils to do their best without such a stimu- 
lus, and we have felt that the honors came to 


Poor Polly 361 

you with your standing in class. But I have 
received such a generous proposition from a 
relative of one of you, that with the consent of 
the trustees it has been decided to accept. The 
gentleman in question has selected the prizes 
himself and offers them in a spirit of friendship 
toward the school. The first prize offered, is 
for the best theme upon such subject as may be 
required already for the classes in literature. 
You will understand that this is open only to 
the older girls. I have before announced that 
I shall take a small party of girls abroad this 
summer, and the winner of this prize has the 
privilege of joining this party free of all ex- 
pense.’^ 

Exclamations and a great stir among the 
girls. 

*‘The second prize,’^ Miss Barnes went on, 
when the excitement had somewhat subsided, 

is rather a singular one, but I am sure it will 
be appreciated by most of you. It is for the 
best anecdote or composition upon animals, or 
I should say upon any special animal you may 
choose to select. The contest is open to all the 
pupils from the primary classes up, and the 
prize is a finely bred black and tan dachs- 
hund.” 

Delighted ohs and ahs from every part of the 
room. Then some one spoke up. “ Do tell us 


362 The Four Corners at School 

who is offering the prizes, Miss Barnes. We 
want to give him three cheers.” 

“ The gentleman prefers to withhold his name 
until the day of closing, when he will be present 
himself, I hope. I am afraid your curiosity will 
have to remain unsatisfied till then, but there 
are no objections to the cheers, if it will do you 
any good to give them.” The words were 
scarcely out of her mouth before the cheers 
broke forth and for a while there was such a com- 
motion that Miss Barnes was obliged to tap the 
bell three times before she could call the school 
to order, and then an impatient set of girls went 
perfunctorily through the morning’s duties, 
longing for recess when they could discuss the 
unusual subject of prizes. 

“ I would just love to have that dear dachs,” 
said Mary Lee, who was more enthusiastic 
about the second prize than the first. 

“ The idea to think of that, when there is 
the trip to Europe to be had,” said Frances. 
“ If I could win that I am sure father would let 
me go. Miss Barnes is the only person besides 
mamma he would trust me with, and besides 
when there is no expense he could not refuse. 
It is the most wonderful thing I ever heard of.” 

“I never heard of such queer prizes,” said 
Effie Glenn. 

** I think they’re great,” declared Jo. “ They 


Poor Polly 363 

are so out of the usual run. I think the giver 
must be an all right fellow. Fd like the dachs- 
hund myself, Fd never get the other, so Mary 
Lee, you and I will have to fight for it.” 

From this time the friends of those attending 
the Wadsworth school were besought to relate 
anecdotes of animals, and never was a more re- 
markable collection made. Each carefully 
guarded her gleanings from her fellows and no 
one dared to relate the smallest experience of 
her own for fear it would be pounced upon by 
the others. 

As to the English themes, they were talked 
of day and night. Nan settled definitely upon 
her study of Coleridge, Charlotte clung to Wag- 
ner, Frances went about with a troubled face 
and Jo gave herself no concern whatever. She 
would like well enough to go to Europe, but 
she^d rather have the dachshund than anything. 
Jack and Jean whispered much with Hermione 
and all three felt very important over the fact 
that they could compete for the second prize. 

Nan carefully collected her notes, wrote to her 
Aunt Helen for more data, haunted the Public 
Library when she went to Boston on Saturdays 
and was all ready to begin her theme when, lo, 
one day her budget of notes was missing. She 
searched the place over, inquired of every one, 
went to the ash heap to see if by any accident 


364 The Four Corners at School 

the bits had been thrown out with the empty- 
ings of her scrap-basket. But though Mike, in 
the kindness of his heart, spent a long time 
searching, no notes on Coleridge appeared. 
Nan took her trouble to Miss Barnes. 

Miss Barnes looked puzzled. “ But Nancy, 
my dear, had you positively decided upon that 
subject? I thought it was Frances who had 
taken it. She certainly told me so yesterday 
and said that she had begun her theme and 
that it was well under way.” 

Nan was bewildered. “ Why, Miss Barnes, I 
don’t understand,” she said. “ I knew Frances 
had thought of one of the Lake poets, in the be- 
ginning, but she hadn’t decided when I last 
spoke to her about it, and I told her positively 
then that I should take Coleridge, as I was bet- 
ter prepared on that subject than any other.” 

“ I am very sorry,” said Miss Barnes. “ I 
wish you had reported to me sooner, and then 
we might have come to some understanding 
about the matter and have arranged so that you 
both could be pleased. Had you begun your 
theme, Nancy ? ” 

“ No, Miss Barnes. I have been making notes 
and getting together material, but I was all 
ready to begin. Do I have to give it up ? ” 

Miss Barnes considered the matter. “ As long 
as Frances reported to me first and has her 


Poor Polly 365 

theme partly written I am afraid you will have 
to select something else. It doesn’t seem quite 
fair either, but the understanding was that no 
two themes were to be on the same subject. I 
wish you had come to me sooner,” she repeated. 

I wish I had,” returned Nan helplessly. 
“ I’m all at sea, Miss Barnes, but I’ll try to pull 
myself together and do something else.” She 
left the study almost in tears and sought her 
room. “ It’s all up with me,” she told Mary 
Lee. 

** Why, Nan, what do you mean ? ” asked her 
sister. 

I’ve lost my bundle of notes and besides that 
Frances has chosen the same subject and has 
her theme half written, so there is nothing for 
me to do but back out. And oh, Mary Lee, I 
did almost hope I could win, for then I could 
see mother, and — oh, dear ! ” She drew a long 
sigh. 

“ I think it is the hatefullest, meanest piece of 
work in Frank I ever heard of,” said Mary Lee 
indignantly. ‘‘I hope you told Miss Barnes 
what you thought.” 

“No, I didn’t, for you know at the very first 
Frank wanted Coleridge and seemed rather dis- 
appointed when I said I had decided upon 
them. She asked me a few days ago if I had 
commenced my theme yet, and I said no, so she 


366 The Four Corners at School 

just sailed in and ousted me ; that is all there is 
to it, and there is nothing to do or say. I sup- 
pose she felt that she had as much right to 
choose what she wanted as I did, and as long 
as she reported first I couldn’t help myself.” 

“ After all the trouble you’ve been to,” said 
Mary Lee, “ and all that nice material you had 
from Aunt Helen. I do wish you had reported 
right away.” 

“ I wish so, too, but it is too late to be wish- 
ing now. I didn’t suppose there was any hurry, 
because I knew every one had settled on her 
theme, and the others knew the subjects.” 

“What shall you do. Nan? You aren’t 
going to drop out, are you ? ” 

“No, I shall take something else. I’ll have 
to think it out, but I know I shall not do as well 
with anything else. If I hadn’t lost the notes I 
could have had my theme partly written, too, 
for it was all in my mind, but I was all day yes- 
terday and this afternoon hunting for the notes, 
and I lost so much time. I don’t know how Miss 
Barnes would have decided if we both had writ- 
ten an equal amount, but I should have stood as 
good a chance as Frances.” 

“ What do you suppose became of the 
notes? ” 

“ I suppose they must have been thrown in 
the scrap-basket and were burned up for old 


Poor Polly 367 

paper ; they were rather disreputable looku'g. 
How are you getting on, Mary Lee ? ” 

“ Pretty well. I think I have chosen rather a 
nice anecdote, but I mustn’t tell, must I ? ” 

‘‘ Perhaps you’d better not, though I’d like 
immensely to know and I’m not entering that 
contest. It will be all I can do to get up some- 
thing for the other now.” 

“ Poor old Nan, you do seem to have lots of 
hard luck,” said Mary Lee affectionately. “ I’ll 
be glad when we all have mother and Aunt 
Helen to turn to. It does make me feel sort of 
desperate sometimes to think we have no one 
who cares more for us than any one else. Miss 
Barnes is very kind and so are all the teachers, 
but they can’t be partial and mothers can ; 
that’s the lovely part about them. I have been 
wondering. Nan, if it could be Mr. St. Nick 
who offered those prizes ; it seems something 
like him to do it.” 

“ I’ve thought maybe it might be he. If I 
really knew I’d be more distressed than ever, 
not to have one of us win one of them. It is 
like him to do it if he thought of it. Oh, dear, 
if only I hadn’t lost those notes.” 

“ Where did you have them last ? ” 

“ In my desk, I’m very sure, but they weren’t 
there when I looked.” 

“ Nan.” 


368 The Four Corners at School 

' What?»» 

* Do you think Frances could have taken 
them ? 

“ Oh, Mary Lee, don’t ask me. I don’t want 
to admit that I even once thought of such a 
thing, for I shall never forget how I felt when 
I was accused unjustly. Don’t let’s mention it.” 

“ She’s equal to it,” said Mary Lee with con- 
viction. 

‘‘Don’t,” protested Nan. She sat silently 
pondering for a littie while and then an- 
nounced : “ I shall take Wordsworth. Aunt 

Helen told me several things about him, things 
that aren’t common property any more than 
the Coleridge ones. She saw a man who 
keeps a little book-shop in Grasmere, and he 
knew Mrs. Wordsworth. He told Aunt Helen 
several tales which I can bring in nicely, and I 
think I can get up something nearly as good as 
the Coleridge if only I have time. Have you 
an idea of what Jo will take ? ” 

“ Not a notion. She’s all up for the animal 
prize, but doesn’t seem to care about the other. 
She is such a funny girl and has to have 
something to push her into things she doesn’t 
care for especially. If there were some im- 
portant reason why she wanted to write a good 
theme she’d up and do it and come out with 
flying colors.” 


Poor Polly 369 

The impetus was forthcoming, though Mary 
Lee was not aware of it till she told Jo of 
how Frances had acted in preempting Nan^s 
claim to Coleridge. “ Horrid old sneak,” cried 
Jo. “ She shan’t have that prize. I’ll try my 
level best for it, and if I get it I’ll hand it 
over to Nan, but I’ll not let Frank Powers 
have it, not if Jo knows it. I see where I must 
get busy. Go ’long with you, Mary Lee, I 
want to get to work,” and Mary Lee ab- 
sconded while Jo set frantically to work to 
gather notes for her theme. When Charlotte 
came in she found her surrounded by books 
with papers scattered in every direction and 
she was scribbling away for dear life. 

“ For pity’s sake, Jo Keys, what has hap- 
pened to you ? ” asked Charlotte. 

“Don’t interrupt me,” replied Jo with 
knitted brows. “I’m taking the first prize.” 

The heart being taken out of Nan’s efforts 
she worked less enthusiastically, but at last 
became interested in her subject, so that 
eventually her task became a pleasure, and 
although she felt that the time was very short 
she kept at her work bravely and had her 
theme ready at the last moment, though she 
handed it in with no anticipation of winning 
the prize. 

A more excited person was Jack who had in- 


370 The Four Corners at School 

dustriously labored through an anecdote of a 
Douglas squirrel she had seen in California and 
whose antics she remembered vividly. She 
told her tale in a childish, simple way, but gave 
evidence of having been an eye-witness of 
what she described. Jean had her contribution, 
too, a tale of their pet paisano, while Mary 
Lee had chosen the water ousel. All three 
had drawn from their California experiences, 
and felt that at least they had not selected com- 
monplace subjects. 













CHAPTER XIX 


A CULPRIT 

The day was very near when the themes 
were to be handed to the judges, and Nan 
once more was summoned to the study. 
want to ask you a few questions, Nancy,” said 
Miss Barnes kindly. “ Do you remember 
about what you intended to touch upon in your 
theme on Coleridge ? I call to mind a letter 
from your aunt which you handed me to read. 
It gave some little personal experiences which 
included some data you were going to use. 
Had you decided to use any part of the letter 
as material for your theme ? ” 

Yes, Miss Barnes,” Nan made reply. “ I 
was counting on what Aunt Helen wrote to 
make my theme a little more original. I was 
going to tell of what that Oxford professor 
said to her and some other things.” 

Had you written out any sort of plan for 
your work ? ” 

“ I had made a sort of rough synopsis in the 
way you showed us.” 

** Was it with your lost papers ? ” 


374 Four Corners at School 

** Yes, Miss Barnes.” 

** Could you remember it well enough to give 
me any idea of what the synopsis was like ? ” 

Nan thought for a moment. “I think I 
could.” 

Miss Barnes handed her paper and pencil. 
“ Set it down as you remember it, please.” 

Nan did so and handed back the paper. 

Miss Barnes examined it carefully, nodding 
her head as she did so. “ Did you show this 
to any one ? ” she asked. 

“ No, Miss Barnes. I talked it over with 
some of the girls a little while before the prizes 
were offered and one or two knew what I had 
chosen, but lately we have all kept things to 
ourselves on account of the competition, and 
our subjects had to be approved by you before 
we finished them, you know.” 

“ And your aunt’s letter, did you show that?” 

“No, only to you and to Mary Lee, but I 
asked her not to mention the Coleridge incident, 
telling her I wanted to use it, so of course she 
wouldn’t tell.” 

“You did not leave the letter around any- 
where ? Was it with your notes ? ” 

“ No, Miss Barnes. I scribbled off that part 
about Coleridge and then sent the letter to my 
Aunt Sarah in Virginia.” 

Miss Barnes nodded again and was lost in 


375 


A Culprit 

thought for a few minutes. “You have never 
had the slightest clue to your budget of notes ? 
You thought you had left them in your desk, 
didn’t you ? ” 

“Yes, Miss Barnes, I was pretty sure of it, 
but they were gone bodily when I went to get 
them.” 

“ I am sorry to tell you, Nancy, that they 
were evidently stolen and their contents made 
use of in a theme which is one of the best handed 
in. The fact of the synopsis and the use of the 
incidents in your aunt’s letter are sufficient 
proof. The theme is not planned exactly as 
you would have done, but I am inclined to 
think the difference was made simply to mis- 
lead, for except for the introduction of your 
aunt’s data, I might have passed it in. Most of 
the material could have been gathered from 
sources open to us all, and I should not have 
suspected. The writer evidently did not know 
that your original incidents were not common 
property and must have imagined that they 
were gathered from the ordinary reference 
books. I think she will have to confess to the 
theft. 

“ Of course the theme has been thrown out, 
and I know your generous spirit too well to ask 
you not to mention this interview. I felt that 
I must have the evidence before I made the 


376 The Four Corners at School 

charge. It is our secret, Nancy, and the guilty 
person will be the only other who knows. I 
shall not mention her name, but I am sure we 
both feel very sorry for her. That is all. I 
sincerely hope you will win the prize, for you 
were under disadvantages in having so short a 
time for preparation. However, it all rests 
with the judges, and I cannot even direct their 
attention to any special paper, but I wish you 
luck.” 

Thank you. Miss Barnes,” said Nan ear- 
nestly. “ I am sorry for that girl, whoever she 
is.” Then it dawned upon her that she knew 
positively who had taken Coleridge for her sub- 
ject and she exclaimed, “ Why, Miss Barnes, 
it is ” 

Miss Barnes put her finger on her lip. “You 
can’t help knowing, Nancy, of course, but please 
don’t mention her name. It is so very, very 
sad.” 

Nan went out slowly. Mary Lee was right. 
Frances was equal to the trick, but she had 
overstepped the mark. 

Miss Barnes was well supported by evidence 
when she called the trembling culprit into her 
study. She had made another discovery, too, 
which Nan was not told, and this was that 
Frances was responsible for the death of poor 
Polly. She could not forgive the parrot for 


377 


A Culprit 

biting her and had resolved to punish her in 
her own way, by sprinkling something on her 
food which would make her sick for a few days, 
though with no real intention of causing her 
death. 

Murder will out, however, and the druggist 
who had sold the stuff happened to mention it 
to Miss Barnes, and asked who required such 
medicine, stating that Miss Frances Powers had 
bought it. 

Miss Barnes took the information lightly, but 
later searched Frances’ room and found the 
drug. Her suspicions were aroused, but it was 
only when reduced to the depths of humility 
that Frances confessed to having used it to re- 
venge herself on the parrot. This was after 
Miss Barnes had pressed home her charges con- 
cerning the appropriation of Nan’s notes. 
Frances never forgot the talk which followed^ 
At first Miss Barnes said that she must send the 
culprit home at once, that she could not remain 
a day longer, but Frances’ tears, protestations 
of remorse and prayers to be allowed to remain 
till the holidays, finally won her leave to stay. 
“ Mamma would never get over it,” she sobbed, 
“ and papa will never respect me again. Oh, 
Miss Barnes, what did make me do it? I think 
I must have been possessed of an evil spirit.” 

“ The evil spirits were envy and hatred, I am 


378 The Four Corners at School 

afraid,” Miss Barnes told her. “ On your 
parents’ account, Frances, I will allow you to 
remain, but I cannot take you back next year.” 

Fresh tears of contrition from Frances and 
promises of reform, but from her decision Miss 
Barnes could not be moved and Frances fled to 
her room where she remained in seclusion 
the rest of the day, a very much chastened 
girl. 

There were so many events crowded into the 
last month of the term that Frances’ doings 
were less a matter of interest to Nan than they 
otherwise would have been. In the first place 
there was Miss Wheeler’s linen shower, when 
she was overwhelmed by the generosity of her 
pupils. Scarce a girl in the classes under her 
but came nobly to the front, so zealously did 
the inners work. The second event which 
brought joy to the Corners was the arrival in 
Boston of Mr. Pinckney and Miss Dolores who 
announced that they meant to be present at the 
closing exercises of the school. While every 
one had been wondering who the giver of the 
prizes could be the Corners were convinced 
that their old friend Mr. St. Nick must be the 
one. A number of others had hit upon Effie’s 
father, one of the wealthiest men of the town, 
and a scattered few mentioned various names 
as possibly the right ones. But to the Corners’ 


379 


A Culprit 

great surprise Mr. Pinckney denied all knowl- 
edge of the prizes. “It is just what I would 
like to have done,” he admitted, “if I had 
thought of it, but I must renounce all claim to 
the glory.” 

“ It must be Mr. Glenn, then,” said Nan with 
conviction, “ but it doesn’t seem a bit like him 
to be so original. He is such a cut-and-dried 
sort of man ; I don’t believe he has any 
imagination at all.” 

“ And it certainly did take imagination to 
choose a dachshund as a prize,” returned Mr. 
Pinckney. “ I confess it would have been beyond 
mine, though I might have thought of the trip 
to Europe. I should say the gentleman had 
not only imagination but a strong sense of 
humor. I’d like to meet him. Have you any 
idea who will be the fortunate winners ? ” 

“ Not the slightest,” said Mary Lee, “though 
I think Nan stands a good chance. Frances 
used to talk very confidently, but as the time 
draws near she says nothing about it. She 
doesn’t seem like herself these days, anyhow. I 
think it is because she is so anxious that it 
scares her.” 

Nan did not say a word. Not even to her 
sister could she mention that interview with 
Miss Barnes when Frances’ deceit had been 
discovered. 


380 The Four Corners at School 

“ If I get the dog I am going to share it with 
Mary Lee,” Jack spoke up. 

Mr. Pinckney pinched her ear playfully. 
“So you think you stand a chance, do you. 
Kid ? ” 

“ Why, of course,” returned Jack. “ Didn’t 
you know I did ? ” 

“ Bless your innocence, child. I knew it of 
course, and I hope you may get it.” 

“ I couldn’t even show Jean and Nan what I 
wrote,” Jack told him, “ so of course I can’t 
show you. Daniella has something, too.” 

“ She has ? It is going to be a very exciting • 
contest then, isn’t it? Are the successful 
papers to be read ? ” 

“ I believe so,” Nan told him, “ but by some 
one else than the writers ; it would be too 
dreadfully embarrassing, and Miss Barnes 
thinks they would produce a better effect if 
some one else than the prize-winners read them ; 
she will probably do it herself. Imagine sitting 
there and hearing one’s paper read out before 
all those people. I shouldn’t know whether to 
cry or laugh.” 

They were on their way to Lexington and 
Concord when this conversation took place. 
Mr. Pinckney had descended upon them the 
evening before, had arranged matters with 
Miss Barnes in a twinkling and had borne off 


A Culprit 381 

all four of the girls to Boston to remain over 
Sunday. 

‘‘We are going to see where Louisa Alcott 
lived/ ^ Jean told Jack. 

“ And where Pitcairn said, ‘ Disperse, ye 
rebels,* ” returned Jack. 

“ I thought it was down our way that the 
rebels lived,’* said Jean naively. “ The girls 
call us rebels.** 

Mr. Pinckney laughed. “That’s what they 
called the men who fought the Revolution, 
Jean, so you needn’t feel dishonored.” 

“Then I shan’t ever care again when the 
girls laugh at us. I always did say I liked to 
be a rebel. I am going to tell them next time 
that there used to be rebels up here, too.” 

“ I care more to see the old Manse where 
Hawthorne lived,” said Nan, “ but that is only 
one of the places I want to see. What a num- 
ber of them there are in that old town of 
Concord.” 

“ Shall we see Thoreau’s hut ? ” asked Mary 
Lee. “ I like him ; he had a flying squirrel and 
used to be friends with wild animals like Jo 
Poker.” 

Here Jack snickered and clapped her hands 
over her mouth. She was thinking of her anec- 
dote about the Douglas squirrel. 

“ What’s the matter. Jack ? ” asked Nan. 


382 The Four Corners at School 

“ Nothin’,” was the laconic reply, though the 
dimples still played around Jack’s mouth. 

After the expedition to the historic old places 
came the pleasure of a shopping trip with Miss 
Dolores when new white frocks for all four 
Corners were selected and when Daniella, too, 
was provided for. Mr. Scott had sent a gener- 
ous check for her summer outfit, and Daniella 
had the pleasure of choosing such things as her 
friends wore. It was great fun to try on pretty 
hats and to choose dainty embroideries and all 
sorts of girlish fal-lals, as Mr. Pinckney called 
them, and no one enjoyed it more than 
Daniella. 

“ I shall look as nice as any of the girls when 
papa comes,” she said in a pleased voice. 

“Is he coming?” asked Nan, a little sur- 
prised. “ You didn’t tell us before.” 

“ I didn’t know positively till to-day. How 
I wish you were all going home with me.” 

“ We shall have to stop this side of Texas,” 
said Nan. “ What a scatteration there will be, 
and I wonder how many of us will be back here 
next year. We haven’t learned a word of 
mother’s plans and we are so very anxious 
to.” 

“ I think I am to come back,” Daniella told 
her, “ but if you are not here I don’t know what 
I shall do.” 


A Culprit 383 

** Oh, you41 do well enough without us,” said 
Mary Lee placidly. ** You know the ropes now 
and know all the girls so well.” 

But there are none of the girls like you all,” 
said Daniella. 

“Never mind, don’t let us bother about it 
now,” said Mary Lee. “ Like as not we shall 
be here, and if we are not you may be able to 
come where we are.” 

“ Charley is coming back for sure,” Nan told 
them, “ and so are Abby and Lizzie. I wonder 
who will take Miss Wheeler’s place, and won’t 
it be funny to call her Mrs. Foster when we 
meet her on the street ? I took my last lesson 
with Mr. Harmer to-day and he nearly wept 
over me. After all it isn’t so mighty pleasant 
to say good-bye.” 

Daniella looked very grave. It was of these 
good-byes that she had been thinking. 

They had been trying on the new frocks 
which were to be worn on commencement day 
and were about to put them away when Jo came 
in. “ Such vain creatures,” she said ; “ gloating 
over your vanities, I see.” 

“ You needn’t talk,” said Mary Lee. “ You’ve 
had on your frock half a dozen times at least 
and it is an old story. You ought to see 
Daniella in hers ; she looks dear in it.” 

“ Put it on, Danny?” begged Jo. 


384 The Four Corners at School 

“ Oh, no,” Daniella was overcome with a fit 
of shyness. “ I have just taken it off.” 

“ Some other time, then,” said Jo. “ Come 
on, girls, we are going to have a last feast in our 
room.” 

“Not a chafing dish party this warm day,” 
remarked Mary Lee. 

“No, ice cream and strawberries and things. 
Our heated imaginations need cooling after the 
work of the year. Thank goodness, I have 
passed all my exams, even Miss Wheeler’s, and 
I can face my family with a smiling counte- 
nance. Come on, or the ice cream will melt. 
Charley is dishing it up now. Do you know I 
have an idea that Frank will not come back, for 
she has flunked in math and won’t join our feast.” 

“ How do you know ? ” cried Nan. 

“ A little bird told me. I saw your admirer, 
Nan, on the street when Charley and I were get- 
ting the things. I wonder if it is jealousy that 
is the matter with Frank ; she’s had an eye out 
for Hartley this long while.” 

“ Oh, Jo, you’re so silly,” said Nan impa- 
tiently. “ You know I’m not a bit sentimental 
about boys.” 

“That’s not saying they’re not sentimental 
about you. Who sent you a bunch of violets 
the other day ? I saw Effie give them to you 
and I know Hartley sent them.” 


A Culprit 385 

** I don’t care ; he sent Daniella some the day- 
before, and it doesn’t mean anything, anyhow. 
You know Miss Barnes doesn’t allow any phi- 
landerings. She thinks it is positively sinful to 
talk about boys.” 

‘‘ She doesn’t ; she only pretends to, but I be- 
lieve Blue China actually does ; she is a regular 
old dragon. But, do come on, or the ice cream 
will be slush.” So the girls followed her and 
were regaled with ice cream served from a 
pitcher. “ You get more that way,” said Jo. 

“ Our last, last feast,” sighed Lizzie. “ To- 
morrow we pack up.” 

“ And the day after we go,” said Abby. 

“You mean the day after we get the prizes,” 
said Charlotte. 

get them,” Jo said scornfully. “ Do you 
think two prizes are going around this crowd? 
Maybe you mean that each one of us will go 
part way to Europe with Miss Barnes and swim 
back.” 

“ Oh, you can be silly, Jo,” said Charlotte 
disgustedly. 

“I like to be silly,” returned Jo calmly. 
“ Let’s bet on the winners. I say Nan gets 
number one.” 

“ I say Frances gets it,” added Charlotte. 

“ I believe you will yourself, Jo,” put in Mary 
Lee. 


386 The Four Corners at School 

** Nonsense, I couldn’t if I tried 

“ You might if you didn’t try too hard,” re- 
marked Nan wisely. 

“ I honestly admit that I tried for the second 
prize. I’d give most anything to have that 
dachs. I wonder where they keep him. No 
one seems to know.” 

“ I don’t suppose he is kept here anywhere,” 
said Charlotte. “ He will be brought down 
from Boston, very likely, and will appear at the 
proper moment.” 

“ The judges must be having rather a stiff 
time of it,” remarked Jo, taking a morsel of ice 
cream from her spoon. ‘‘ Think of all that stuff 
to go over knowing it is up to you to pick out 
the best.” 

“ They don’t have half the work Miss Lovejoy 
and Miss Barnes did,” said Charlotte, “for they 
had the first selecting to do. They had to 
throw out all the impossibles and hand over the 
possibles to the judges.” 

“ Oh, did they do it that way ? Well, even 
at that rate it is something of a job. I saw Dr. 
Foster this morning and he said he was worn to 
a frazzle.” 

“ Did he say that, Jo?” 

“ He said words to that effect. Don’t be so 
particular, Charley. I am not a descendant of 
the founder of Harvard and I don’t care if I do 


A Culprit 387 

ornament my speech with a few Americanisms. 
Oh, Golly! to think that pretty soon I’ll be 
slinging my slang just where I please.” 

“ Suppose you win the first prize,” put in 
Nan, “ you’ll have to travel with Miss Barnes 
all summer and must keep up the reputation of 
an American institution of learning.” 

“ That’s so. Well, I reckon I can stand it if 
she can. I think, though, when her back is 
turned, that I’d rather enjoy surprising our 
English cousins.” 

“ I’m mighty positive you would,” returned 
Nan laughing. Seriously, though, a trip with 
Miss Barnes would be worth something. She 
knows such a lot and would make it so inter- 
esting, besides that she can be as jolly as any- 
body when she is actually out of school. Who- 
ever gets the prize will certainly have a snap, 
but alas, I fear it will not be I.” 

** I don’t see why you always say that,” said 
Charlotte. ‘‘You stand as good a chance, if 
not a better one, than any of us.” 

“ I’d like to believe it,” returned Nan dispos- 
ing of her last drop of ice cream, and taking up 
her glass of lemonade. “Well, girls, here’s to 
the winner, whoever she may be. May good 
luck attend her.” 

“ And may she not grow proud and haughty,” 
amended Jo. 


388 The Four Corners at School 

“ May her shadow never grow less,” put in 
Mary Lee. 

“ If it’s Charley, let us hope not,” said Jo, and 
every one laughed, for Charlotte was spare of 
flesh and continually mourned the fact. 

“ Here’s to commencement day at the Wads- 
worth school,” cried Charlotte. “ May we al- 
ways remember it with pleasure.” 

“That’s good enough to be the final,” said Jo 
tipping her glass to receive the last drop. “ I 
was going to propose the Wadsworth school, 
but yours fills the bill better. Now get out all 
of you ; I’ve got to pack.” 

After such summary dismissal there was no 
excuse to linger and each girl w^ent to her own 
room to follow Jo’s example. 










i 


CHAPTER XX 


THE PRIZES 

A VERY excited gathering of girls it was who 
took seats on the platform in the big school- 
room that commencement day in June. Not 
one, from Charlotte Loring down to the small- 
est member of the primary department, but 
hoped that she might win at least one of the 
prizes, and as the time drew near for the an- 
nouncement there were many fluttering breasts. 
The little dachshund was supposedly on hand 
though no one had seen or heard him. The 
giver of the prizes, too, still remained unknown 
and speculation concerning him was still rife. 

The opening exercises were over, the intro- 
ductory address given, the musical programme 
completed. Nan had acquitted herself well at 
the piano, Charlotte had done not less well, the 
twins had gone through their little songs with 
credit, Mary Lee had not forgotten one word of 
her French recitation, and now the long antici- 
pated moment was at hand. 

Miss Barnes arose and came forward. “I 
have to announce that two prizes are about to 


392 The Four Corners at School 

be awarded,” she began. “You probably all 
know what these are. They are offered through 
the generosity of Mr. Armistead Scott.” Sur- 
prise was visible on the faces of the girls who sat 
a-row behind the speaker, and that they re- 
frained from whispering was because they did 
not want to lose a word of what was to follow. 
“ I wish to state,” Miss Barnes went on, “ that I 
do not myself yet know the names of the win- 
ners of these prizes and that I anticipate the an- 
nouncement with as much eagerness as any of 
you. The judges have decided simply with re- 
gard to the merits of the themes, the names of 
the contestants being withheld from them. Dr. 
Foster will now award the prizes.” She sat 
down and a great hush fell upon the audience. 
The girls held their breath. N ot even the j udges 
knew the names of the winners. What delight- 
ful mystery I What exciting possibilities ! 

In the first row of seats reserved for the 
audience, sat Mr. Pinckney and Miss Dolores. 
Behind them was Mr. Scott, and near by sat 
Nan’s music master, Mr. Harmer. All eyes 
were fixed upon Dr. Foster who now came de- 
liberately forward. At this moment the door at 
the back of the room slowly opened, and some 
one came in softly and slipped into one of the rear 
seats. The girls on the platform did not see 
who it was, for their whole attention was con- 


The Prizes 


393 

centrated upon Dr. Foster. He stood for a mo- 
ment looking at the paper in his hand. 

“ I beg to announce,” he began, “ that we 
have awarded the first prize, a trip to Europe 
under the guidance of Miss Barnes, to the writer 

of ” he paused a moment. Every girl bent 

slightly forward, breathing quickly. “ The 
English Humorists, especially Lewis Carroll,” 
the doctor went on. “ I think you will all agree 
with me, when Miss Barnes favors us with a 
reading, that this special effort shows original 
treatment, a happy conception of the subject 
and considerable wit.” 

“ Wouldn’t it be well to relieve the tension,” 
spoke up Miss Barnes, “ and ask the writer to 
come forward before the reading takes place ? ” 
Clapping of hands announced that this sugges- 
tion was much to the taste of the audience. 
Miss Barnes turned with a smile to the row of 
girls and gave a little nod. From the others, 
blushing like a rose, who but Jo detached her- 
self, and walked forward. “ Miss Josephine 
Keys is the fortunate winner,” said Miss Barnes 
taking Jo by the hand and leading her forward. 
Jo dropped a little curtsey, smiled at the sea of 
faces and went back to her place between Mary 
Lee and Nan. 

“ Oh, you old fraud,” whispered Nan. “ You 
are a rank pretender.” 


c^ 94 The Four Corners at School 

Charlotte who sat next to Nan leaned over 
and gave Jo a pat on the shoulder. Frances 
sat with white, set face, her hands tightly locked 
together. It was a miserable moment for her. 

Dr. Foster still held the paper. “Perhaps,” 
he began again, “ it would be well to state here, 
that we think another paper deserved honorable 
mention and that had there been a second prize 
it would have been accorded to a paper upon 
Wordsworth. This, for a tyro, shows good con- 
struction, easy diction and well phrased Eng- 
lish, but it is not quite such original work as the 
other, and, while we hesitated between the two, 
we felt that the first reached really greater 
heights of excellence in point of originality.” 

Here some one in the audience arose, and 
every neck was craned to see Mr. Glenn, who 
in his dry crisp tones said, “ If, as one of the 
schooFs trustees, I may be allowed such an in- 
novation, I should like to state that it would 
give me pleasure to offer a second prize before 
the author of the paper is known to us. If it is 
permitted, I shaU be glad to hand to Miss Barnes 
my check for fifty dollars to be devoted to the 
buying of such prize as she and the recipient 
may select.” 

A great clapping of hands followed this 
speech. Miss Barnes held a whispered con- 
sultation with Dr. Foster who left the platform 



Next Came the Awarding of the Second Prize 


V 




J -' ^'•'V , .-v^! -P.u • 




i'-'Vv **1 

* >j • 




» J* *^ '’-■■■ • 




>V A . i^i. .^' ■ 


if: 


% 






The Prizes 


395 

and went down into the audience where he 
sought out the other trustees, and in a few mo- 
ments returned to the platform to say, ‘‘ I am 
sure no one present would forgive us if we de- 
clined this generous offer, and therefore I will at 
once announce, in the name of the Wadsworth 
school, that it is accepted with many thanks. 
Will the author of the paper please come for- 
ward ? 

Then Nan, with starry eyes and glowing face, 
met Miss Barnes in the middle of the platform 
and was received with enthusiastic applause led 
by Mr. Pinckney and Mr. Scott, and kept up by 
Hartley and his friends in the rear seats, so that 
it was several minutes before she could retire to 
be fairly hugged by her sister and Jo. 

The two papers were then read, Jo^s bringing 
forth frequent laughter and much applause. It 
was distinctly clever and showed her apprecia- 
tion of humor ; ‘‘ Alice in Wonderland ” never 
had a more devoted admirer than Jo. Nan’s 
essay showed intelligent study, and was an at- 
tempt not beyond the powers of a schoolgirl. 

This first great excitement over, next came 
the awarding of the second prize. The sleek 
little dachshund was led in and brought a storm 
of applause to which he responded by vociferous 
barks and waggings of tail, so that the place 
was in an uproar of merriment and it was some 


396 The Four Corners at School 

time before the noise subsided enough to give 
Dr. Foster a chance to make his speech. ‘‘ We 
find,” he said, “ that taking all things into con- 
sideration the anecdote of the Tame Crow is 
the most worthy of the second prize. There are 
many faults, it is true, but it has a certain fresh- 
ness about it and is very individual. Will the 
writer please appear and receive this impatient 
little animal which no doubt is yearning to meet 
his new mistress ? ” He looked along the row 
of girls. Not one responded. 

“ There is no mistake, is there ?” he said. 

Miss Barnes left her place and went toward 
her pupils with a questioning look. As she 
whispered to first one and then the other 
she received a negative shake of the head till 
she came at last to Daniella, who sat with com- 
pressed lips. Miss Barnes bent over her and a 
whispered conference took place. Miss Barnes 
was urging something, Daniella was refusing. 
So, finally. Miss Barnes came to the front again 
and addressed the now, more than ever, inter- 
ested company. “ The writer of the little anec- 
dote wishes to decline the prize for the simple 
reason that she is Mr. Scott’s daughter.” 

“ Daniella ! ” ejaculated Mr. Scott in pleased 
surprise, but he at once subsided and listened 
attentively to what next Miss Barnes would say. 
** She feels that as the prize is of her father’s 


The Prizes 


397 

giving she should not accept it and begs that 
you will award it to the second best anecdote, 
if you have decided upon it” 

Dr. Foster looked at his associates and re- 
ceived reassuring nods. ‘‘We had determined 
to make known our second choice in this in- 
stance as well as in the first, he said. “ It is a 
very childlike and simple, but very clear and 
charming account of the taming of a Douglas 
squirrel.^^ 

Quite in contrast to Danielians reluctance 
Jack was on her feet in a moment and her clear 
little voice rang out. “ Oh, ifs mine I It’s 
mine. I wrote about the Douglas squirrel, and 
the darling doggy belongs to me 1 ” 

“ Bless her heart, n’ said Mr. St. Nick, again 
leading the applause. Every one had a smile 
for the ecstatic Jack who received the precious 
dog when it was led forward and lifted it 
bodily in her arms, looking up into Dr. P'osteFs 
face with such a blissful expression as brought 
an answering smile from every one in the room. 
She was not the least nonplussed and felt that 
all were her friends as she looked around 
beamingly and said, “Pm going to call him 
Dan.’^ 

“ Hurrah for Dan ! ” cried Hartley from 
his corner and in an instant the cheers went 
up. 


398 The Four Corners at School 

“ You Jack, the idea of its being you,” said 
Mary Lee, hugging her and the dog together. 
“ I never was so surprised in all my life.” 

“ I think it was awfully generous of Danny to 
let me have it,” said Jack, with a happy smile 
at Danny. 

Now came a vote of thanks to Mr. Scott and 
Mr. Glenn, both of whom responded in short 
speeches, that of Mr. Scott showing a certain 
shyness, but a manliness withal, and a little 
subtle humor which was vastly appreciated. 
To the boys in the rear, and to most of the 
girls, Mr. Scott was the hero of the hour. After 
this came a few short ceremonies and then the 
girls were free to escape. 

Jack precipitated herself into Mr. St. Nick’s 
arms, Mary Lee received a hug from Miss 
Dolores, Nan made her way to Mr. Glenn to 
offer her personal thanks, Jo looked up her 
Aunt Kitty, Daniella kept close to Mr. Scott, but 
little Jean it was who first caught sight of a dear 
and familiar form making its way through the 
throng which crowded the room. It was her 
voice which suddenly shrilled out, in tones 
which aroused every one’s attention : “ Mother, 
oh, mother ! ” 

Of what account were prizes then? What 
mattered teachers, schoolmates or friends ? The 
crowd parted to let the four Corners through 


The Prizes 


399 

and the news went along the line : “ The 

Corners* mother has come.” 

“ How did you get here ? Oh, you precious 
darling, when did you come ? How could you 
give us such a surprise? Where is Aunt 
Helen ? ** cried the four girls who surrounded 
their mother, each watching her opportunity to 
give a frantic embrace. 

** As soon as you give me a chance, you dear 
bears, Fll tell you,** she said. 

“ Let*s go somewhere, anywhere, to get a 
place to ourselves,** said Nan in excited im- 
patience. 

‘‘ Wait a few minutes, dear. I must speak to 
Miss Barnes and give a word to the Pinckneys, 
then you can take me where you choose.** 

Therefore it was a matter of half an hour be- 
fore they were free to find the quiet comer for 
which they longed. Their progress up the 
room was so frequently interrupted by con- 
gratulatory friends that it must needs be slow. 
Daniella had charge of the little dog which 
Jack had hastily given over to her at sight 
of Mrs. Corner, and she was the first to be 
greeted, then the Pinckneys pressed forward to 
give a welcome, Jo was waiting to meet the 
dear mother of whom she had heard so much, 
Charlotte was ready to claim acquaintance, 
Mr. Glenn must be presented, and so it went. 


400 The Four Corners at School 

But at last mother and daughters were safe 
within the precincts of their rooms and there they 
could pour forth questions and receive replies to 
their hearts’ content. “ How did it all happen ? ” 
asked Nan, bending over to lay her cheek 
against her mother’s hair. Mrs. Corner sat 
with a twin on each arm of the chair she occu- 
pied ; Mary Lee, possessing herself of one hand, 
sat at her feet. Nan took the place where she 
could lean over once in a while to drop a kiss 
on head, ear or such part of her mother’s face 
as she could reach. 

“It is this way,” Mrs. Corner began. “In 
the first place I left Aunt Helen in Paris ; from 
there she is going to England where she will 
meet us.” 

“Meet us? What do you mean?” cried 
Nan. 

“ Oh, dear, I am getting ahead of my story. 
We decided a little while ago that it would be 
very pleasant to spend another year abroad, for 
there were many places we wanted to see, which 
one short year gave too little time to visit, but 
as I could not think of being separated from 
my darling children so long, I decided that I 
would come over for you and take you back 
with me. We can travel a little this summer 
and in the fall you can be placed in some school 
over there, so we can see each other at least on 


The Prizes 


401 


holidays and semi-occasionally between times, 
then if any of you are ill or anything happens 
we shall not need to cross the ocean to get to 
each other. Do you like the plan, my dears?” 

“ Oh, mother, it’s perfectly delightful,” said 
Nan. 

“ Don’t you like it, Mary Lee ? ” asked her 
mother. 

“ I’d a little rather we’d all be at home to- 
gether, but this is the next best,” she replied. 

“ How about you. Jack? ” 

“ Can I take Dan ? ” 

“ Who is Dan ? ” 

“ Why, the dear new doggie.” 

“ I am not sure about that, but we’ll see.” 

“If we should happen to go to school in Ger- 
many he would be quite at home there,” said 
Mary Lee, quite as anxious as Jack to keep the 
dog with them. 

“What about you, Jean darling?” asked her 
mother. “You haven’t said that you would 
like to go abroad.” 

“ I don’t care where I go,” returned Jean, “ if 
it is only where you and the rest are.” 

“ Home is where the heart is,” sang Nan. 
“ Oh, mother, do you think we could manage 
to go over on the same steamer that takes Miss 
Barnes and her party ? It would be such fun.” 

“ Why, maybe so, if we can get accommoda- 


402 The Four Corners at School 

tions. I have already engaged passage, but 
perhaps Mr. Pinckney can manage a transfer 
for us. By the way, we must not stay away 
too long from our friends.” 

‘‘ Oh, they^re having a good time,” said Nan. 
** Mr. St. Nick and Mr. Scott were talking to- 
gether like old friends, and Mademoiselle had 
Miss Dolores in tow. They’ll do for a while 
yet. Tell us more, mother, dear. Shall we go 
home before we sail?” 

“ Yes, for a week, then we shall come back to 
New York and sail from there.” 

‘‘Jo will go, I am sure,” said Mary Lee. 
“ She has pretended all along that she didn’t 
care much about it, but I know in her heart of 
hearts she has been wild about it. Then there 
will be four other girls from the school. Miss 
Barnes is going to take only five, I believe. It 
would be great larks, Nan, if we could all sail 
by the same steamer.” 

“You haven’t told us yet how you happened 
to get here just in the nick of time for com- 
mencement,” said Nan. 

“ I expected to be here yesterday,” her mother 
answered, “but we were late getting in, and 
the customs delayed. I might have cabled, but 
I did so want to give you the surprise. I took 
the first steamer sailing after we had made our 
plans, at least the first upon which I could 


The Prizes 


403 


secure a good room. It happened not to be 
one of the fastest, though very steady and com- 
fortable. I took the night train from New York 
and got into Boston early. I wanted to reach 
here by nine o^clock but couldn’t quite manage 
it, as you see, so I had to slip into a back seat. 
However, I only missed a part of the exercises 
and those the least interesting. Oh, my dears, 
I haven’t told you yet how proud I am of you 
all. You have done so well, and have been so 
conscientious that it does my heart good. To 
think that my Nan should have taken a prize 
and my little baby Jack, that is the most sur- 
prising of all. Such a wonderful thing actually 
overpowers me.” 

‘‘ What are you going to do with all that 
fifty dollars. Nan ? ” asked Mary Lee. 

“ I don’t know yet. Miss Barnes is to help 
me decide, you know. I think it would be nice 
to spend it in some way abroad, in pictures or 
photographs or something. Miss Barnes will 
know.” 

Here a gentle knock at the door interrupted 
them. “That’s Danny, I know,” said Mary 
Lee rising to open. “ You don’t mind her 
coming in, do you, mother ? ” 

“No, indeed, we shall have plenty of time for 
talk and there are no secrets.” 

Daniella came forward a little bashfully. 


404 The Four Corners at School 

Mrs. Corner took her in her arms and kissed 
her. ** You were very generous to give up the 
little dog, Daniella, dear,” she said. “ I must 
thank you for letting my girls enjoy such an ex- 
pression of Mr. Scott’s kindness.” 

“Did you really want me to have it?” said 
Jack anxiously. 

“ I can’t tell you how delighted I was to 
think one of my dearest friends should have it,” 
said Daniella. “ You know I would rather have 
had it go to the Corner family than to any 
one else. I hope I haven’t disturbed your talk, 
Mrs. Corner.” 

“ Oh, dear, no. We have said the important 
things and there is plenty of time for the rest.” 

“ Besides,” Nan interposed, “ we consider 
you almost one of the family, Danny.” 

“We have such a piece of news,” said Mary 
Lee. 

“ So have I,” returned Daniella. 

“Tell us yours first,” begged Nan. 

“ Then will you tell me yours? ” 

“ Indeed we will.” 

“ Then I’ll tell you that papa is so pleased 
with me that he is going to send me to Europe 
with Miss Barnes and her party. He says I 
won a prize and I shall have one. I never saw 
him so delighted as he is with the way things 
went,” 


The Prizes 


405 

So are we all delighted. After all, I think 
that ]o was the very best one to get that first 
prize. We all are going to Europe anyhow, 
and Jo would probably never have gone. Her 
father isn’t so very well oh, and since his 
second marriage Jo isn’t so happy at home as 
she might be. She always makes the best of 
things, but one can tell by little things that 
she lets slip unawares. She has a lot of little 
brothers and sisters, half ones, or step ones or 
whatever they are, and 1 think she has never 
had the chances we all have had, for her own 
mother died when she was a baby.” Mary Lee 
was the speaker. Her intimacy with Jo had 
given her the opportunity of learning many 
things that the others would never have 
suspected. 

“ I am glad it is Jo,” said Daniella. ” She 
has always been so nice and kind to me, and 
has always stood up for me when Frances tried 
to lord it over me.” 

To think of your going with Miss Barnes,” 
cried Nan. “ Oh, mother, we simply must go 
on that steamer, too, if we have to go as stow- 
aways.” 

“ Why you don’t mean to say you are going, 
too ? ” said Daniella. 

“Yes, that is our news. We are all of us 
going. Back with mother to stay over there 


4o 6 The Four Corners at School 

next year. Going to school.” The news came 
in jerky sentences from one and another. 

Nan was the most impatient. Come on, 
mother,” she urged, ‘‘ let us hunt up Mr. St. Nick 
and see if he thinks we can get passage on the 
same ship. He loves to manage things like 
that. Perhaps Miss Barnes can change, or we 
can do something. Do let us see what can be 
done.” 

Most of the persons who had been present at 
the closing exercises had gone when they 
reached the lower floor, but Mr. Pinckney, Mr. 
Scott and Miss Dolores were still there in 
interested conference. Jo and her Aunt Kitty 
were in one corner with Miss Barnes. Char- 
lotte and her parents were hobnobbing with 
Miss Wheeler and Dr. Foster. There were 
little groups of people scattered about the lawn 
or gathered on the porches. The Corners left 
their mother to talk over matters with Mr. 
Pinckney and Mr. Scott, and then they hunted 
up Jo and Charlotte, Daniella joining their 
train. 

“ Come right over here where it is shady,” 
said Nan. “We have such wonderful things 
to tell and we want to hear about you, Jo. 
What does your Aunt Kitty say about your 
going with Miss Barnes ? ” 

“ Pm going all right. Throw away a good 


The Prizes 


407 

chance like that ? Not if the court knows 
itself. Of course I never dreamed of getting 
the prize, but I had written home about it and 
of course home folks think you’re so terribly 
smart that they sort of banked on my getting 
it, and told Aunt Kitty if I did that I was to go. 
The pater is to be in New York to-morrow and 
I’ll see him before he goes back. I am to go 
home with Aunt Kitty to Worcester and then 
on to New York in time to sail. Aunt Kitty 
and I are going to stop in Boston to get my 
needfuls for the trip. Dad says he will be on 
hand to see me off and will try to meet me 
when I come back to school.” 

** Then you’re coming back ? ” 

** I reckon so. It isn’t a cast-iron arrange- 
ment by any means, but I suppose I will. Shall 
you ? ” 

‘‘Not next year,” and then Nan gave her 
news. 

“ Geewhilikins ! ” exclaimed Jo. “ Don’t I 
wish I could do that ? I’m going straight off 
and tell Aunt Kitty. Maybe dad will tumble 
to that plan, too, as it won’t cost anything to 
get me over there, and if the school is no more 
expensive than this.” She ran off across the 
lawn to find her aunt. 

Nan turned to Charlotte. “ I wish you were 
going, too, Charley.” 


4o 8 The Four Comers at School 

“ So do I, but maybe my time will come. 
How we shall miss you Corners next year.’’ 

“ I never supposed I’d feel the least bit sorry 
to leave,” said Mary Lee. “ But I do. I’m 
really half fond of the place and the people. I 
hope Mike will take good care of Bruce.” 

“Oh, haven’t you heard? Jo is going to 
take him to her Aunt Kitty’s with her, and 
leave him there. Mrs. Leavitt is very fond of 
cats and he will have a good home. I suppose 
you know that Frances has gone. She left 
without saying good-bye to any one.” 

“ Poor Frances,” sighed Nan compassion- 
ately. 

“ I don’t know why you say that,” said 
Daniella. 

“ She’s much to be pitied,” returned Nan 
gravely. 

“ There’s mother beckoning,” said Mary 
Lee. “ Come on, girls, we must go back. The 
Pinckneys are getting ready to leave.” 

It was learned that the Pinckneys were hurry- 
ing away that they might make their own prep- 
arations. “For,” declared Mr. Pinckney, “we 
are going to join this army of emigrants, if we 
can, and if there is such a thing as securing 
passage for such a crowd on any of the ocean 
liners. I’ll do it, but it must be looked into at 
once. There may be some swopping about to 


The Prizes 


409 

be done, but Tve an idea it can be managed, 
ril do some long distance telegraphing as soon 
as I reach Boston and Fll let you know at once 
if there is any chance of our all going to- 
gether.’* 

After this there seemed only a series of good- 
byes until the Corners themselves were ready to 
start on their homeward way. Jo had de- 
parted ; they had seen the last of Charlotte for 
some time. Miss Wheeler and Dr. Foster had 
wished them bon voyage^ and the other teachers 
had given them pleasant words of parting. In 
ten minutes they must be off. The trunks 
stood ready. The little dachshund was nosing 
about pulling at his leash. Suddenly there came 
a sharp peremptory ring at the telephone. Mrs. 
Channing answered. “Mrs. Corner? Yes. 
No, she hasn’t gone yet. Some one to speak to 
you, Mrs. Corner.” 

“Go, Nan, and see what it is,” said Mrs. 
Corner, and Nan obeyed. 

“ Hallo,” came the voice. “ That you, Mrs. 
Corner? Oh, Nan. That’s good. It’s all right. 
Have arranged for entire party to sail by same 
steamer on the twenty-first. What’s that? 
Yes, Miss Barnes, too. Some rooms given up 
and we got them in the nick of time. See you 
in New York to-morrow and tell you all about 
it. Am writing Miss Barnes. Good-bye.” 


410 The Four Corners at School 

“ Oh, Miss Barnes,” cried Nan delightedly. 
“We are all going on the same steamer. Mr. 
Pinckney has arranged it all and will write you 
about it. So this isn’t good-bye ; it’s only au 
revoir.” Then the carriage swept up the drive- 
way and in another minute they were off. 





I 














